jeltz/hostap
1
0
Fork 0
Code Issues Pull requests Projects Releases Wiki Activity
hostap/wpa_supplicant/events.c

4137 lines
111 KiB
C
Raw Normal View History

Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
/*
* WPA Supplicant - Driver event processing
Preparations for variable length KCK and KEK This modifies struct wpa_ptk to allow the length of KCK and KEK to be stored. This is needed to allow longer keys to be used, e.g., with Suite B 192-bit level. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-01-25 15:49:18 +01:00
* Copyright (c) 2003-2015, Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
*
Remove the GPL notification from files contributed by Jouni Malinen Remove the GPL notification text from the files that were initially contributed by myself. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-02-11 15:46:35 +01:00
* This software may be distributed under the terms of the BSD license.
* See README for more details.
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
*/
#include "includes.h"
#include "common.h"
#include "eapol_supp/eapol_supp_sm.h"
Remove src/rsn_supp from default header path
2009-11-29 17:28:08 +01:00
#include "rsn_supp/wpa.h"
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
#include "eloop.h"
#include "config.h"
#include "l2_packet/l2_packet.h"
#include "wpa_supplicant_i.h"
Add preliminary hostapd data structure initialization for AP mode wpa_supplicant can now initialize hostapd data structures when mode=2 is used to set up an AP. The hostapd configuration is not yet set based on wpa_supplicant network configuration block. In addition, the glue code for hostapd driver_ops needs number of functions that will be needed for AP functionality.
2009-03-26 19:37:05 +01:00
#include "driver_i.h"
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
#include "pcsc_funcs.h"
Remove src/rsn_supp from default header path
2009-11-29 17:28:08 +01:00
#include "rsn_supp/preauth.h"
#include "rsn_supp/pmksa_cache.h"
Remove src/common from default header file path This makes it clearer which files are including header from src/common. Some of these cases should probably be cleaned up in the future not to do that. In addition, src/common/nl80211_copy.h and wireless_copy.h were moved into src/drivers since they are only used by driver wrappers and do not need to live in src/common.
2009-11-29 16:51:55 +01:00
#include "common/wpa_ctrl.h"
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
#include "eap_peer/eap.h"
Use generic driver event notification for AP mode assoc/disassoc
2010-01-03 17:22:22 +01:00
#include "ap/hostapd.h"
P2P: Skip GO Neg Conf ack failure workaround of send failures The workaround to ignore no ctrl::ack received for GO Negotiation Confirmation frame was only supposed to be used when the frame was actually transmitted and just the ack was not received. However, due to the way the driver failure on transmitting the frame were reported, this ended up getting applied for all failures in sending the GO Negotiation Confirmation frame. Improve this by providing a mechanism to indicate whether send_action operations fail locally before the frame was actually transmitted or because of not receiving ack frame after having transmitted the frame.
2010-10-19 11:47:33 +02:00
#include "p2p/p2p.h"
FST: Send FST Action frame for processing (wpa_supplicant) Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-11-16 16:28:53 +01:00
#include "fst/fst.h"
WNM: Add WNM-Sleep Mode for station mode Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-02-26 16:27:19 +01:00
#include "wnm_sta.h"
Add wpa_supplicant notification calls This introduces a new mechanism for collecting notification calls into a single place (notify.c). As a result of this, most of the wpa_supplicant code does not need to know about dbus (etc. mechanisms that could use the notifications). Some empty placeholder functions are also added in preparation of new dbus code that needs more event notifications.
2009-09-13 19:53:32 +02:00
#include "notify.h"
Remove src/common from default header file path This makes it clearer which files are including header from src/common. Some of these cases should probably be cleaned up in the future not to do that. In addition, src/common/nl80211_copy.h and wireless_copy.h were moved into src/drivers since they are only used by driver wrappers and do not need to live in src/common.
2009-11-29 16:51:55 +01:00
#include "common/ieee802_11_defs.h"
WPS 2.0: Validate WPS attributes in management frames and WSC messages If CONFIG_WPS_STRICT is set, validate WPS IE(s) in management frames and reject the frames if any of the mandatory attributes is missing or if an included attribute uses an invalid value. In addition, verify that all mandatory attributes are included and have valid values in the WSC messages.
2010-05-26 16:16:14 +02:00
#include "common/ieee802_11_common.h"
Maintain internal entropy pool for augmenting random number generation By default, make hostapd and wpa_supplicant maintain an internal entropy pool that is fed with following information: hostapd: - Probe Request frames (timing, RSSI) - Association events (timing) - SNonce from Supplicants wpa_supplicant: - Scan results (timing, signal/noise) - Association events (timing) The internal pool is used to augment the random numbers generated with the OS mechanism (os_get_random()). While the internal implementation is not expected to be very strong due to limited amount of generic (non-platform specific) information to feed the pool, this may strengthen key derivation on some devices that are not configured to provide strong random numbers through os_get_random() (e.g., /dev/urandom on Linux/BSD). This new mechanism is not supposed to replace proper OS provided random number generation mechanism. The OS mechanism needs to be initialized properly (e.g., hw random number generator, maintaining entropy pool over reboots, etc.) for any of the security assumptions to hold. If the os_get_random() is known to provide strong ramdom data (e.g., on Linux/BSD, the board in question is known to have reliable source of random data from /dev/urandom), the internal hostapd random pool can be disabled. This will save some in binary size and CPU use. However, this should only be considered for builds that are known to be used on devices that meet the requirements described above. The internal pool is disabled by adding CONFIG_NO_RANDOM_POOL=y to the .config file.
2010-11-24 00:29:40 +01:00
#include "crypto/random.h"
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
#include "blacklist.h"
#include "wpas_glue.h"
WPS: Added support for fragmented WPS IE in Beacon and Probe Response Fragment WPS IE if needed to fit into the IE length limits in hostapd and Reassemble WPS IE data from multiple IEs in wpa_supplicant. In addition, moved WPS code from events.c into wps_supplicant.c to clean up module interfaces.
2008-11-29 21:06:34 +01:00
#include "wps_supplicant.h"
Added initial step for IBSS RSN support This commit adds a new build option, CONFIG_IBSS_RSN=y, that can be used to enable RSN support for IBSS. This links in RSN Authenticator code from hostapd and adds code for managing per-peer information for IBSS. A new wpa_cli command or driver event can be used to request RSN authentication with an IBSS peer. New RSN Authenticator and Supplicant will be allocated for each peer. The basic state machine setup code is included in this commit, but the state machines are not properly started yet. In addition, some of the callback functions are not yet complete.
2009-01-15 00:21:55 +01:00
#include "ibss_rsn.h"
Add SME support (separate authentication and association) This can be used, e.g., with mac80211-based Linux drivers with nl80211. This allows over-the-air FT protocol to be used (IEEE 802.11r). Since the nl80211 interface needed for this is very recent (added today into wireless-testing.git), driver_nl80211.c has backwards compatibility code that uses WEXT for association if the kernel does not support the new commands. This compatibility code can be disabled by defining NO_WEXT_COMPAT. That code will also be removed at some point to clean up driver_nl80211.c.
2009-03-20 21:26:41 +01:00
#include "sme.h"
GAS: Add a generic GAS query module This implements GAS request mechanism that is aimed at being used to replace use case specific GAS/ANQP implementations in the future. Compared to the earlier implementation in P2P SD, this implementation includes support for multiple concurrent requests and more thorough validation of frames against the pending query data. GAS header processing, including comeback and reassembly, are handled within gas_query.c and the users of this module will only need to provide the Query Request and process the (possibly reassembled) Query Response.
2011-09-28 18:44:25 +02:00
#include "gas_query.h"
P2P: Map driver events to P2P event notifications
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
#include "p2p_supplicant.h"
Add preliminary background scan and roaming module design This allows background scanning and roaming decisions to be contained in a single place based on a defined set of notification events which will hopefully make it easier to experiment with roaming improvements. In addition, this allows multiple intra-ESS roaming policies to be used (each network configuration block can configure its own bgscan module). The beacon loss and signal strength notifications are implemented for the bgscan API, but the actual events are not yet available from the driver. The included sample bgscan module ("simple") is an example of what can be done with the new bgscan mechanism. It requests periodic background scans when the device remains associated with an ESS and has couple of notes on what a more advanced bgscan module could do to optimize background scanning and roaming. The periodic scans will cause the scan result handler to pick a better AP if one becomes available. This bgscan module can be taken into use by adding bgscan="simple" (or bgscan="simple:<bgscan interval in seconds>") into the network configuration block.
2009-09-14 23:08:24 +02:00
#include "bgscan.h"
Add automatic scanning support Like bgscan, autoscan is an optional module based feature to automate scanning but while disconnected or inactive. Instead of requesting directly a scan, it only sets the scan_interval and the sched_scan_interval. So, if the driver supports sched_scan, autoscan will be able to tweak its interval. Otherwise, the tweaked scan_interval will be used. If scan parameters needs to be tweaked, an autoscan_params pointer in wpa_s will provide those. So req_scan / req_sched_scan will not set the scan parameters as they usually do, but instead will use this pointer. Modules will not have to request a scan directly, like bgscan does. Instead, it will need to return the interval it wants after each notification. Signed-hostap: Tomasz Bursztyka <tomasz.bursztyka@linux.intel.com>
2012-06-26 17:55:41 +02:00
#include "autoscan.h"
Use generic driver events for TX status and RX reporting Replace driver wrapper calls to hostapd_tx_status(), hostapd_rx_from_unknown_sta(), hostapd_mgmt_rx(), and hostapd_mgmt_tx_cb() with new generic driver events EVENT_TX_STATUS, EVENT_RX_FROM_UNKNOWN, and EVENT_RX_MGMT. This cleans up lot of the driver wrapper code to be less dependent on whether it is being used within wpa_supplicant AP mode or hostapd.
2009-12-13 22:05:39 +01:00
#include "ap.h"
Use BSS table entry instead of raw scan result for connection
2010-01-02 15:16:02 +01:00
#include "bss.h"
Move wpa_supplicant specific scan code away from src/drivers This fits better in wpa_supplicant/scan.c. Couple of remaining scan_helpers.c functions are currently used in driver wrappers, but they can likely be removed in the future.
2010-01-03 17:48:11 +01:00
#include "scan.h"
GAS: Use off-channel operations for requests This separates off-channel Action frame TX/RX from P2P into a generic implementation that can now be used both for P2P and GAS needs.
2011-09-29 18:22:08 +02:00
#include "offchannel.h"
Interworking: Add optional use of network selection on normal scans auto_interworking=1 configuration parameter can be used to request wpa_supplicant to use Interworking network selection automatically as a part of the normal (non-Interworking) network selection if the scan results do not match with enabled networks. This makes scanning work similarly to the "interworking_select auto" command. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-08-28 15:14:13 +02:00
#include "interworking.h"
mesh: Add mesh mode routines Add routines to (de)initialize mesh interface data structures and join and leave mesh networks. Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name> Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <thomas@noack.us>
2014-09-01 06:23:21 +02:00
#include "mesh.h"
mesh: Add mesh peering manager The mesh peering manager establishes and maintains links among mesh peers, tracking each peer link via a finite state machine. This implementation supports open mesh peerings. [assorted fixes from Yu Niiro <yu.niiro@gmail.com>] [more fixes from Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>] Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Ashok Nagarajan <ashok.dragon@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name> Signed-hostap: Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
2014-03-11 05:07:01 +01:00
#include "mesh_mpm.h"
WMM AC: Parse WMM IE on association Initialize WMM AC data structures upon successful association with an AP that publishes WMM support, and deinitialize the data structure when the association is no longer valid. Signed-off-by: Moshe Benji <moshe.benji@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
2014-10-22 14:03:54 +02:00
#include "wmm_ac.h"
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
Remove compiler warnings with CONFIG_NO_SCAN_PROCESSING Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-06-07 19:04:56 +02:00
#ifndef CONFIG_NO_SCAN_PROCESSING
RSN: Update preauth scan results only based on new scan results The fast-connect optimization to skip a new scan did not update how the RSN preauthentication callback is used. There is no point in trying to add preauthentication candidates from cases where scan was skipped, so skip this call, too, in such cases. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-04-23 17:24:00 +02:00
static int wpas_select_network_from_last_scan(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
Request new scan only for the original interface Request new scan only for the interface for which the original scan request and results has come. Otherwise while sharing scan results along with P2P interfaces, the new scan will be requested on P2P interfaces. Signed-hostap: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
2013-11-17 11:23:09 +01:00
int new_scan, int own_request);
Remove compiler warnings with CONFIG_NO_SCAN_PROCESSING Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-06-07 19:04:56 +02:00
#endif /* CONFIG_NO_SCAN_PROCESSING */
Make wpas_select_network_from_last_scan() static Addition of wpa_supplicant_fast_associate() made it unnecessary to call wpas_select_network_from_last_scan() directly from other files. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-02-03 20:13:07 +01:00
Disable network block temporarily on authentication failures If 4-way handshake fails due to likely PSK failure or if EAP authentication fails, disable the network block temporarily. Use longer duration if multiple consecutive failures are seen. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-08-26 22:01:26 +02:00
static int wpas_temp_disabled(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
struct wpa_ssid *ssid)
{
wpa_supplicant: Use monotonic time for temp-disabled networks Temporarily disabled networks are disabled for a certain duration, so the code should use monotonic time. Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2013-12-16 21:08:41 +01:00
struct os_reltime now;
Disable network block temporarily on authentication failures If 4-way handshake fails due to likely PSK failure or if EAP authentication fails, disable the network block temporarily. Use longer duration if multiple consecutive failures are seen. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-08-26 22:01:26 +02:00
if (ssid == NULL || ssid->disabled_until.sec == 0)
return 0;
wpa_supplicant: Use monotonic time for temp-disabled networks Temporarily disabled networks are disabled for a certain duration, so the code should use monotonic time. Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2013-12-16 21:08:41 +01:00
os_get_reltime(&now);
Disable network block temporarily on authentication failures If 4-way handshake fails due to likely PSK failure or if EAP authentication fails, disable the network block temporarily. Use longer duration if multiple consecutive failures are seen. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-08-26 22:01:26 +02:00
if (ssid->disabled_until.sec > now.sec)
return ssid->disabled_until.sec - now.sec;
wpas_clear_temp_disabled(wpa_s, ssid, 0);
return 0;
}
Comment out wpas_reenabled_network_time with CONFIG_NO_SCAN_PROCESSING This removes a compiler warning about unused function. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-11-23 22:33:55 +01:00
#ifndef CONFIG_NO_SCAN_PROCESSING
Delay AP selection if all networks are temporarily disabled If all networks are temporarily disabled, delay AP selection until at least one network is enabled. Running AP selection when all networks are disabled is useless as wpa_supplicant will not try to connect. In addition, it will result in needless scan iterations that may delay the connection when it is needed. Signed-off-by: Avraham Stern <avraham.stern@intel.com>
2015-03-16 06:20:02 +01:00
/**
* wpas_reenabled_network_time - Time until first network is re-enabled
* @wpa_s: Pointer to wpa_supplicant data
* Returns: If all enabled networks are temporarily disabled, returns the time
* (in sec) until the first network is re-enabled. Otherwise returns 0.
*
* This function is used in case all enabled networks are temporarily disabled,
* in which case it returns the time (in sec) that the first network will be
* re-enabled. The function assumes that at least one network is enabled.
*/
static int wpas_reenabled_network_time(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s)
{
struct wpa_ssid *ssid;
int disabled_for, res = 0;
#ifdef CONFIG_INTERWORKING
if (wpa_s->conf->auto_interworking && wpa_s->conf->interworking &&
wpa_s->conf->cred)
return 0;
#endif /* CONFIG_INTERWORKING */
for (ssid = wpa_s->conf->ssid; ssid; ssid = ssid->next) {
if (ssid->disabled)
continue;
disabled_for = wpas_temp_disabled(wpa_s, ssid);
if (!disabled_for)
return 0;
if (!res || disabled_for < res)
res = disabled_for;
}
return res;
}
Comment out wpas_reenabled_network_time with CONFIG_NO_SCAN_PROCESSING This removes a compiler warning about unused function. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-11-23 22:33:55 +01:00
#endif /* CONFIG_NO_SCAN_PROCESSING */
Delay AP selection if all networks are temporarily disabled If all networks are temporarily disabled, delay AP selection until at least one network is enabled. Running AP selection when all networks are disabled is useless as wpa_supplicant will not try to connect. In addition, it will result in needless scan iterations that may delay the connection when it is needed. Signed-off-by: Avraham Stern <avraham.stern@intel.com>
2015-03-16 06:20:02 +01:00
void wpas_network_reenabled(void *eloop_ctx, void *timeout_ctx)
{
struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s = eloop_ctx;
if (wpa_s->disconnected || wpa_s->wpa_state != WPA_SCANNING)
return;
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
"Try to associate due to network getting re-enabled");
if (wpa_supplicant_fast_associate(wpa_s) != 1) {
wpa_supplicant_cancel_sched_scan(wpa_s);
wpa_supplicant_req_scan(wpa_s, 0, 0);
}
}
P2P NFC: WPA state machine config with driver-based BSS selection wpa_s->current_bss was updated too late for the wpa_supplicant_rsn_supp_set_config() call within wpa_supplicant_select_config(). Re-order code so that current_bss gets updated between current_ssid update and this call to set the WPA state machine configuration, so that the new code that determines whether the current GO support the new IP address assignment mechanism works. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-09-09 02:15:42 +02:00
static struct wpa_bss * wpa_supplicant_get_new_bss(
struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s, const u8 *bssid)
{
struct wpa_bss *bss = NULL;
struct wpa_ssid *ssid = wpa_s->current_ssid;
if (ssid->ssid_len > 0)
bss = wpa_bss_get(wpa_s, bssid, ssid->ssid, ssid->ssid_len);
if (!bss)
bss = wpa_bss_get_bssid(wpa_s, bssid);
return bss;
}
STA: Update scan results for ap_scan=1 skip-selection case also The commit 5cd4740580350371d77618ac037deef90b48d339 has rearranged the update scan results code and hence the IEs were not getting updated properly for ap_scan=1 case. This can result in a 4-way handshake failure in the roaming case (IE mismatch in 3/4 EAPOL). Fix this by updating the scan results even if ap_scan=1 is used and network does not need to get reselected based on association information. Signed-off-by: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com> Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com> Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-08-18 20:04:56 +02:00
static void wpa_supplicant_update_current_bss(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s)
{
struct wpa_bss *bss = wpa_supplicant_get_new_bss(wpa_s, wpa_s->bssid);
if (!bss) {
wpa_supplicant_update_scan_results(wpa_s);
/* Get the BSS from the new scan results */
bss = wpa_supplicant_get_new_bss(wpa_s, wpa_s->bssid);
}
if (bss)
wpa_s->current_bss = bss;
}
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
static int wpa_supplicant_select_config(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s)
{
Add wpa_supplicant notification calls This introduces a new mechanism for collecting notification calls into a single place (notify.c). As a result of this, most of the wpa_supplicant code does not need to know about dbus (etc. mechanisms that could use the notifications). Some empty placeholder functions are also added in preparation of new dbus code that needs more event notifications.
2009-09-13 19:53:32 +02:00
struct wpa_ssid *ssid, *old_ssid;
Replace MAX_SSID_LEN with SSID_MAX_LEN This makes source code more consistent. The use within Android driver interface is left as-is to avoid changes in the old PNO interface definition. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-04-07 11:44:39 +02:00
u8 drv_ssid[SSID_MAX_LEN];
nl80211: Allow driver-based roam to change ESS This extends NL80211_CMD_ROAM event processing to allow the driver to roam to another ESS (different SSID) when using offloaded BSS selection. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-03-13 13:29:20 +01:00
size_t drv_ssid_len;
Disable network block temporarily on authentication failures If 4-way handshake fails due to likely PSK failure or if EAP authentication fails, disable the network block temporarily. Use longer duration if multiple consecutive failures are seen. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-08-26 22:01:26 +02:00
int res;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
STA: Update scan results for ap_scan=1 skip-selection case also The commit 5cd4740580350371d77618ac037deef90b48d339 has rearranged the update scan results code and hence the IEs were not getting updated properly for ap_scan=1 case. This can result in a 4-way handshake failure in the roaming case (IE mismatch in 3/4 EAPOL). Fix this by updating the scan results even if ap_scan=1 is used and network does not need to get reselected based on association information. Signed-off-by: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com> Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com> Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-08-18 20:04:56 +02:00
if (wpa_s->conf->ap_scan == 1 && wpa_s->current_ssid) {
wpa_supplicant_update_current_bss(wpa_s);
nl80211: Allow driver-based roam to change ESS This extends NL80211_CMD_ROAM event processing to allow the driver to roam to another ESS (different SSID) when using offloaded BSS selection. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-03-13 13:29:20 +01:00
if (wpa_s->current_ssid->ssid_len == 0)
return 0; /* current profile still in use */
res = wpa_drv_get_ssid(wpa_s, drv_ssid);
if (res < 0) {
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_INFO,
"Failed to read SSID from driver");
return 0; /* try to use current profile */
}
drv_ssid_len = res;
if (drv_ssid_len == wpa_s->current_ssid->ssid_len &&
os_memcmp(drv_ssid, wpa_s->current_ssid->ssid,
drv_ssid_len) == 0)
return 0; /* current profile still in use */
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
"Driver-initiated BSS selection changed the SSID to %s",
wpa_ssid_txt(drv_ssid, drv_ssid_len));
/* continue selecting a new network profile */
STA: Update scan results for ap_scan=1 skip-selection case also The commit 5cd4740580350371d77618ac037deef90b48d339 has rearranged the update scan results code and hence the IEs were not getting updated properly for ap_scan=1 case. This can result in a 4-way handshake failure in the roaming case (IE mismatch in 3/4 EAPOL). Fix this by updating the scan results even if ap_scan=1 is used and network does not need to get reselected based on association information. Signed-off-by: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com> Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com> Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-08-18 20:04:56 +02:00
}
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Select network based on association "
"information");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
ssid = wpa_supplicant_get_ssid(wpa_s);
if (ssid == NULL) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_INFO,
"No network configuration found for the current AP");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
return -1;
}
Validate WEP key lengths based on driver capabilities The nl80211 driver interface does not allow 128-bit WEP to be used without a vendor specific cipher suite and no such suite is defined for this purpose. Do not accept WEP key length 16 for nl80211 driver interface forn ow. wext-interface can still try to use these for backwards compatibility. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-05-10 13:34:46 +02:00
if (wpas_network_disabled(wpa_s, ssid)) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Selected network is disabled");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
return -1;
}
Add disallow_aps parameter to disallow BSSIDs/SSIDs External programs can use this new parameter to prevent wpa_supplicant from connecting to a list of BSSIDs and/or SSIDs. The disallowed BSSes will still be visible in scan results and it is possible to run ANQP operations with them, but BSS selection for connection will skip any BSS that matches an entry in the disallowed list. The new parameter can be set with the control interface SET command using following syntax: SET disallow_aps <disallow_list> disallow_list ::= <ssid_spec> | <bssid_spec> | <disallow_list> | “” SSID_SPEC ::= ssid <SSID_HEX> BSSID_SPEC ::= bssid <BSSID_HEX> For example: wpa_cli set disallow_list "ssid 74657374 bssid 001122334455 ssid 68656c6c6f" wpa_cli set disallow_list (the empty value removes all entries) Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-09-27 16:36:59 +02:00
if (disallowed_bssid(wpa_s, wpa_s->bssid) ||
disallowed_ssid(wpa_s, ssid->ssid, ssid->ssid_len)) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Selected BSS is disallowed");
return -1;
}
Disable network block temporarily on authentication failures If 4-way handshake fails due to likely PSK failure or if EAP authentication fails, disable the network block temporarily. Use longer duration if multiple consecutive failures are seen. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-08-26 22:01:26 +02:00
res = wpas_temp_disabled(wpa_s, ssid);
if (res > 0) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Selected network is temporarily "
"disabled for %d second(s)", res);
return -1;
}
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Network configuration found for the "
"current AP");
Use wpa_key_mgmt_*() helpers This cleans up the source code and makes it less likely that new AKM addition misses some needed changes in the future. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-24 21:46:14 +01:00
if (wpa_key_mgmt_wpa_any(ssid->key_mgmt)) {
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
u8 wpa_ie[80];
size_t wpa_ie_len = sizeof(wpa_ie);
Add more debug info if wpa_supplicant_set_suites() fails Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-01-01 19:31:35 +01:00
if (wpa_supplicant_set_suites(wpa_s, NULL, ssid,
wpa_ie, &wpa_ie_len) < 0)
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Could not set WPA suites");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
} else {
wpa_supplicant_set_non_wpa_policy(wpa_s, ssid);
}
if (wpa_s->current_ssid && wpa_s->current_ssid != ssid)
eapol_sm_invalidate_cached_session(wpa_s->eapol);
Add wpa_supplicant notification calls This introduces a new mechanism for collecting notification calls into a single place (notify.c). As a result of this, most of the wpa_supplicant code does not need to know about dbus (etc. mechanisms that could use the notifications). Some empty placeholder functions are also added in preparation of new dbus code that needs more event notifications.
2009-09-13 19:53:32 +02:00
old_ssid = wpa_s->current_ssid;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
wpa_s->current_ssid = ssid;
P2P NFC: WPA state machine config with driver-based BSS selection wpa_s->current_bss was updated too late for the wpa_supplicant_rsn_supp_set_config() call within wpa_supplicant_select_config(). Re-order code so that current_bss gets updated between current_ssid update and this call to set the WPA state machine configuration, so that the new code that determines whether the current GO support the new IP address assignment mechanism works. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-09-09 02:15:42 +02:00
STA: Update scan results for ap_scan=1 skip-selection case also The commit 5cd4740580350371d77618ac037deef90b48d339 has rearranged the update scan results code and hence the IEs were not getting updated properly for ap_scan=1 case. This can result in a 4-way handshake failure in the roaming case (IE mismatch in 3/4 EAPOL). Fix this by updating the scan results even if ap_scan=1 is used and network does not need to get reselected based on association information. Signed-off-by: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com> Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com> Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-08-18 20:04:56 +02:00
wpa_supplicant_update_current_bss(wpa_s);
P2P NFC: WPA state machine config with driver-based BSS selection wpa_s->current_bss was updated too late for the wpa_supplicant_rsn_supp_set_config() call within wpa_supplicant_select_config(). Re-order code so that current_bss gets updated between current_ssid update and this call to set the WPA state machine configuration, so that the new code that determines whether the current GO support the new IP address assignment mechanism works. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-09-09 02:15:42 +02:00
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
wpa_supplicant_rsn_supp_set_config(wpa_s, wpa_s->current_ssid);
wpa_supplicant_initiate_eapol(wpa_s);
Add wpa_supplicant notification calls This introduces a new mechanism for collecting notification calls into a single place (notify.c). As a result of this, most of the wpa_supplicant code does not need to know about dbus (etc. mechanisms that could use the notifications). Some empty placeholder functions are also added in preparation of new dbus code that needs more event notifications.
2009-09-13 19:53:32 +02:00
if (old_ssid != wpa_s->current_ssid)
wpas_notify_network_changed(wpa_s);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
return 0;
}
Fix TKIP countermeasures stopping in deinit paths The eloop timeout to stop TKIP countermeasures has to be canceled on deinit path to avoid leaving bogus timeouts behind. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-10-30 11:43:30 +01:00
void wpa_supplicant_stop_countermeasures(void *eloop_ctx, void *sock_ctx)
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
{
struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s = eloop_ctx;
if (wpa_s->countermeasures) {
wpa_s->countermeasures = 0;
wpa_drv_set_countermeasures(wpa_s, 0);
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_INFO, "WPA: TKIP countermeasures stopped");
wpa_supplicant: Cancel sched_scan when stopping countermeasures When stopping the TKIP countermeasures, it would be preferable to connect immediately. However if scheduled scan is in progress, a connection attempt will be done only when scan results are received, so cancel the scheduled scan to allow immediate scan and connection attempt. Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
2015-02-18 03:35:14 +01:00
/*
* It is possible that the device is sched scanning, which means
* that a connection attempt will be done only when we receive
* scan results. However, in this case, it would be preferable
* to scan and connect immediately, so cancel the sched_scan and
* issue a regular scan flow.
*/
wpa_supplicant_cancel_sched_scan(wpa_s);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
wpa_supplicant_req_scan(wpa_s, 0, 0);
}
}
void wpa_supplicant_mark_disassoc(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s)
{
Add wpa_supplicant notification calls This introduces a new mechanism for collecting notification calls into a single place (notify.c). As a result of this, most of the wpa_supplicant code does not need to know about dbus (etc. mechanisms that could use the notifications). Some empty placeholder functions are also added in preparation of new dbus code that needs more event notifications.
2009-09-13 19:53:32 +02:00
int bssid_changed;
WNM: Add advertisement of BSS max idle period If WNM is enabled for the build (CONFIG_WNM=y), add BSS max idle period information to the (Re)Association Response frame from the AP and parse this information on the station. For SME-in-wpa_supplicant case, add a timer to handle periodic transmission of the keep-alive frame. The actual request for the driver to transmit a frame is not yet implemented. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-05-28 02:35:00 +02:00
wnm_bss_keep_alive_deinit(wpa_s);
RSN IBSS: Restart IBSS state machines for each new IBSS Change the old design of running a single long living RSN IBSS instance to keep a separate instance for each IBSS connection. This fixes number of issues in getting keys set properly for new connections and is in general quite a bit more correct design.
2011-03-23 20:15:46 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_IBSS_RSN
ibss_rsn_deinit(wpa_s->ibss_rsn);
wpa_s->ibss_rsn = NULL;
#endif /* CONFIG_IBSS_RSN */
wpa_supplicant AP: Disable AP mode on disassoc paths Regardless of how the AP mode is disabled, wpa_supplicant_ap_deinit() must be called. Make sure this happens on all paths by calling the deinit function from wpa_supplicant_mark_disassoc().
2011-07-05 15:38:30 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_AP
wpa_supplicant_ap_deinit(wpa_s);
#endif /* CONFIG_AP */
HS 2.0: Add support for configuring frame filters When a station starts an association to a Hotspot 2.0 network, request the driver to do the following, based on the BSS capabilities: 1. Enable gratuitous ARP filtering 2. Enable unsolicited Neighbor Advertisement filtering 3. Enable unicast IP packet encrypted with GTK filtering if DGAF disabled bit is zero Clear the filter configuration when the station interface is disassociated. Signed-off-by: Matti Gottlieb <matti.gottlieb@intel.com>
2016-04-06 16:14:41 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_HS20
/* Clear possibly configured frame filters */
wpa_drv_configure_frame_filters(wpa_s, 0);
#endif /* CONFIG_HS20 */
Add Linux rfkill support Add a new wpa_supplicant state: interface disabled. This can be used to allow wpa_supplicant to be running with the network interface even when the driver does not actually allow any radio operations (e.g., due to rfkill). Allow driver_nl80211.c and driver_wext.c to start while rfkill is in blocked state (i.e., when ifconfig up fails) and process rfkill events to block/unblock WLAN.
2010-05-23 09:27:32 +02:00
if (wpa_s->wpa_state == WPA_INTERFACE_DISABLED)
return;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
wpa_supplicant_set_state(wpa_s, WPA_DISCONNECTED);
Add wpa_supplicant notification calls This introduces a new mechanism for collecting notification calls into a single place (notify.c). As a result of this, most of the wpa_supplicant code does not need to know about dbus (etc. mechanisms that could use the notifications). Some empty placeholder functions are also added in preparation of new dbus code that needs more event notifications.
2009-09-13 19:53:32 +02:00
bssid_changed = !is_zero_ether_addr(wpa_s->bssid);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
os_memset(wpa_s->bssid, 0, ETH_ALEN);
os_memset(wpa_s->pending_bssid, 0, ETH_ALEN);
SAE: Clear keys from memory on disassociation There is no need to keep temporary keys in memory beyond the end of the association, so explicitly clear any SAE buffers that can contain keys as soon as such keys are not needed. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-12-29 17:40:10 +01:00
sme_clear_on_disassoc(wpa_s);
Clear current_bss pointer on disassociation/deauthentication This is needed to allow the BSS table entry for the previously used BSS to be removed. Now wpa_bss_in_use() can return 0 for the last BSS that was used as soon as deauthentication/disassociation event has been received.
2010-02-27 17:40:25 +01:00
wpa_s->current_bss = NULL;
P2P: Fix Action frame sending after disconnection assoc_freq needs to be cleared when an interface gets disconnected. This fixes an issue where P2P Action frame transmission may fail because of missing remain-on-channel operation when using the same interface for group operations (or non-P2P connections) and P2P management operations.
2010-11-25 15:04:07 +01:00
wpa_s->assoc_freq = 0;
FT: Clear SME ft_used/ft_ies when disconnecting Previous ft_ies needs to be removed before supplicant starts a new FT initial association and this requires the ft_used state to be cleared here. Signed-off-by: Hong Wu <hong.wu@dspg.com>
2011-07-05 20:17:31 +02:00
Add wpa_supplicant notification calls This introduces a new mechanism for collecting notification calls into a single place (notify.c). As a result of this, most of the wpa_supplicant code does not need to know about dbus (etc. mechanisms that could use the notifications). Some empty placeholder functions are also added in preparation of new dbus code that needs more event notifications.
2009-09-13 19:53:32 +02:00
if (bssid_changed)
wpas_notify_bssid_changed(wpa_s);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
eapol_sm_notify_portEnabled(wpa_s->eapol, FALSE);
eapol_sm_notify_portValid(wpa_s->eapol, FALSE);
Added support for using SHA256-based stronger key derivation for WPA2 IEEE 802.11w/D6.0 defines new AKMPs to indicate SHA256-based algorithms for key derivation (and AES-CMAC for EAPOL-Key MIC). Add support for using new AKMPs and clean up AKMP processing with helper functions in defs.h.
2008-08-31 21:57:28 +02:00
if (wpa_key_mgmt_wpa_psk(wpa_s->key_mgmt))
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
eapol_sm_notify_eap_success(wpa_s->eapol, FALSE);
wpa_s->ap_ies_from_associnfo = 0;
Clear current_ssid and key_mgmt when disconnected This makes wpa_supplicant state somewhat cleaner since the information from previously used connection is not maintained after getting disconnected. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-08-26 22:20:41 +02:00
wpa_s->current_ssid = NULL;
Clear EAPOL supplicant configuration info on current_ssid changes There were some code paths that allowed obsolete configuration data pointer to be maintained within EAPOL supplicant in case a network was removed while not connection to it (i.e., wpa_s->current_ssid not pointing to the network that was removed). This could result in use of freed memory, e.g., from eap_sm_notify_ctrl_attached() when a new control interface connected prior to the EAPOL supplicant configuration pointer got updated. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-08-25 18:46:57 +02:00
eapol_sm_notify_config(wpa_s->eapol, NULL, NULL);
Clear current_ssid and key_mgmt when disconnected This makes wpa_supplicant state somewhat cleaner since the information from previously used connection is not maintained after getting disconnected. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-08-26 22:20:41 +02:00
wpa_s->key_mgmt = 0;
SME: Add RRM support to association request In case the AP we are associating with advertises support for RRM, advertise our own RRM support in the (Re)Association Request frame. This is done by adding an RRM Capabilities IE. The underlying driver is expected to further add a Power Capabilities IE to the request, and set the Radio Measurement flag in the Capability Info field. At this point the RRM Capabilities IE advertises no measurement support. Signed-off-by: Assaf Krauss <assaf.krauss@intel.com>
2014-11-05 09:42:48 +01:00
wpas_rrm_reset(wpa_s);
WNM: Ignore WNM-Sleep Mode Response if WNM-Sleep Mode has not been used The AP is not expected to send out a WNM-Sleep Mode Response frame without the STA trying to use WNM-Sleep Mode. Drop such unexpected responses to reduce unnecessary processing of the frame. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-10-25 22:02:14 +01:00
wpa_s->wnmsleep_used = 0;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
}
static void wpa_find_assoc_pmkid(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s)
{
struct wpa_ie_data ie;
int pmksa_set = -1;
size_t i;
if (wpa_sm_parse_own_wpa_ie(wpa_s->wpa, &ie) < 0 ||
ie.pmkid == NULL)
return;
for (i = 0; i < ie.num_pmkid; i++) {
pmksa_set = pmksa_cache_set_current(wpa_s->wpa,
ie.pmkid + i * PMKID_LEN,
NULL, NULL, 0);
if (pmksa_set == 0) {
Simplify eapol_sm_notify_pmkid_attempt() Drop the unneeded 'attempt' argument. This was originally used for indicating an aborted PMKID caching attempt, but a fix in 2006 removed the only such user and since that time, only attempt == 1 has been used. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-01-28 00:26:14 +01:00
eapol_sm_notify_pmkid_attempt(wpa_s->eapol);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
break;
}
}
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "RSN: PMKID from assoc IE %sfound from "
"PMKSA cache", pmksa_set == 0 ? "" : "not ");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
}
static void wpa_supplicant_event_pmkid_candidate(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
union wpa_event_data *data)
{
if (data == NULL) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "RSN: No data in PMKID candidate "
"event");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
return;
}
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "RSN: PMKID candidate event - bssid=" MACSTR
" index=%d preauth=%d",
MAC2STR(data->pmkid_candidate.bssid),
data->pmkid_candidate.index,
data->pmkid_candidate.preauth);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
pmksa_candidate_add(wpa_s->wpa, data->pmkid_candidate.bssid,
data->pmkid_candidate.index,
data->pmkid_candidate.preauth);
}
static int wpa_supplicant_dynamic_keys(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s)
{
if (wpa_s->key_mgmt == WPA_KEY_MGMT_NONE ||
wpa_s->key_mgmt == WPA_KEY_MGMT_WPA_NONE)
return 0;
#ifdef IEEE8021X_EAPOL
if (wpa_s->key_mgmt == WPA_KEY_MGMT_IEEE8021X_NO_WPA &&
wpa_s->current_ssid &&
!(wpa_s->current_ssid->eapol_flags &
(EAPOL_FLAG_REQUIRE_KEY_UNICAST |
EAPOL_FLAG_REQUIRE_KEY_BROADCAST))) {
/* IEEE 802.1X, but not using dynamic WEP keys (i.e., either
* plaintext or static WEP keys). */
return 0;
}
#endif /* IEEE8021X_EAPOL */
return 1;
}
/**
* wpa_supplicant_scard_init - Initialize SIM/USIM access with PC/SC
* @wpa_s: pointer to wpa_supplicant data
* @ssid: Configuration data for the network
* Returns: 0 on success, -1 on failure
*
* This function is called when starting authentication with a network that is
* configured to use PC/SC for SIM/USIM access (EAP-SIM or EAP-AKA).
*/
int wpa_supplicant_scard_init(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
struct wpa_ssid *ssid)
{
#ifdef IEEE8021X_EAPOL
Comment out scard initialization code if PCSC_FUNCS is not set
2011-10-23 11:24:36 +02:00
#ifdef PCSC_FUNCS
Fix switching from EAP-SIM to EAP-AKA/AKA' Switching EAP method from EAP-SIM to EAP-AKA fails. wpa_cli commands are below. ------------------ sudo wpa_cli add_network sudo wpa_cli set_network 0 ssid '"eap-sim"' sudo wpa_cli set_network 0 key_mgmt WPA-EAP sudo wpa_cli set_network 0 eap SIM sudo wpa_cli set_network 0 pin '"1234"' sudo wpa_cli set_network 0 pcsc '""' sudo wpa_cli select_network 0 sudo wpa_cli disable_network 0 sudo wpa_cli disconnect sudo wpa_cli remove_network 0 sudo wpa_cli add_network sudo wpa_cli set_network 0 ssid '"eap-sim"' sudo wpa_cli set_network 0 key_mgmt WPA-EAP sudo wpa_cli set_network 0 eap AKA sudo wpa_cli set_network 0 pin '"1234"' sudo wpa_cli set_network 0 pcsc '""' sudo wpa_cli select_network 0 ------------------ Then EAP-AKA connection resulted in fail. wpa_supplicant log is below. ------------------ wlan0: CTRL-EVENT-EAP-METHOD EAP vendor 0 method 23 (AKA) selected SCARD: Non-USIM card - cannot do UMTS auth EAP-AKA: UMTS authentication failed (AUTN) wlan0: CTRL-EVENT-EAP-FAILURE EAP authentication failed ------------------ This occurs because on the first EAP-SIM authentication, the SIM/USIM card in the device was recognized as SIM card even if it is USIM card. So this patch changes it to recognize as USIM card even if EAP-SIM authentication was required. I have tested these switching cases. EAP-SIM -> EAP-AKA EAP-SIM -> EAP-AKA' EAP-AKA -> EAP-SIM EAP-AKA -> EAP-AKA' EAP-AKA' -> EAP-SIM EAP-AKA' -> EAP-AKA Signed-hostap: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
2013-08-31 15:11:48 +02:00
int aka = 0, sim = 0;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
Interworking: Init scard when a credential requires SIM access When an ANQP fetch is triggered and ANQP_3GPP_CELLULAR_NETWORK info is required, initialize scard to be ready when comparing ANQP and credentials. Signed-off-by: Jean Trivelly <jean.trivelly@intel.com>
2014-03-28 14:41:36 +01:00
if ((ssid != NULL && ssid->eap.pcsc == NULL) ||
wpa_s->scard != NULL || wpa_s->conf->external_sim)
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
return 0;
Interworking: Init scard when a credential requires SIM access When an ANQP fetch is triggered and ANQP_3GPP_CELLULAR_NETWORK info is required, initialize scard to be ready when comparing ANQP and credentials. Signed-off-by: Jean Trivelly <jean.trivelly@intel.com>
2014-03-28 14:41:36 +01:00
if (ssid == NULL || ssid->eap.eap_methods == NULL) {
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
sim = 1;
aka = 1;
} else {
struct eap_method_type *eap = ssid->eap.eap_methods;
while (eap->vendor != EAP_VENDOR_IETF ||
eap->method != EAP_TYPE_NONE) {
if (eap->vendor == EAP_VENDOR_IETF) {
if (eap->method == EAP_TYPE_SIM)
sim = 1;
Fix SIM/USIM determination to support EAP-AKA' Both EAP-AKA and EAP-AKA' use USIM. Without this change, use of real USIM card for EAP-AKA' was not allowed to proceed, i.e., only the software simulated USIM operations were supported. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> intended-for: hostap-1
2012-05-05 13:19:13 +02:00
else if (eap->method == EAP_TYPE_AKA ||
eap->method == EAP_TYPE_AKA_PRIME)
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
aka = 1;
}
eap++;
}
}
if (eap_peer_get_eap_method(EAP_VENDOR_IETF, EAP_TYPE_SIM) == NULL)
sim = 0;
Fix SIM/USIM determination to support EAP-AKA' Both EAP-AKA and EAP-AKA' use USIM. Without this change, use of real USIM card for EAP-AKA' was not allowed to proceed, i.e., only the software simulated USIM operations were supported. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> intended-for: hostap-1
2012-05-05 13:19:13 +02:00
if (eap_peer_get_eap_method(EAP_VENDOR_IETF, EAP_TYPE_AKA) == NULL &&
eap_peer_get_eap_method(EAP_VENDOR_IETF, EAP_TYPE_AKA_PRIME) ==
NULL)
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
aka = 0;
if (!sim && !aka) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Selected network is configured to "
"use SIM, but neither EAP-SIM nor EAP-AKA are "
"enabled");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
return 0;
}
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Selected network is configured to use SIM "
"(sim=%d aka=%d) - initialize PCSC", sim, aka);
Fix switching from EAP-SIM to EAP-AKA/AKA' Switching EAP method from EAP-SIM to EAP-AKA fails. wpa_cli commands are below. ------------------ sudo wpa_cli add_network sudo wpa_cli set_network 0 ssid '"eap-sim"' sudo wpa_cli set_network 0 key_mgmt WPA-EAP sudo wpa_cli set_network 0 eap SIM sudo wpa_cli set_network 0 pin '"1234"' sudo wpa_cli set_network 0 pcsc '""' sudo wpa_cli select_network 0 sudo wpa_cli disable_network 0 sudo wpa_cli disconnect sudo wpa_cli remove_network 0 sudo wpa_cli add_network sudo wpa_cli set_network 0 ssid '"eap-sim"' sudo wpa_cli set_network 0 key_mgmt WPA-EAP sudo wpa_cli set_network 0 eap AKA sudo wpa_cli set_network 0 pin '"1234"' sudo wpa_cli set_network 0 pcsc '""' sudo wpa_cli select_network 0 ------------------ Then EAP-AKA connection resulted in fail. wpa_supplicant log is below. ------------------ wlan0: CTRL-EVENT-EAP-METHOD EAP vendor 0 method 23 (AKA) selected SCARD: Non-USIM card - cannot do UMTS auth EAP-AKA: UMTS authentication failed (AUTN) wlan0: CTRL-EVENT-EAP-FAILURE EAP authentication failed ------------------ This occurs because on the first EAP-SIM authentication, the SIM/USIM card in the device was recognized as SIM card even if it is USIM card. So this patch changes it to recognize as USIM card even if EAP-SIM authentication was required. I have tested these switching cases. EAP-SIM -> EAP-AKA EAP-SIM -> EAP-AKA' EAP-AKA -> EAP-SIM EAP-AKA -> EAP-AKA' EAP-AKA' -> EAP-SIM EAP-AKA' -> EAP-AKA Signed-hostap: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
2013-08-31 15:11:48 +02:00
Use pcsc_reader configuration in one for scard_init() call This allows PC/SC reader to be identified with the pcsc_reader configuration parameter. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-06-21 21:45:31 +02:00
wpa_s->scard = scard_init(wpa_s->conf->pcsc_reader);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
if (wpa_s->scard == NULL) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_WARNING, "Failed to initialize SIM "
"(pcsc-lite)");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
return -1;
}
wpa_sm_set_scard_ctx(wpa_s->wpa, wpa_s->scard);
eapol_sm_register_scard_ctx(wpa_s->eapol, wpa_s->scard);
Comment out scard initialization code if PCSC_FUNCS is not set
2011-10-23 11:24:36 +02:00
#endif /* PCSC_FUNCS */
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
#endif /* IEEE8021X_EAPOL */
return 0;
}
#ifndef CONFIG_NO_SCAN_PROCESSING
Change WEP network selection to reject WPA/WPA2 APs Previously, wpa_supplicant behavior in WEP configuration was to try to mimic a device that is not aware of WPA/WPA2 and as such, it tried to connect to a WPA/WPA2 AP with the assumption that the AP could be providing support for both WEP and WPA/WPA2 stations in the same BSS. Such APs could have been used during transition from WEP to more secure options, but that type of deployment have not been used in large number and are not really of much use anymore taken into account that more or less all new devices support WPA/WPA2. That combined with the preference to deprecate WEP justifies removing this use case and making WEP networking matching more strict by using the knowledge of AP advertising WPA/WPA2 as an indication of WEP not being supported. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-08-23 18:27:25 +02:00
static int has_wep_key(struct wpa_ssid *ssid)
{
int i;
for (i = 0; i < NUM_WEP_KEYS; i++) {
if (ssid->wep_key_len[i])
return 1;
}
return 0;
}
Use BSS entries instead of scan results for BSS selection This allows the BSS selection functions to be called without having the scan result data structure. This can be used to skip extra scans in cases where previous results can be considered fresh. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 18:56:57 +02:00
static int wpa_supplicant_match_privacy(struct wpa_bss *bss,
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
struct wpa_ssid *ssid)
{
Change WEP network selection to reject WPA/WPA2 APs Previously, wpa_supplicant behavior in WEP configuration was to try to mimic a device that is not aware of WPA/WPA2 and as such, it tried to connect to a WPA/WPA2 AP with the assumption that the AP could be providing support for both WEP and WPA/WPA2 stations in the same BSS. Such APs could have been used during transition from WEP to more secure options, but that type of deployment have not been used in large number and are not really of much use anymore taken into account that more or less all new devices support WPA/WPA2. That combined with the preference to deprecate WEP justifies removing this use case and making WEP networking matching more strict by using the knowledge of AP advertising WPA/WPA2 as an indication of WEP not being supported. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-08-23 18:27:25 +02:00
int privacy = 0;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
if (ssid->mixed_cell)
return 1;
WPS: support registration with APs in WEP security mode Attached patch fixes the issue when supplicant does not select APs in WEP security mode for WPS registration.
2009-02-17 09:17:24 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_WPS
if (ssid->key_mgmt & WPA_KEY_MGMT_WPS)
return 1;
#endif /* CONFIG_WPS */
Change WEP network selection to reject WPA/WPA2 APs Previously, wpa_supplicant behavior in WEP configuration was to try to mimic a device that is not aware of WPA/WPA2 and as such, it tried to connect to a WPA/WPA2 AP with the assumption that the AP could be providing support for both WEP and WPA/WPA2 stations in the same BSS. Such APs could have been used during transition from WEP to more secure options, but that type of deployment have not been used in large number and are not really of much use anymore taken into account that more or less all new devices support WPA/WPA2. That combined with the preference to deprecate WEP justifies removing this use case and making WEP networking matching more strict by using the knowledge of AP advertising WPA/WPA2 as an indication of WEP not being supported. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-08-23 18:27:25 +02:00
if (has_wep_key(ssid))
privacy = 1;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
#ifdef IEEE8021X_EAPOL
if ((ssid->key_mgmt & WPA_KEY_MGMT_IEEE8021X_NO_WPA) &&
ssid->eapol_flags & (EAPOL_FLAG_REQUIRE_KEY_UNICAST |
EAPOL_FLAG_REQUIRE_KEY_BROADCAST))
privacy = 1;
#endif /* IEEE8021X_EAPOL */
Fix AP selection to check privacy mismatch and IBSS with WPA/RSN IE These checks were previously skipped if the scan result included WPA or RSN IE. However, that can result in selecting a network that does not match local configuration in some cases.
2011-06-23 14:39:00 +02:00
if (wpa_key_mgmt_wpa(ssid->key_mgmt))
privacy = 1;
HS 2.0R2: Add OSEN client implementation Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-07-23 20:24:05 +02:00
if (ssid->key_mgmt & WPA_KEY_MGMT_OSEN)
privacy = 1;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
if (bss->caps & IEEE80211_CAP_PRIVACY)
return privacy;
return !privacy;
}
Allow WPS APs for PIN enrollment even without Selected Registrar Some WPS APs do not set Selected Registrar attribute to 1 properly when using an external Registrar. Allow such an AP to be selected for PIN registration after couple of scan runs that do not find APs marked with Selected Registrar = 1. This allows wpa_supplicant to iterate through all APs that advertise WPS support without delaying connection with implementations that set Selected Registrar = 1 properly.
2009-01-23 12:10:58 +01:00
static int wpa_supplicant_ssid_bss_match(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
struct wpa_ssid *ssid,
Use BSS entries instead of scan results for BSS selection This allows the BSS selection functions to be called without having the scan result data structure. This can be used to skip extra scans in cases where previous results can be considered fresh. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 18:56:57 +02:00
struct wpa_bss *bss)
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
{
struct wpa_ie_data ie;
int proto_match = 0;
const u8 *rsn_ie, *wpa_ie;
WPS: Added support for fragmented WPS IE in Beacon and Probe Response Fragment WPS IE if needed to fit into the IE length limits in hostapd and Reassemble WPS IE data from multiple IEs in wpa_supplicant. In addition, moved WPS code from events.c into wps_supplicant.c to clean up module interfaces.
2008-11-29 21:06:34 +01:00
int ret;
Allow TSN AP to be selected when configured for WEP Commit d8d940b7469e505aec4d71a02d3f7ebab412eeae introduced a regression that prevented TSN APs from being used with WEP since the AP was rejected if it advertised WPA or RSN IE when we were configured to use WEP. Resolve this by checking whether the AP is advertising a TSN, i.e., whether the AP allows WEP to be used as a group cipher. If so, allow the AP to be selected if we are configured to use static WEP or IEEE 802.1X (non-WPA). It should be noted that this is still somewhat more restricted in AP selection than earlier wpa_supplicant branches (0.7.x or older) that ignore the WPA/RSN IE completely when configured for non-WPA.
2010-11-08 20:14:32 +01:00
int wep_ok;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
Allow WPS APs for PIN enrollment even without Selected Registrar Some WPS APs do not set Selected Registrar attribute to 1 properly when using an external Registrar. Allow such an AP to be selected for PIN registration after couple of scan runs that do not find APs marked with Selected Registrar = 1. This allows wpa_supplicant to iterate through all APs that advertise WPS support without delaying connection with implementations that set Selected Registrar = 1 properly.
2009-01-23 12:10:58 +01:00
ret = wpas_wps_ssid_bss_match(wpa_s, ssid, bss);
WPS: Added support for fragmented WPS IE in Beacon and Probe Response Fragment WPS IE if needed to fit into the IE length limits in hostapd and Reassemble WPS IE data from multiple IEs in wpa_supplicant. In addition, moved WPS code from events.c into wps_supplicant.c to clean up module interfaces.
2008-11-29 21:06:34 +01:00
if (ret >= 0)
return ret;
Added preliminary Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) implementation This adds WPS support for both hostapd and wpa_supplicant. Both programs can be configured to act as WPS Enrollee and Registrar. Both PBC and PIN methods are supported. Currently, hostapd has more complete configuration option for WPS parameters and wpa_supplicant configuration style will likely change in the future. External Registrars are not yet supported in hostapd or wpa_supplicant. While wpa_supplicant has initial support for acting as an Registrar to configure an AP, this is still using number of hardcoded parameters which will need to be made configurable for proper operation.
2008-11-23 18:34:26 +01:00
Allow TSN AP to be selected when configured for WEP Commit d8d940b7469e505aec4d71a02d3f7ebab412eeae introduced a regression that prevented TSN APs from being used with WEP since the AP was rejected if it advertised WPA or RSN IE when we were configured to use WEP. Resolve this by checking whether the AP is advertising a TSN, i.e., whether the AP allows WEP to be used as a group cipher. If so, allow the AP to be selected if we are configured to use static WEP or IEEE 802.1X (non-WPA). It should be noted that this is still somewhat more restricted in AP selection than earlier wpa_supplicant branches (0.7.x or older) that ignore the WPA/RSN IE completely when configured for non-WPA.
2010-11-08 20:14:32 +01:00
/* Allow TSN if local configuration accepts WEP use without WPA/WPA2 */
wep_ok = !wpa_key_mgmt_wpa(ssid->key_mgmt) &&
(((ssid->key_mgmt & WPA_KEY_MGMT_NONE) &&
ssid->wep_key_len[ssid->wep_tx_keyidx] > 0) ||
(ssid->key_mgmt & WPA_KEY_MGMT_IEEE8021X_NO_WPA));
Use BSS entries instead of scan results for BSS selection This allows the BSS selection functions to be called without having the scan result data structure. This can be used to skip extra scans in cases where previous results can be considered fresh. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 18:56:57 +02:00
rsn_ie = wpa_bss_get_ie(bss, WLAN_EID_RSN);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
while ((ssid->proto & WPA_PROTO_RSN) && rsn_ie) {
proto_match++;
if (wpa_parse_wpa_ie(rsn_ie, 2 + rsn_ie[1], &ie)) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip RSN IE - parse "
"failed");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
break;
}
Allow TSN AP to be selected when configured for WEP Commit d8d940b7469e505aec4d71a02d3f7ebab412eeae introduced a regression that prevented TSN APs from being used with WEP since the AP was rejected if it advertised WPA or RSN IE when we were configured to use WEP. Resolve this by checking whether the AP is advertising a TSN, i.e., whether the AP allows WEP to be used as a group cipher. If so, allow the AP to be selected if we are configured to use static WEP or IEEE 802.1X (non-WPA). It should be noted that this is still somewhat more restricted in AP selection than earlier wpa_supplicant branches (0.7.x or older) that ignore the WPA/RSN IE completely when configured for non-WPA.
2010-11-08 20:14:32 +01:00
if (wep_ok &&
(ie.group_cipher & (WPA_CIPHER_WEP40 | WPA_CIPHER_WEP104)))
{
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " selected based on TSN "
"in RSN IE");
Allow TSN AP to be selected when configured for WEP Commit d8d940b7469e505aec4d71a02d3f7ebab412eeae introduced a regression that prevented TSN APs from being used with WEP since the AP was rejected if it advertised WPA or RSN IE when we were configured to use WEP. Resolve this by checking whether the AP is advertising a TSN, i.e., whether the AP allows WEP to be used as a group cipher. If so, allow the AP to be selected if we are configured to use static WEP or IEEE 802.1X (non-WPA). It should be noted that this is still somewhat more restricted in AP selection than earlier wpa_supplicant branches (0.7.x or older) that ignore the WPA/RSN IE completely when configured for non-WPA.
2010-11-08 20:14:32 +01:00
return 1;
}
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
if (!(ie.proto & ssid->proto)) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip RSN IE - proto "
"mismatch");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
break;
}
if (!(ie.pairwise_cipher & ssid->pairwise_cipher)) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip RSN IE - PTK "
"cipher mismatch");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
break;
}
if (!(ie.group_cipher & ssid->group_cipher)) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip RSN IE - GTK "
"cipher mismatch");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
break;
}
if (!(ie.key_mgmt & ssid->key_mgmt)) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip RSN IE - key mgmt "
"mismatch");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
break;
}
#ifdef CONFIG_IEEE80211W
Updated MFP defines based on IEEE 802.11w/D6.0 and use new MFPC/MFPR This adds most of the new frame format and identifier definitions from IEEE 802.11w/D6.0. In addition, the RSN IE capability field values for MFP is replaced with the new two-bit version with MFPC (capable) and MFPR (required) processing.
2008-08-30 13:59:39 +02:00
if (!(ie.capabilities & WPA_CAPABILITY_MFPC) &&
Ignore pmf=1 default if driver does not support PMF Connection with a PMF enabled AP will fail if we try to negotiate PMF while the local driver does not support this. Since pmf=1 does not require PMF for a successful connection, it can be ignored in such a case to avoid connectivity issues with invalid configuration. This makes it somewhat easier to allow upper layer programs to use pmf=1 default regardless of driver capabilities. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-01-26 16:40:22 +01:00
wpas_get_ssid_pmf(wpa_s, ssid) ==
Allow PMF to be enabled by default Previously, PMF (protected management frames, IEEE 802.11w) could be enabled only with a per-network parameter (ieee80211w). The new global parameter (pmf) can now be used to change the default behavior to be PMF enabled (pmf=1) or required (pmf=2) for network blocks that do not override this with the ieee80211w parameter. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-11-24 21:21:29 +01:00
MGMT_FRAME_PROTECTION_REQUIRED) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip RSN IE - no mgmt "
"frame protection");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
break;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_IEEE80211W */
RSN: Do not try to connect if PMF disabled and AP requires it Instead of trying to associate in configuration that is known to result in the AP rejecting the association, reject the BSS candidate based on the MFPR=1 RSN capability when STA configuration has PMF disabled. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-10-25 14:12:58 +01:00
if ((ie.capabilities & WPA_CAPABILITY_MFPR) &&
wpas_get_ssid_pmf(wpa_s, ssid) ==
NO_MGMT_FRAME_PROTECTION) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
" skip RSN IE - no mgmt frame protection enabled but AP requires it");
break;
}
MBO: Mandate use of PMF for WPA2+MBO association (STA) If WPA2 is used, MBO AP must enable PMF. Refuse to select a BSS that has MBO and WPA2 enabled without PMF. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2016-02-22 15:46:29 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_MBO
if (!(ie.capabilities & WPA_CAPABILITY_MFPC) &&
wpas_mbo_get_bss_attr(bss, MBO_ATTR_ID_AP_CAPA_IND) &&
wpas_get_ssid_pmf(wpa_s, ssid) !=
NO_MGMT_FRAME_PROTECTION) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
" skip RSN IE - no mgmt frame protection enabled on MBO AP");
break;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_MBO */
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " selected based on RSN IE");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
return 1;
}
Skip connection attempt for non-RSN networks if PMF is set to required Since ieee80211w=2 is an explicit configuration to wpa_supplicant, the connection attempt for such non-PMF (non-RSN) capable networks should be skipped. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2016-04-30 11:52:36 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_IEEE80211W
if (wpas_get_ssid_pmf(wpa_s, ssid) == MGMT_FRAME_PROTECTION_REQUIRED) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
" skip - MFP Required but network not MFP Capable");
return 0;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_IEEE80211W */
Use BSS entries instead of scan results for BSS selection This allows the BSS selection functions to be called without having the scan result data structure. This can be used to skip extra scans in cases where previous results can be considered fresh. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 18:56:57 +02:00
wpa_ie = wpa_bss_get_vendor_ie(bss, WPA_IE_VENDOR_TYPE);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
while ((ssid->proto & WPA_PROTO_WPA) && wpa_ie) {
proto_match++;
if (wpa_parse_wpa_ie(wpa_ie, 2 + wpa_ie[1], &ie)) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip WPA IE - parse "
"failed");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
break;
}
Allow TSN AP to be selected when configured for WEP Commit d8d940b7469e505aec4d71a02d3f7ebab412eeae introduced a regression that prevented TSN APs from being used with WEP since the AP was rejected if it advertised WPA or RSN IE when we were configured to use WEP. Resolve this by checking whether the AP is advertising a TSN, i.e., whether the AP allows WEP to be used as a group cipher. If so, allow the AP to be selected if we are configured to use static WEP or IEEE 802.1X (non-WPA). It should be noted that this is still somewhat more restricted in AP selection than earlier wpa_supplicant branches (0.7.x or older) that ignore the WPA/RSN IE completely when configured for non-WPA.
2010-11-08 20:14:32 +01:00
if (wep_ok &&
(ie.group_cipher & (WPA_CIPHER_WEP40 | WPA_CIPHER_WEP104)))
{
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " selected based on TSN "
"in WPA IE");
Allow TSN AP to be selected when configured for WEP Commit d8d940b7469e505aec4d71a02d3f7ebab412eeae introduced a regression that prevented TSN APs from being used with WEP since the AP was rejected if it advertised WPA or RSN IE when we were configured to use WEP. Resolve this by checking whether the AP is advertising a TSN, i.e., whether the AP allows WEP to be used as a group cipher. If so, allow the AP to be selected if we are configured to use static WEP or IEEE 802.1X (non-WPA). It should be noted that this is still somewhat more restricted in AP selection than earlier wpa_supplicant branches (0.7.x or older) that ignore the WPA/RSN IE completely when configured for non-WPA.
2010-11-08 20:14:32 +01:00
return 1;
}
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
if (!(ie.proto & ssid->proto)) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip WPA IE - proto "
"mismatch");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
break;
}
if (!(ie.pairwise_cipher & ssid->pairwise_cipher)) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip WPA IE - PTK "
"cipher mismatch");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
break;
}
if (!(ie.group_cipher & ssid->group_cipher)) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip WPA IE - GTK "
"cipher mismatch");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
break;
}
if (!(ie.key_mgmt & ssid->key_mgmt)) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip WPA IE - key mgmt "
"mismatch");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
break;
}
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " selected based on WPA IE");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
return 1;
}
Allow non-WPA IEEE 802.1X to be select even if WPA is also enabled If key_mgmt was set to allow both WPA and non-WPA IEEE 802.1X (i.e., to IEEE8021X WPA-EAP), non-WPA IEEE 802.1X was rejected while preparing association parameters. Allow this special case to be handled by selecting non-WPA case if the scan results for the AP do not include either WPA or RSN elements. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-08-15 18:34:04 +02:00
if ((ssid->key_mgmt & WPA_KEY_MGMT_IEEE8021X_NO_WPA) && !wpa_ie &&
!rsn_ie) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " allow for non-WPA IEEE 802.1X");
return 1;
}
WPS: Require PBC match with wps_pbc that specifies BSSID The WPS mode was already verified when the AP was configured for WPA/WPA2, but this was not done with AP that was in open mode. Fix this by allowing wpa_supplicant_ssid_bss_match() to be called in non-WPA configuration, too. With this change, wps_pbc BSSID command will wait until the specified target AP is in active PBC mode before trying to connect to it.
2010-12-28 07:56:23 +01:00
if ((ssid->proto & (WPA_PROTO_WPA | WPA_PROTO_RSN)) &&
Fix wpa_supplicant_ssid_bss_match() handler for non-WPA The proto configuration may be left to non-zero when moving from one configuration to another. To avoid misidentifying a network configuration as enabling WPA, check key_mgmt field, too.
2010-12-30 17:27:33 +01:00
wpa_key_mgmt_wpa(ssid->key_mgmt) && proto_match == 0) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - no WPA/RSN proto match");
WPS: Require PBC match with wps_pbc that specifies BSSID The WPS mode was already verified when the AP was configured for WPA/WPA2, but this was not done with AP that was in open mode. Fix this by allowing wpa_supplicant_ssid_bss_match() to be called in non-WPA configuration, too. With this change, wps_pbc BSSID command will wait until the specified target AP is in active PBC mode before trying to connect to it.
2010-12-28 07:56:23 +01:00
return 0;
}
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
HS 2.0R2: Add OSEN client implementation Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-07-23 20:24:05 +02:00
if ((ssid->key_mgmt & WPA_KEY_MGMT_OSEN) &&
wpa_bss_get_vendor_ie(bss, OSEN_IE_VENDOR_TYPE)) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " allow in OSEN");
return 1;
}
Fix WPA/WPA2 AP rejection on parameter mismatch If WPA/WPA2 was enabled in the configuration, the non-WPA exception could allow an incorrect AP to be selected from scan results. Do not use the exception if WPA/WPA2 is enabled in configuration.
2011-04-08 18:13:58 +02:00
if (!wpa_key_mgmt_wpa(ssid->key_mgmt)) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " allow in non-WPA/WPA2");
return 1;
}
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " reject due to mismatch with "
"WPA/WPA2");
return 0;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
}
Add freq_list network configuration parameter This can be used to limit which frequencies are considered when selecting a BSS. This is somewhat similar to scan_freq, but will also affect any scan results regardless of which program triggered the scan.
2010-03-27 06:45:50 +01:00
static int freq_allowed(int *freqs, int freq)
{
int i;
if (freqs == NULL)
return 1;
for (i = 0; freqs[i]; i++)
if (freqs[i] == freq)
return 1;
return 0;
}
Use BSS entries instead of scan results for BSS selection This allows the BSS selection functions to be called without having the scan result data structure. This can be used to skip extra scans in cases where previous results can be considered fresh. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 18:56:57 +02:00
static int rate_match(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s, struct wpa_bss *bss)
wpa_supplicant: Check rate sets before joining BSS IEEE Std 802.11-2007 7.3.2.2 demands that in order to join a BSS all required basic rates have to be supported by the hardware. Signed-off-by: Christian Lamparter <chunkeey@googlemail.com>
2011-10-23 10:58:54 +02:00
{
const struct hostapd_hw_modes *mode = NULL, *modes;
const u8 scan_ie[2] = { WLAN_EID_SUPP_RATES, WLAN_EID_EXT_SUPP_RATES };
const u8 *rate_ie;
int i, j, k;
Skip rate set matching if BSS frequency is not known At least with driver_test.c, the BSS table may not include frequency information. In such a case, we need to skip rate set matching during BSS selection to avoid rejecting valid AP. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-10-30 10:41:22 +01:00
if (bss->freq == 0)
return 1; /* Cannot do matching without knowing band */
wpa_supplicant: Check rate sets before joining BSS IEEE Std 802.11-2007 7.3.2.2 demands that in order to join a BSS all required basic rates have to be supported by the hardware. Signed-off-by: Christian Lamparter <chunkeey@googlemail.com>
2011-10-23 10:58:54 +02:00
modes = wpa_s->hw.modes;
if (modes == NULL) {
/*
* The driver does not provide any additional information
* about the utilized hardware, so allow the connection attempt
* to continue.
*/
return 1;
}
for (i = 0; i < wpa_s->hw.num_modes; i++) {
for (j = 0; j < modes[i].num_channels; j++) {
int freq = modes[i].channels[j].freq;
if (freq == bss->freq) {
if (mode &&
mode->mode == HOSTAPD_MODE_IEEE80211G)
break; /* do not allow 802.11b replace
* 802.11g */
mode = &modes[i];
break;
}
}
}
if (mode == NULL)
return 0;
for (i = 0; i < (int) sizeof(scan_ie); i++) {
Use BSS entries instead of scan results for BSS selection This allows the BSS selection functions to be called without having the scan result data structure. This can be used to skip extra scans in cases where previous results can be considered fresh. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 18:56:57 +02:00
rate_ie = wpa_bss_get_ie(bss, scan_ie[i]);
wpa_supplicant: Check rate sets before joining BSS IEEE Std 802.11-2007 7.3.2.2 demands that in order to join a BSS all required basic rates have to be supported by the hardware. Signed-off-by: Christian Lamparter <chunkeey@googlemail.com>
2011-10-23 10:58:54 +02:00
if (rate_ie == NULL)
continue;
for (j = 2; j < rate_ie[1] + 2; j++) {
int flagged = !!(rate_ie[j] & 0x80);
int r = (rate_ie[j] & 0x7f) * 5;
/*
* IEEE Std 802.11n-2009 7.3.2.2:
* The new BSS Membership selector value is encoded
* like a legacy basic rate, but it is not a rate and
* only indicates if the BSS members are required to
* support the mandatory features of Clause 20 [HT PHY]
* in order to join the BSS.
*/
if (flagged && ((rate_ie[j] & 0x7f) ==
BSS_MEMBERSHIP_SELECTOR_HT_PHY)) {
if (!ht_supported(mode)) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
" hardware does not support "
"HT PHY");
return 0;
}
continue;
}
wpa_supplicant: Add support for VHT BSS membership selector This allows wpa_supplicant to associate to an AP that has VHT BSS membership selector set to indicate VHT support is required for the BSS. Without the patch it was impossible to connect to, e.g., hostapd-based AP that has require_vht=1. wpa_supplicant was complaining with: hardware does not support required rate 63.0 Mbps Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
2013-07-20 16:28:42 +02:00
/* There's also a VHT selector for 802.11ac */
if (flagged && ((rate_ie[j] & 0x7f) ==
BSS_MEMBERSHIP_SELECTOR_VHT_PHY)) {
if (!vht_supported(mode)) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
" hardware does not support "
"VHT PHY");
return 0;
}
continue;
}
wpa_supplicant: Check rate sets before joining BSS IEEE Std 802.11-2007 7.3.2.2 demands that in order to join a BSS all required basic rates have to be supported by the hardware. Signed-off-by: Christian Lamparter <chunkeey@googlemail.com>
2011-10-23 10:58:54 +02:00
if (!flagged)
continue;
/* check for legacy basic rates */
for (k = 0; k < mode->num_rates; k++) {
if (mode->rates[k] == r)
break;
}
if (k == mode->num_rates) {
/*
* IEEE Std 802.11-2007 7.3.2.2 demands that in
* order to join a BSS all required rates
* have to be supported by the hardware.
*/
Make rate-not-supported debug print more useful It looks like "hardware does not support required rate 1.0 Mbps" has started showing up in some hwsim test cases as a reason for failure. This should not really occur with mac80211_hwsim, so add more details to the debug print to make it easier to figure out what exactly happened. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-03-07 14:34:17 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
" hardware does not support required rate %d.%d Mbps (freq=%d mode==%d num_rates=%d)",
r / 10, r % 10,
bss->freq, mode->mode, mode->num_rates);
wpa_supplicant: Check rate sets before joining BSS IEEE Std 802.11-2007 7.3.2.2 demands that in order to join a BSS all required basic rates have to be supported by the hardware. Signed-off-by: Christian Lamparter <chunkeey@googlemail.com>
2011-10-23 10:58:54 +02:00
return 0;
}
}
}
return 1;
}
Capability matching for 60 GHz band On the DMG (60 GHz) band, capability bits defined differently from non-DMG ones. Adjust capability matching to cover both cases. Also, for non-DMG bands, check ESS bit is set. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Kondratiev <qca_vkondrat@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-02-07 15:20:18 +01:00
/*
* Test whether BSS is in an ESS.
* This is done differently in DMG (60 GHz) and non-DMG bands
*/
static int bss_is_ess(struct wpa_bss *bss)
{
if (bss_is_dmg(bss)) {
return (bss->caps & IEEE80211_CAP_DMG_MASK) ==
IEEE80211_CAP_DMG_AP;
}
return ((bss->caps & (IEEE80211_CAP_ESS | IEEE80211_CAP_IBSS)) ==
IEEE80211_CAP_ESS);
}
Add address masks to BSSID lists In many applications it is useful not just to enumerate a group of well known access points, but to use a address/mask notation to match an entire set of addresses (ca:ff:ee:00:00:00/ff:ff:ff:00:00:00). This change expands the data structures used by MAC lists to include a mask indicating the significant (non-masked) portions of an address and extends the list parser to recognize mask suffixes. Signed-off-by: Stefan Tomanek <stefan.tomanek@wertarbyte.de>
2015-01-05 21:10:16 +01:00
static int match_mac_mask(const u8 *addr_a, const u8 *addr_b, const u8 *mask)
{
size_t i;
for (i = 0; i < ETH_ALEN; i++) {
if ((addr_a[i] & mask[i]) != (addr_b[i] & mask[i]))
return 0;
}
return 1;
}
Add network specific BSSID black and white lists This change adds the configuration options "bssid_whitelist" and "bssid_blacklist" used to limit the AP selection of a network to a specified (finite) set or discard certain APs. This can be useful for environments where multiple networks operate using the same SSID and roaming between those is not desired. It is also useful to ignore a faulty or otherwise unwanted AP. Signed-off-by: Stefan Tomanek <stefan.tomanek@wertarbyte.de>
2015-01-05 21:08:49 +01:00
static int addr_in_list(const u8 *addr, const u8 *list, size_t num)
{
size_t i;
for (i = 0; i < num; i++) {
Add address masks to BSSID lists In many applications it is useful not just to enumerate a group of well known access points, but to use a address/mask notation to match an entire set of addresses (ca:ff:ee:00:00:00/ff:ff:ff:00:00:00). This change expands the data structures used by MAC lists to include a mask indicating the significant (non-masked) portions of an address and extends the list parser to recognize mask suffixes. Signed-off-by: Stefan Tomanek <stefan.tomanek@wertarbyte.de>
2015-01-05 21:10:16 +01:00
const u8 *a = list + i * ETH_ALEN * 2;
const u8 *m = a + ETH_ALEN;
Add network specific BSSID black and white lists This change adds the configuration options "bssid_whitelist" and "bssid_blacklist" used to limit the AP selection of a network to a specified (finite) set or discard certain APs. This can be useful for environments where multiple networks operate using the same SSID and roaming between those is not desired. It is also useful to ignore a faulty or otherwise unwanted AP. Signed-off-by: Stefan Tomanek <stefan.tomanek@wertarbyte.de>
2015-01-05 21:08:49 +01:00
Add address masks to BSSID lists In many applications it is useful not just to enumerate a group of well known access points, but to use a address/mask notation to match an entire set of addresses (ca:ff:ee:00:00:00/ff:ff:ff:00:00:00). This change expands the data structures used by MAC lists to include a mask indicating the significant (non-masked) portions of an address and extends the list parser to recognize mask suffixes. Signed-off-by: Stefan Tomanek <stefan.tomanek@wertarbyte.de>
2015-01-05 21:10:16 +01:00
if (match_mac_mask(a, addr, m))
Add network specific BSSID black and white lists This change adds the configuration options "bssid_whitelist" and "bssid_blacklist" used to limit the AP selection of a network to a specified (finite) set or discard certain APs. This can be useful for environments where multiple networks operate using the same SSID and roaming between those is not desired. It is also useful to ignore a faulty or otherwise unwanted AP. Signed-off-by: Stefan Tomanek <stefan.tomanek@wertarbyte.de>
2015-01-05 21:08:49 +01:00
return 1;
}
return 0;
}
WNM: Add candidate list to BSS transition response Add the transition candidate list to BSS Transition Management Response frame. The candidates preference is set using the regular wpa_supplicant BSS selection logic. If the BSS transition request is rejected and updated scan results are not available, the list is not added. Signed-off-by: Avraham Stern <avraham.stern@intel.com>
2016-02-15 15:53:41 +01:00
struct wpa_ssid * wpa_scan_res_match(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
int i, struct wpa_bss *bss,
struct wpa_ssid *group,
int only_first_ssid)
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
{
Use BSS entries instead of scan results for BSS selection This allows the BSS selection functions to be called without having the scan result data structure. This can be used to skip extra scans in cases where previous results can be considered fresh. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 18:56:57 +02:00
u8 wpa_ie_len, rsn_ie_len;
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
int wpa;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
struct wpa_blacklist *e;
const u8 *ie;
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
struct wpa_ssid *ssid;
HS 2.0R2: Add OSEN client implementation Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-07-23 20:24:05 +02:00
int osen;
MBO: Prevent association to APs that explicitly disallow this Prevent association to MBO APs that have association disallowed attribute in MBO IE in Beacon or Probe Response frames. Signed-off-by: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com>
2016-02-15 15:53:29 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_MBO
const u8 *assoc_disallow;
#endif /* CONFIG_MBO */
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
Use BSS entries instead of scan results for BSS selection This allows the BSS selection functions to be called without having the scan result data structure. This can be used to skip extra scans in cases where previous results can be considered fresh. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 18:56:57 +02:00
ie = wpa_bss_get_vendor_ie(bss, WPA_IE_VENDOR_TYPE);
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
wpa_ie_len = ie ? ie[1] : 0;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
Use BSS entries instead of scan results for BSS selection This allows the BSS selection functions to be called without having the scan result data structure. This can be used to skip extra scans in cases where previous results can be considered fresh. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 18:56:57 +02:00
ie = wpa_bss_get_ie(bss, WLAN_EID_RSN);
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
rsn_ie_len = ie ? ie[1] : 0;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
HS 2.0R2: Add OSEN client implementation Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-07-23 20:24:05 +02:00
ie = wpa_bss_get_vendor_ie(bss, OSEN_IE_VENDOR_TYPE);
osen = ie != NULL;
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "%d: " MACSTR " ssid='%s' "
Add BSS operating frequency to more debug messages This makes it easier to analyze debug logs when figuring out channel related issues. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-09-05 19:40:44 +02:00
"wpa_ie_len=%u rsn_ie_len=%u caps=0x%x level=%d freq=%d %s%s%s",
Use BSS entries instead of scan results for BSS selection This allows the BSS selection functions to be called without having the scan result data structure. This can be used to skip extra scans in cases where previous results can be considered fresh. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 18:56:57 +02:00
i, MAC2STR(bss->bssid), wpa_ssid_txt(bss->ssid, bss->ssid_len),
Add BSS operating frequency to more debug messages This makes it easier to analyze debug logs when figuring out channel related issues. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-09-05 19:40:44 +02:00
wpa_ie_len, rsn_ie_len, bss->caps, bss->level, bss->freq,
P2P: Show p2p flag in debug info for scan results This makes it easier to confirm that P2P capabilities for a GO has been discovered properly. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-10-14 18:23:38 +02:00
wpa_bss_get_vendor_ie(bss, WPS_IE_VENDOR_TYPE) ? " wps" : "",
(wpa_bss_get_vendor_ie(bss, P2P_IE_VENDOR_TYPE) ||
wpa_bss_get_vendor_ie_beacon(bss, P2P_IE_VENDOR_TYPE)) ?
HS 2.0R2: Add OSEN client implementation Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-07-23 20:24:05 +02:00
" p2p" : "",
osen ? " osen=1" : "");
Split wpa_supplicant_select_bss() into three and remove odd debug message This function was getting way too long, so let's split it into WPA and non-WPA cases as separate functions. In addition, remove the confusing "Try to find non-WPA AP" debug message if a WPA-enabled AP is already selected (as reported by Andriy Tkachuk).
2008-09-26 16:24:40 +02:00
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
e = wpa_blacklist_get(wpa_s, bss->bssid);
Blacklist BSS on first failure if only a single network is enabled The special case of requiring blacklisting count to be 2 or higher is only needed when more than a single network is currently enabled. As such, we should not do that when only a single network is enabled. This make the station more likely to follow network side load balancing attempts where the current AP may disassociate us with an assumption that we would move to another AP.
2010-11-26 10:23:50 +01:00
if (e) {
int limit = 1;
Validate WEP key lengths based on driver capabilities The nl80211 driver interface does not allow 128-bit WEP to be used without a vendor specific cipher suite and no such suite is defined for this purpose. Do not accept WEP key length 16 for nl80211 driver interface forn ow. wext-interface can still try to use these for backwards compatibility. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-05-10 13:34:46 +02:00
if (wpa_supplicant_enabled_networks(wpa_s) == 1) {
Blacklist BSS on first failure if only a single network is enabled The special case of requiring blacklisting count to be 2 or higher is only needed when more than a single network is currently enabled. As such, we should not do that when only a single network is enabled. This make the station more likely to follow network side load balancing attempts where the current AP may disassociate us with an assumption that we would move to another AP.
2010-11-26 10:23:50 +01:00
/*
* When only a single network is enabled, we can
* trigger blacklisting on the first failure. This
* should not be done with multiple enabled networks to
* avoid getting forced to move into a worse ESS on
* single error if there are no other BSSes of the
* current ESS.
*/
limit = 0;
}
if (e->count > limit) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - blacklisted "
"(count=%d limit=%d)", e->count, limit);
Return NULL instead of 0 as the pointer on error case
2011-04-08 18:16:20 +02:00
return NULL;
Blacklist BSS on first failure if only a single network is enabled The special case of requiring blacklisting count to be 2 or higher is only needed when more than a single network is currently enabled. As such, we should not do that when only a single network is enabled. This make the station more likely to follow network side load balancing attempts where the current AP may disassociate us with an assumption that we would move to another AP.
2010-11-26 10:23:50 +01:00
}
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
}
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
Use BSS entries instead of scan results for BSS selection This allows the BSS selection functions to be called without having the scan result data structure. This can be used to skip extra scans in cases where previous results can be considered fresh. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 18:56:57 +02:00
if (bss->ssid_len == 0) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - SSID not known");
Return NULL instead of 0 as the pointer on error case
2011-04-08 18:16:20 +02:00
return NULL;
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
}
Skip networks without known SSID when selecting the BSS Previously, APs that were hiding SSID (zero-length SSID IE in Beacon frames) could have been selected when wildcard SSID matching was used. This would result in failed association attempt since the client does not know the correct SSID. This can slow down WPS which is often using wildcard SSID matching. Ignore BSSes without known SSID in the scan results when selecting which BSS to use.
2009-10-15 20:58:58 +02:00
Add disallow_aps parameter to disallow BSSIDs/SSIDs External programs can use this new parameter to prevent wpa_supplicant from connecting to a list of BSSIDs and/or SSIDs. The disallowed BSSes will still be visible in scan results and it is possible to run ANQP operations with them, but BSS selection for connection will skip any BSS that matches an entry in the disallowed list. The new parameter can be set with the control interface SET command using following syntax: SET disallow_aps <disallow_list> disallow_list ::= <ssid_spec> | <bssid_spec> | <disallow_list> | “” SSID_SPEC ::= ssid <SSID_HEX> BSSID_SPEC ::= bssid <BSSID_HEX> For example: wpa_cli set disallow_list "ssid 74657374 bssid 001122334455 ssid 68656c6c6f" wpa_cli set disallow_list (the empty value removes all entries) Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-09-27 16:36:59 +02:00
if (disallowed_bssid(wpa_s, bss->bssid)) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - BSSID disallowed");
return NULL;
}
if (disallowed_ssid(wpa_s, bss->ssid, bss->ssid_len)) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - SSID disallowed");
return NULL;
}
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
wpa = wpa_ie_len > 0 || rsn_ie_len > 0;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
Interworking: Prefer last added network during network selection Previously, any network block could be used to select the BSS to connect to when processing scan results after Interworking network selection. This can result in somewhat unexpected network selection in cases where credential preferences indicated that a specific network was selected, but another network ended up getting used for the connection. While the older networks continue to be valid, add special processing for this initial post-interworking-connect case to get more consistent network selection to match with the Interworking network selection result. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-02-25 21:37:57 +01:00
for (ssid = group; ssid; ssid = only_first_ssid ? NULL : ssid->pnext) {
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
int check_ssid = wpa ? 1 : (ssid->ssid_len != 0);
Disable network block temporarily on authentication failures If 4-way handshake fails due to likely PSK failure or if EAP authentication fails, disable the network block temporarily. Use longer duration if multiple consecutive failures are seen. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-08-26 22:01:26 +02:00
int res;
Added preliminary Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) implementation This adds WPS support for both hostapd and wpa_supplicant. Both programs can be configured to act as WPS Enrollee and Registrar. Both PBC and PIN methods are supported. Currently, hostapd has more complete configuration option for WPS parameters and wpa_supplicant configuration style will likely change in the future. External Registrars are not yet supported in hostapd or wpa_supplicant. While wpa_supplicant has initial support for acting as an Registrar to configure an AP, this is still using number of hardcoded parameters which will need to be made configurable for proper operation.
2008-11-23 18:34:26 +01:00
Validate WEP key lengths based on driver capabilities The nl80211 driver interface does not allow 128-bit WEP to be used without a vendor specific cipher suite and no such suite is defined for this purpose. Do not accept WEP key length 16 for nl80211 driver interface forn ow. wext-interface can still try to use these for backwards compatibility. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-05-10 13:34:46 +02:00
if (wpas_network_disabled(wpa_s, ssid)) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - disabled");
Fix BSS selection with multiple configured networks Commit d8d940b7469e505aec4d71a02d3f7ebab412eeae broke the logic on iterating through all configured network blocks. This was supposed to continue the loop on mismatch to allow other than the first configured network to be found.
2010-08-28 11:04:21 +02:00
continue;
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
}
Split wpa_supplicant_select_bss() into three and remove odd debug message This function was getting way too long, so let's split it into WPA and non-WPA cases as separate functions. In addition, remove the confusing "Try to find non-WPA AP" debug message if a WPA-enabled AP is already selected (as reported by Andriy Tkachuk).
2008-09-26 16:24:40 +02:00
Disable network block temporarily on authentication failures If 4-way handshake fails due to likely PSK failure or if EAP authentication fails, disable the network block temporarily. Use longer duration if multiple consecutive failures are seen. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-08-26 22:01:26 +02:00
res = wpas_temp_disabled(wpa_s, ssid);
if (res > 0) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - disabled "
"temporarily for %d second(s)", res);
continue;
}
Added preliminary Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) implementation This adds WPS support for both hostapd and wpa_supplicant. Both programs can be configured to act as WPS Enrollee and Registrar. Both PBC and PIN methods are supported. Currently, hostapd has more complete configuration option for WPS parameters and wpa_supplicant configuration style will likely change in the future. External Registrars are not yet supported in hostapd or wpa_supplicant. While wpa_supplicant has initial support for acting as an Registrar to configure an AP, this is still using number of hardcoded parameters which will need to be made configurable for proper operation.
2008-11-23 18:34:26 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_WPS
WPS: Use blacklist more aggressively during WPS provisioning This allows more APs to be tried during the WPS timeout.
2010-09-22 20:50:15 +02:00
if ((ssid->key_mgmt & WPA_KEY_MGMT_WPS) && e && e->count > 0) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - blacklisted "
"(WPS)");
WPS: Use blacklist more aggressively during WPS provisioning This allows more APs to be tried during the WPS timeout.
2010-09-22 20:50:15 +02:00
continue;
}
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
if (wpa && ssid->ssid_len == 0 &&
wpas_wps_ssid_wildcard_ok(wpa_s, ssid, bss))
check_ssid = 0;
if (!wpa && (ssid->key_mgmt & WPA_KEY_MGMT_WPS)) {
/* Only allow wildcard SSID match if an AP
* advertises active WPS operation that matches
* with our mode. */
check_ssid = 1;
Added preliminary Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) implementation This adds WPS support for both hostapd and wpa_supplicant. Both programs can be configured to act as WPS Enrollee and Registrar. Both PBC and PIN methods are supported. Currently, hostapd has more complete configuration option for WPS parameters and wpa_supplicant configuration style will likely change in the future. External Registrars are not yet supported in hostapd or wpa_supplicant. While wpa_supplicant has initial support for acting as an Registrar to configure an AP, this is still using number of hardcoded parameters which will need to be made configurable for proper operation.
2008-11-23 18:34:26 +01:00
if (ssid->ssid_len == 0 &&
Allow WPS APs for PIN enrollment even without Selected Registrar Some WPS APs do not set Selected Registrar attribute to 1 properly when using an external Registrar. Allow such an AP to be selected for PIN registration after couple of scan runs that do not find APs marked with Selected Registrar = 1. This allows wpa_supplicant to iterate through all APs that advertise WPS support without delaying connection with implementations that set Selected Registrar = 1 properly.
2009-01-23 12:10:58 +01:00
wpas_wps_ssid_wildcard_ok(wpa_s, ssid, bss))
Added preliminary Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) implementation This adds WPS support for both hostapd and wpa_supplicant. Both programs can be configured to act as WPS Enrollee and Registrar. Both PBC and PIN methods are supported. Currently, hostapd has more complete configuration option for WPS parameters and wpa_supplicant configuration style will likely change in the future. External Registrars are not yet supported in hostapd or wpa_supplicant. While wpa_supplicant has initial support for acting as an Registrar to configure an AP, this is still using number of hardcoded parameters which will need to be made configurable for proper operation.
2008-11-23 18:34:26 +01:00
check_ssid = 0;
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
}
Added preliminary Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) implementation This adds WPS support for both hostapd and wpa_supplicant. Both programs can be configured to act as WPS Enrollee and Registrar. Both PBC and PIN methods are supported. Currently, hostapd has more complete configuration option for WPS parameters and wpa_supplicant configuration style will likely change in the future. External Registrars are not yet supported in hostapd or wpa_supplicant. While wpa_supplicant has initial support for acting as an Registrar to configure an AP, this is still using number of hardcoded parameters which will need to be made configurable for proper operation.
2008-11-23 18:34:26 +01:00
#endif /* CONFIG_WPS */
Allow wildcard SSID to be used with WPA-PSK if bssid is set This allows the AP to be selected based on the BSSID when WPA-PSK is used with a passphrase. The PSK will be derived from the passphrase after the SSID has been learned from scan results.
2011-09-30 21:01:42 +02:00
if (ssid->bssid_set && ssid->ssid_len == 0 &&
os_memcmp(bss->bssid, ssid->bssid, ETH_ALEN) == 0)
check_ssid = 0;
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
if (check_ssid &&
Use BSS entries instead of scan results for BSS selection This allows the BSS selection functions to be called without having the scan result data structure. This can be used to skip extra scans in cases where previous results can be considered fresh. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 18:56:57 +02:00
(bss->ssid_len != ssid->ssid_len ||
os_memcmp(bss->ssid, ssid->ssid, bss->ssid_len) != 0)) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - SSID mismatch");
Fix BSS selection with multiple configured networks Commit d8d940b7469e505aec4d71a02d3f7ebab412eeae broke the logic on iterating through all configured network blocks. This was supposed to continue the loop on mismatch to allow other than the first configured network to be found.
2010-08-28 11:04:21 +02:00
continue;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
}
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
if (ssid->bssid_set &&
os_memcmp(bss->bssid, ssid->bssid, ETH_ALEN) != 0) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - BSSID mismatch");
Fix BSS selection with multiple configured networks Commit d8d940b7469e505aec4d71a02d3f7ebab412eeae broke the logic on iterating through all configured network blocks. This was supposed to continue the loop on mismatch to allow other than the first configured network to be found.
2010-08-28 11:04:21 +02:00
continue;
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
}
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
Add network specific BSSID black and white lists This change adds the configuration options "bssid_whitelist" and "bssid_blacklist" used to limit the AP selection of a network to a specified (finite) set or discard certain APs. This can be useful for environments where multiple networks operate using the same SSID and roaming between those is not desired. It is also useful to ignore a faulty or otherwise unwanted AP. Signed-off-by: Stefan Tomanek <stefan.tomanek@wertarbyte.de>
2015-01-05 21:08:49 +01:00
/* check blacklist */
if (ssid->num_bssid_blacklist &&
addr_in_list(bss->bssid, ssid->bssid_blacklist,
ssid->num_bssid_blacklist)) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
" skip - BSSID blacklisted");
continue;
}
/* if there is a whitelist, only accept those APs */
if (ssid->num_bssid_whitelist &&
!addr_in_list(bss->bssid, ssid->bssid_whitelist,
ssid->num_bssid_whitelist)) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
" skip - BSSID not in whitelist");
continue;
}
WPS: Require PBC match with wps_pbc that specifies BSSID The WPS mode was already verified when the AP was configured for WPA/WPA2, but this was not done with AP that was in open mode. Fix this by allowing wpa_supplicant_ssid_bss_match() to be called in non-WPA configuration, too. With this change, wps_pbc BSSID command will wait until the specified target AP is in active PBC mode before trying to connect to it.
2010-12-28 07:56:23 +01:00
if (!wpa_supplicant_ssid_bss_match(wpa_s, ssid, bss))
Fix BSS selection with multiple configured networks Commit d8d940b7469e505aec4d71a02d3f7ebab412eeae broke the logic on iterating through all configured network blocks. This was supposed to continue the loop on mismatch to allow other than the first configured network to be found.
2010-08-28 11:04:21 +02:00
continue;
Split wpa_supplicant_select_bss() into three and remove odd debug message This function was getting way too long, so let's split it into WPA and non-WPA cases as separate functions. In addition, remove the confusing "Try to find non-WPA AP" debug message if a WPA-enabled AP is already selected (as reported by Andriy Tkachuk).
2008-09-26 16:24:40 +02:00
HS 2.0R2: Add OSEN client implementation Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-07-23 20:24:05 +02:00
if (!osen && !wpa &&
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
!(ssid->key_mgmt & WPA_KEY_MGMT_NONE) &&
!(ssid->key_mgmt & WPA_KEY_MGMT_WPS) &&
!(ssid->key_mgmt & WPA_KEY_MGMT_IEEE8021X_NO_WPA)) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - non-WPA network "
"not allowed");
Fix BSS selection with multiple configured networks Commit d8d940b7469e505aec4d71a02d3f7ebab412eeae broke the logic on iterating through all configured network blocks. This was supposed to continue the loop on mismatch to allow other than the first configured network to be found.
2010-08-28 11:04:21 +02:00
continue;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
}
Split wpa_supplicant_select_bss() into three and remove odd debug message This function was getting way too long, so let's split it into WPA and non-WPA cases as separate functions. In addition, remove the confusing "Try to find non-WPA AP" debug message if a WPA-enabled AP is already selected (as reported by Andriy Tkachuk).
2008-09-26 16:24:40 +02:00
Change WEP network selection to reject WPA/WPA2 APs Previously, wpa_supplicant behavior in WEP configuration was to try to mimic a device that is not aware of WPA/WPA2 and as such, it tried to connect to a WPA/WPA2 AP with the assumption that the AP could be providing support for both WEP and WPA/WPA2 stations in the same BSS. Such APs could have been used during transition from WEP to more secure options, but that type of deployment have not been used in large number and are not really of much use anymore taken into account that more or less all new devices support WPA/WPA2. That combined with the preference to deprecate WEP justifies removing this use case and making WEP networking matching more strict by using the knowledge of AP advertising WPA/WPA2 as an indication of WEP not being supported. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-08-23 18:27:25 +02:00
if (wpa && !wpa_key_mgmt_wpa(ssid->key_mgmt) &&
has_wep_key(ssid)) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - ignore WPA/WPA2 AP for WEP network block");
continue;
}
HS 2.0R2: Add OSEN client implementation Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-07-23 20:24:05 +02:00
if ((ssid->key_mgmt & WPA_KEY_MGMT_OSEN) && !osen) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - non-OSEN network "
"not allowed");
continue;
}
Fix AP selection to check privacy mismatch and IBSS with WPA/RSN IE These checks were previously skipped if the scan result included WPA or RSN IE. However, that can result in selecting a network that does not match local configuration in some cases.
2011-06-23 14:39:00 +02:00
if (!wpa_supplicant_match_privacy(bss, ssid)) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - privacy "
"mismatch");
Fix BSS selection with multiple configured networks Commit d8d940b7469e505aec4d71a02d3f7ebab412eeae broke the logic on iterating through all configured network blocks. This was supposed to continue the loop on mismatch to allow other than the first configured network to be found.
2010-08-28 11:04:21 +02:00
continue;
Skip networks without known SSID when selecting the BSS Previously, APs that were hiding SSID (zero-length SSID IE in Beacon frames) could have been selected when wildcard SSID matching was used. This would result in failed association attempt since the client does not know the correct SSID. This can slow down WPS which is often using wildcard SSID matching. Ignore BSSes without known SSID in the scan results when selecting which BSS to use.
2009-10-15 20:58:58 +02:00
}
mesh: Join an existing MBSS instead of creating a new one If scan results show a matching existing MBSS, join it instead of creating a new MBSS. Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
2016-07-08 04:39:12 +02:00
if (ssid->mode != IEEE80211_MODE_MESH && !bss_is_ess(bss) &&
!bss_is_pbss(bss)) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
" skip - not ESS, PBSS, or MBSS");
wpa_supplicant: Basic support for PBSS/PCP PBSS (Personal Basic Service Set) is a new BSS type for DMG networks. It is similar to infrastructure BSS, having an AP-like entity called PCP (PBSS Control Point), but it has few differences. PBSS support is mandatory for IEEE 802.11ad devices. Add a new "pbss" argument to network block. The argument is used in the following scenarios: 1. When network has mode=2 (AP), when pbss flag is set will start as a PCP instead of an AP. 2. When network has mode=0 (station), when pbss flag is set will connect to PCP instead of AP. The function wpa_scan_res_match() was modified to match BSS according to the pbss flag in the network block (wpa_ssid structure). When pbss flag is set it will match only PCPs, and when it is clear it will match only APs. Signed-off-by: Lior David <qca_liord@qca.qualcomm.com>
2016-02-08 11:30:04 +01:00
continue;
}
wpa_supplicant: "don't care" value for pbss in ssid structure Add a new value 2 to the pbss parameter of wpa_ssid structure, which means "don't care". This value is used in infrastructure mode to request connection to either AP or PCP, whichever is available in the scan results. The value is also used in regular WPS (not P2P group formation) to make WPS work with devices running as either AP or PCP. Signed-off-by: Lior David <qca_liord@qca.qualcomm.com>
2016-04-04 18:19:25 +02:00
if (ssid->pbss != 2 && ssid->pbss != bss_is_pbss(bss)) {
wpa_supplicant: Basic support for PBSS/PCP PBSS (Personal Basic Service Set) is a new BSS type for DMG networks. It is similar to infrastructure BSS, having an AP-like entity called PCP (PBSS Control Point), but it has few differences. PBSS support is mandatory for IEEE 802.11ad devices. Add a new "pbss" argument to network block. The argument is used in the following scenarios: 1. When network has mode=2 (AP), when pbss flag is set will start as a PCP instead of an AP. 2. When network has mode=0 (station), when pbss flag is set will connect to PCP instead of AP. The function wpa_scan_res_match() was modified to match BSS according to the pbss flag in the network block (wpa_ssid structure). When pbss flag is set it will match only PCPs, and when it is clear it will match only APs. Signed-off-by: Lior David <qca_liord@qca.qualcomm.com>
2016-02-08 11:30:04 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - PBSS mismatch (ssid %d bss %d)",
ssid->pbss, bss_is_pbss(bss));
Fix BSS selection with multiple configured networks Commit d8d940b7469e505aec4d71a02d3f7ebab412eeae broke the logic on iterating through all configured network blocks. This was supposed to continue the loop on mismatch to allow other than the first configured network to be found.
2010-08-28 11:04:21 +02:00
continue;
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
}
Add freq_list network configuration parameter This can be used to limit which frequencies are considered when selecting a BSS. This is somewhat similar to scan_freq, but will also affect any scan results regardless of which program triggered the scan.
2010-03-27 06:45:50 +01:00
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
if (!freq_allowed(ssid->freq_list, bss->freq)) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - frequency not "
"allowed");
Fix BSS selection with multiple configured networks Commit d8d940b7469e505aec4d71a02d3f7ebab412eeae broke the logic on iterating through all configured network blocks. This was supposed to continue the loop on mismatch to allow other than the first configured network to be found.
2010-08-28 11:04:21 +02:00
continue;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
}
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
mesh: Stop joining to different frequency network Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
2016-07-08 04:39:13 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_MESH
if (ssid->mode == IEEE80211_MODE_MESH && ssid->frequency > 0 &&
ssid->frequency != bss->freq) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - frequency not allowed (mesh)");
continue;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_MESH */
wpa_supplicant: Check rate sets before joining BSS IEEE Std 802.11-2007 7.3.2.2 demands that in order to join a BSS all required basic rates have to be supported by the hardware. Signed-off-by: Christian Lamparter <chunkeey@googlemail.com>
2011-10-23 10:58:54 +02:00
if (!rate_match(wpa_s, bss)) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - rate sets do "
"not match");
continue;
}
P2P: Add TODO note for Group Formation bit use in AP selection
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_P2P
P2P: Do not allow P2P client connection without P2P IE from GO P2P-GROUP-STARTED event depends on having enough information about the group available. To avoid incomplete information from being delivered to upper layers, do not accept scan results without P2P IE (e.g., from a non-P2P scan) for P2P client association process. This can be of use for some join-a-group cases where non-P2P scans have generated the BSS entry for the GO. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-10-14 18:41:23 +02:00
if (ssid->p2p_group &&
!wpa_bss_get_vendor_ie(bss, P2P_IE_VENDOR_TYPE) &&
!wpa_bss_get_vendor_ie_beacon(bss, P2P_IE_VENDOR_TYPE)) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - no P2P IE seen");
continue;
}
P2P: Allow GO P2P Device Address to be used for scan result matching This is a better way of matching P2P groups based on the unique P2P Device Address (e.g., from P2P Group ID) and SSID pair instead of using the not necessarily unique P2P Interface Address. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-09-08 00:42:53 +02:00
if (!is_zero_ether_addr(ssid->go_p2p_dev_addr)) {
struct wpabuf *p2p_ie;
u8 dev_addr[ETH_ALEN];
ie = wpa_bss_get_vendor_ie(bss, P2P_IE_VENDOR_TYPE);
if (ie == NULL) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - no P2P element");
continue;
}
p2p_ie = wpa_bss_get_vendor_ie_multi(
bss, P2P_IE_VENDOR_TYPE);
if (p2p_ie == NULL) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - could not fetch P2P element");
continue;
}
if (p2p_parse_dev_addr_in_p2p_ie(p2p_ie, dev_addr) < 0
|| os_memcmp(dev_addr, ssid->go_p2p_dev_addr,
ETH_ALEN) != 0) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " skip - no matching GO P2P Device Address in P2P element");
wpabuf_free(p2p_ie);
continue;
}
wpabuf_free(p2p_ie);
}
P2P: Add TODO note for Group Formation bit use in AP selection
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
/*
* TODO: skip the AP if its P2P IE has Group Formation
* bit set in the P2P Group Capability Bitmap and we
* are not in Group Formation with that device.
*/
#endif /* CONFIG_P2P */
P2P: Require fresh scan results for persistent group re-invocation The P2P group is not yet operating when going through invitation exchange for re-invocation. Previously, an old cached scan result could be used to skip the scan immediately after the invitation exchange. While this may result in the fastest possible connection, it does have some issues with cases where the GO takes some time to start up. It would also be at least theoretically possible for some of the BSS parameters to be different, so having a fresh scan result from the new GO instance may be desired in any case. Add a mechanism to skip scan results that have been last updated before a specific point in time and as the first user for this mechanism, require chan results to be more recent than the invitation message exchange for the P2P Client role in persistent group re-invocation case. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-08-21 17:28:28 +02:00
if (os_reltime_before(&bss->last_update, &wpa_s->scan_min_time))
{
struct os_reltime diff;
os_reltime_sub(&wpa_s->scan_min_time,
&bss->last_update, &diff);
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
" skip - scan result not recent enough (%u.%06u seconds too old)",
(unsigned int) diff.sec,
(unsigned int) diff.usec);
continue;
}
MBO: Prevent association to APs that explicitly disallow this Prevent association to MBO APs that have association disallowed attribute in MBO IE in Beacon or Probe Response frames. Signed-off-by: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com>
2016-02-15 15:53:29 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_MBO
assoc_disallow = wpas_mbo_get_bss_attr(
bss, MBO_ATTR_ID_ASSOC_DISALLOW);
if (assoc_disallow && assoc_disallow[1] >= 1) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
" skip - MBO association disallowed (reason %u)",
assoc_disallow[2]);
continue;
}
MBO: Parse MBO IE in BSS Transition Management Request frames Add parsing of MBO IE in BSS Transition Management Request frames. If the MBO IE includes the association retry delay attribute, do not try to reconnect to the current BSS until the delay time is over. If the MBO IE includes the cellular data connection preference attribute or the transition rejection reason attribute, send a message to upper layers with the data. Signed-off-by: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Avraham Stern <avraham.stern@intel.com>
2016-02-15 15:53:36 +01:00
if (wpa_is_bss_tmp_disallowed(wpa_s, bss->bssid)) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
" skip - MBO retry delay has not passed yet");
continue;
}
MBO: Prevent association to APs that explicitly disallow this Prevent association to MBO APs that have association disallowed attribute in MBO IE in Beacon or Probe Response frames. Signed-off-by: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com>
2016-02-15 15:53:29 +01:00
#endif /* CONFIG_MBO */
P2P: Require fresh scan results for persistent group re-invocation The P2P group is not yet operating when going through invitation exchange for re-invocation. Previously, an old cached scan result could be used to skip the scan immediately after the invitation exchange. While this may result in the fastest possible connection, it does have some issues with cases where the GO takes some time to start up. It would also be at least theoretically possible for some of the BSS parameters to be different, so having a fresh scan result from the new GO instance may be desired in any case. Add a mechanism to skip scan results that have been last updated before a specific point in time and as the first user for this mechanism, require chan results to be more recent than the invitation message exchange for the P2P Client role in persistent group re-invocation case. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-08-21 17:28:28 +02:00
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
/* Matching configuration found */
return ssid;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
}
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
/* No matching configuration found */
Return NULL instead of 0 as the pointer on error case
2011-04-08 18:16:20 +02:00
return NULL;
Split wpa_supplicant_select_bss() into three and remove odd debug message This function was getting way too long, so let's split it into WPA and non-WPA cases as separate functions. In addition, remove the confusing "Try to find non-WPA AP" debug message if a WPA-enabled AP is already selected (as reported by Andriy Tkachuk).
2008-09-26 16:24:40 +02:00
}
Use BSS table entry instead of raw scan result for connection
2010-01-02 15:16:02 +01:00
static struct wpa_bss *
Do not store raw scan results Use scan results to update the BSS table and to select the BSS for connection, but do not store the results for longer time.
2010-01-02 15:41:38 +01:00
wpa_supplicant_select_bss(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
struct wpa_ssid *group,
Interworking: Prefer last added network during network selection Previously, any network block could be used to select the BSS to connect to when processing scan results after Interworking network selection. This can result in somewhat unexpected network selection in cases where credential preferences indicated that a specific network was selected, but another network ended up getting used for the connection. While the older networks continue to be valid, add special processing for this initial post-interworking-connect case to get more consistent network selection to match with the Interworking network selection result. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-02-25 21:37:57 +01:00
struct wpa_ssid **selected_ssid,
int only_first_ssid)
Split wpa_supplicant_select_bss() into three and remove odd debug message This function was getting way too long, so let's split it into WPA and non-WPA cases as separate functions. In addition, remove the confusing "Try to find non-WPA AP" debug message if a WPA-enabled AP is already selected (as reported by Andriy Tkachuk).
2008-09-26 16:24:40 +02:00
{
Use BSS entries instead of scan results for BSS selection This allows the BSS selection functions to be called without having the scan result data structure. This can be used to skip extra scans in cases where previous results can be considered fresh. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 18:56:57 +02:00
unsigned int i;
Split wpa_supplicant_select_bss() into three and remove odd debug message This function was getting way too long, so let's split it into WPA and non-WPA cases as separate functions. In addition, remove the confusing "Try to find non-WPA AP" debug message if a WPA-enabled AP is already selected (as reported by Andriy Tkachuk).
2008-09-26 16:24:40 +02:00
Interworking: Prefer last added network during network selection Previously, any network block could be used to select the BSS to connect to when processing scan results after Interworking network selection. This can result in somewhat unexpected network selection in cases where credential preferences indicated that a specific network was selected, but another network ended up getting used for the connection. While the older networks continue to be valid, add special processing for this initial post-interworking-connect case to get more consistent network selection to match with the Interworking network selection result. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-02-25 21:37:57 +01:00
if (only_first_ssid)
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Try to find BSS matching pre-selected network id=%d",
group->id);
else
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Selecting BSS from priority group %d",
group->priority);
Split wpa_supplicant_select_bss() into three and remove odd debug message This function was getting way too long, so let's split it into WPA and non-WPA cases as separate functions. In addition, remove the confusing "Try to find non-WPA AP" debug message if a WPA-enabled AP is already selected (as reported by Andriy Tkachuk).
2008-09-26 16:24:40 +02:00
Use BSS entries instead of scan results for BSS selection This allows the BSS selection functions to be called without having the scan result data structure. This can be used to skip extra scans in cases where previous results can be considered fresh. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 18:56:57 +02:00
for (i = 0; i < wpa_s->last_scan_res_used; i++) {
struct wpa_bss *bss = wpa_s->last_scan_res[i];
Interworking: Prefer last added network during network selection Previously, any network block could be used to select the BSS to connect to when processing scan results after Interworking network selection. This can result in somewhat unexpected network selection in cases where credential preferences indicated that a specific network was selected, but another network ended up getting used for the connection. While the older networks continue to be valid, add special processing for this initial post-interworking-connect case to get more consistent network selection to match with the Interworking network selection result. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-02-25 21:37:57 +01:00
*selected_ssid = wpa_scan_res_match(wpa_s, i, bss, group,
only_first_ssid);
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
if (!*selected_ssid)
continue;
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " selected BSS " MACSTR
" ssid='%s'",
Use BSS entries instead of scan results for BSS selection This allows the BSS selection functions to be called without having the scan result data structure. This can be used to skip extra scans in cases where previous results can be considered fresh. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 18:56:57 +02:00
MAC2STR(bss->bssid),
wpa_ssid_txt(bss->ssid, bss->ssid_len));
return bss;
Merge WPA and non-WPA network selection routines This removes quite a bit of duplicated code and allows network block priority configuration to be used to prefer unprotected networks and also allows use on open network with good signal strength even if scan results show a protected network with marginal signal strength that does not allow it to be used.
2010-08-27 19:05:49 +02:00
}
return NULL;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
}
WPS: Skip rescanning after provisioning if AP was configured If WPS provisioning step is completed with an AP that is in WPS configured state, we can skip a second scan after the provisioning step since the AP is unlikely to change its configuration in such a case. This can speed up WPS connection a bit by removing an unneeded scan. Signed-hostap: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
2013-03-31 19:06:42 +02:00
struct wpa_bss * wpa_supplicant_pick_network(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
struct wpa_ssid **selected_ssid)
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
{
Use BSS table entry instead of raw scan result for connection
2010-01-02 15:16:02 +01:00
struct wpa_bss *selected = NULL;
Split wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results() into helper functions
2009-09-29 13:30:11 +02:00
int prio;
Interworking: Fix last-network preference to not override priority Commit 3d910ef497b11e149cf41e772670f7a7fe3a1e19 tried to make last-network selection behave more consistently with Interworking network selection preferences. However, it did not take into account that other network block may have higher priority. In such cases, the last added network from Interworking network selection should actually not be selected for the next connection. Fix this by limiting the last-network preference to work only within a priority class. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-02-27 12:47:23 +01:00
struct wpa_ssid *next_ssid = NULL;
Allow PSK/passphrase to be set only when needed The new network profile parameter mem_only_psk=1 can be used to specify that the PSK/passphrase for that network is requested over the control interface (ctrl_iface or D-Bus) similarly to the EAP network parameter requests. The PSK/passphrase can then be configured temporarily in a way that prevents it from getting stored to the configuration file. For example: Event: CTRL-REQ-PSK_PASSPHRASE-0:PSK or passphrase needed for SSID test-wpa2-psk Response: CTRL-RSP-PSK_PASSPHRASE-0:"qwertyuiop" Note: The response value uses the same encoding as the psk network profile parameter, i.e., passphrase is within double quotation marks. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-03-28 10:05:13 +01:00
struct wpa_ssid *ssid;
Split wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results() into helper functions
2009-09-29 13:30:11 +02:00
Use BSS entries instead of scan results for BSS selection This allows the BSS selection functions to be called without having the scan result data structure. This can be used to skip extra scans in cases where previous results can be considered fresh. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 18:56:57 +02:00
if (wpa_s->last_scan_res == NULL ||
wpa_s->last_scan_res_used == 0)
return NULL; /* no scan results from last update */
Interworking: Fix last-network preference to not override priority Commit 3d910ef497b11e149cf41e772670f7a7fe3a1e19 tried to make last-network selection behave more consistently with Interworking network selection preferences. However, it did not take into account that other network block may have higher priority. In such cases, the last added network from Interworking network selection should actually not be selected for the next connection. Fix this by limiting the last-network preference to work only within a priority class. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-02-27 12:47:23 +01:00
if (wpa_s->next_ssid) {
/* check that next_ssid is still valid */
for (ssid = wpa_s->conf->ssid; ssid; ssid = ssid->next) {
if (ssid == wpa_s->next_ssid)
break;
}
next_ssid = ssid;
wpa_s->next_ssid = NULL;
}
Interworking: Prefer last added network during network selection Previously, any network block could be used to select the BSS to connect to when processing scan results after Interworking network selection. This can result in somewhat unexpected network selection in cases where credential preferences indicated that a specific network was selected, but another network ended up getting used for the connection. While the older networks continue to be valid, add special processing for this initial post-interworking-connect case to get more consistent network selection to match with the Interworking network selection result. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-02-25 21:37:57 +01:00
Interworking: Fix last-network preference to not override priority Commit 3d910ef497b11e149cf41e772670f7a7fe3a1e19 tried to make last-network selection behave more consistently with Interworking network selection preferences. However, it did not take into account that other network block may have higher priority. In such cases, the last added network from Interworking network selection should actually not be selected for the next connection. Fix this by limiting the last-network preference to work only within a priority class. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-02-27 12:47:23 +01:00
while (selected == NULL) {
for (prio = 0; prio < wpa_s->conf->num_prio; prio++) {
if (next_ssid && next_ssid->priority ==
wpa_s->conf->pssid[prio]->priority) {
Interworking: Prefer last added network during network selection Previously, any network block could be used to select the BSS to connect to when processing scan results after Interworking network selection. This can result in somewhat unexpected network selection in cases where credential preferences indicated that a specific network was selected, but another network ended up getting used for the connection. While the older networks continue to be valid, add special processing for this initial post-interworking-connect case to get more consistent network selection to match with the Interworking network selection result. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-02-25 21:37:57 +01:00
selected = wpa_supplicant_select_bss(
Interworking: Fix last-network preference to not override priority Commit 3d910ef497b11e149cf41e772670f7a7fe3a1e19 tried to make last-network selection behave more consistently with Interworking network selection preferences. However, it did not take into account that other network block may have higher priority. In such cases, the last added network from Interworking network selection should actually not be selected for the next connection. Fix this by limiting the last-network preference to work only within a priority class. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-02-27 12:47:23 +01:00
wpa_s, next_ssid, selected_ssid, 1);
Interworking: Prefer last added network during network selection Previously, any network block could be used to select the BSS to connect to when processing scan results after Interworking network selection. This can result in somewhat unexpected network selection in cases where credential preferences indicated that a specific network was selected, but another network ended up getting used for the connection. While the older networks continue to be valid, add special processing for this initial post-interworking-connect case to get more consistent network selection to match with the Interworking network selection result. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-02-25 21:37:57 +01:00
if (selected)
break;
}
Split wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results() into helper functions
2009-09-29 13:30:11 +02:00
selected = wpa_supplicant_select_bss(
Use BSS entries instead of scan results for BSS selection This allows the BSS selection functions to be called without having the scan result data structure. This can be used to skip extra scans in cases where previous results can be considered fresh. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 18:56:57 +02:00
wpa_s, wpa_s->conf->pssid[prio],
Interworking: Prefer last added network during network selection Previously, any network block could be used to select the BSS to connect to when processing scan results after Interworking network selection. This can result in somewhat unexpected network selection in cases where credential preferences indicated that a specific network was selected, but another network ended up getting used for the connection. While the older networks continue to be valid, add special processing for this initial post-interworking-connect case to get more consistent network selection to match with the Interworking network selection result. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-02-25 21:37:57 +01:00
selected_ssid, 0);
Split wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results() into helper functions
2009-09-29 13:30:11 +02:00
if (selected)
break;
}
Add BSSID into blacklist and do not clean blacklist during countermeasures If scanning continues during TKIP countermeasures, try to avoid selecting the BSS that triggered the counter measures.
2011-12-25 20:09:17 +01:00
if (selected == NULL && wpa_s->blacklist &&
!wpa_s->countermeasures) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "No APs found - clear "
"blacklist and try again");
Split wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results() into helper functions
2009-09-29 13:30:11 +02:00
wpa_blacklist_clear(wpa_s);
wpa_s->blacklist_cleared++;
} else if (selected == NULL)
break;
}
Allow PSK/passphrase to be set only when needed The new network profile parameter mem_only_psk=1 can be used to specify that the PSK/passphrase for that network is requested over the control interface (ctrl_iface or D-Bus) similarly to the EAP network parameter requests. The PSK/passphrase can then be configured temporarily in a way that prevents it from getting stored to the configuration file. For example: Event: CTRL-REQ-PSK_PASSPHRASE-0:PSK or passphrase needed for SSID test-wpa2-psk Response: CTRL-RSP-PSK_PASSPHRASE-0:"qwertyuiop" Note: The response value uses the same encoding as the psk network profile parameter, i.e., passphrase is within double quotation marks. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-03-28 10:05:13 +01:00
ssid = *selected_ssid;
if (selected && ssid && ssid->mem_only_psk && !ssid->psk_set &&
!ssid->passphrase && !ssid->ext_psk) {
const char *field_name, *txt = NULL;
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
"PSK/passphrase not yet available for the selected network");
wpas_notify_network_request(wpa_s, ssid,
WPA_CTRL_REQ_PSK_PASSPHRASE, NULL);
field_name = wpa_supplicant_ctrl_req_to_string(
WPA_CTRL_REQ_PSK_PASSPHRASE, NULL, &txt);
if (field_name == NULL)
return NULL;
wpas_send_ctrl_req(wpa_s, ssid, field_name, txt);
selected = NULL;
}
Split wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results() into helper functions
2009-09-29 13:30:11 +02:00
return selected;
}
static void wpa_supplicant_req_new_scan(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
Allow sub-second resolution for scan requests This is in preparation to use cases that may benefit from more frequent scanning.
2010-04-11 18:10:01 +02:00
int timeout_sec, int timeout_usec)
Split wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results() into helper functions
2009-09-29 13:30:11 +02:00
{
Validate WEP key lengths based on driver capabilities The nl80211 driver interface does not allow 128-bit WEP to be used without a vendor specific cipher suite and no such suite is defined for this purpose. Do not accept WEP key length 16 for nl80211 driver interface forn ow. wext-interface can still try to use these for backwards compatibility. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-05-10 13:34:46 +02:00
if (!wpa_supplicant_enabled_networks(wpa_s)) {
Do not schedule a new scan if no networks are enabled This avoids an extra timeout to move to INACTIVE state.
2009-10-14 21:05:58 +02:00
/*
* No networks are enabled; short-circuit request so
* we don't wait timeout seconds before transitioning
* to INACTIVE state.
*/
P2P: Add more debug prints for GO start routines This makes it easier to debug issues in starting GO mode. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-24 00:05:51 +02:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Short-circuit new scan request "
"since there are no enabled networks");
Do not schedule a new scan if no networks are enabled This avoids an extra timeout to move to INACTIVE state.
2009-10-14 21:05:58 +02:00
wpa_supplicant_set_state(wpa_s, WPA_INACTIVE);
return;
Split wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results() into helper functions
2009-09-29 13:30:11 +02:00
}
P2P: Avoid multi-channel scans when they are not needed If the driver does not support multi-channel concurrency and a virtual interface that shares the same radio with the current interface is operating there may not be need to scan other channels apart from the current operating channel on the other virtual interface. Filter out other channels in case we are trying to find a connection for a station interface when we are not configured to prefer station connection and a concurrent operation is already in process. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-11-25 11:47:43 +01:00
wpa_s->scan_for_connection = 1;
Allow sub-second resolution for scan requests This is in preparation to use cases that may benefit from more frequent scanning.
2010-04-11 18:10:01 +02:00
wpa_supplicant_req_scan(wpa_s, timeout_sec, timeout_usec);
Split wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results() into helper functions
2009-09-29 13:30:11 +02:00
}
P2P: Fix wpa_supplicant crash on P2P WPS PBC overlap case Once PBC overlap detected when using dynamic group interfaces, the wpa_s corresponding to P2P group interface is freed. This patch avoids accessing the wpa_s data structure after it is freed. This fixes a possible crash in P2P client role in such a case.
2011-10-24 22:37:39 +02:00
int wpa_supplicant_connect(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
struct wpa_bss *selected,
struct wpa_ssid *ssid)
Split wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results() into helper functions
2009-09-29 13:30:11 +02:00
{
if (wpas_wps_scan_pbc_overlap(wpa_s, selected, ssid)) {
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_INFO, WPS_EVENT_OVERLAP
"PBC session overlap");
D-Bus: Add WPS pbc-overlap Event This sends an Event D-Bus signal with name "pbc-overlap" for WPS-EVENT-OVERLAP. Signed-off-by: Avichal Agarwal <avichal.a@samsung.com>
2015-06-05 14:46:51 +02:00
wpas_notify_wps_event_pbc_overlap(wpa_s);
P2P: Stop connection attempt on PBC session overlap The overlap condition cannot disappear before group formation timeout hits, so there is no point in continuing in this case and failure can be indicated immediately.
2010-09-07 12:42:55 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_P2P
P2P: Fix segfault when PBC overlap is detected If a separate P2P group interface is used, PBC overlap during group formation causes the group interface to be removed, which ends up with the interface context becoming invalid. Fix this by scheduling a timeout to process the PBC overlap and interface removal instead of removing the interface directly before the connection operation has returned. Signed-off-by: Avraham Stern <avraham.stern@intel.com>
2014-03-27 07:58:30 +01:00
if (wpa_s->p2p_group_interface == P2P_GROUP_INTERFACE_CLIENT ||
wpa_s->p2p_in_provisioning) {
eloop_register_timeout(0, 0, wpas_p2p_pbc_overlap_cb,
wpa_s, NULL);
P2P: Fix wpa_supplicant crash on P2P WPS PBC overlap case Once PBC overlap detected when using dynamic group interfaces, the wpa_s corresponding to P2P group interface is freed. This patch avoids accessing the wpa_s data structure after it is freed. This fixes a possible crash in P2P client role in such a case.
2011-10-24 22:37:39 +02:00
return -1;
P2P: Fix segfault when PBC overlap is detected If a separate P2P group interface is used, PBC overlap during group formation causes the group interface to be removed, which ends up with the interface context becoming invalid. Fix this by scheduling a timeout to process the PBC overlap and interface removal instead of removing the interface directly before the connection operation has returned. Signed-off-by: Avraham Stern <avraham.stern@intel.com>
2014-03-27 07:58:30 +01:00
}
P2P: Stop connection attempt on PBC session overlap The overlap condition cannot disappear before group formation timeout hits, so there is no point in continuing in this case and failure can be indicated immediately.
2010-09-07 12:42:55 +02:00
#endif /* CONFIG_P2P */
Fix wpa_supplicant build without CONFIG_WPS and CONFIG_AP
2010-10-07 09:41:58 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_WPS
D-Bus: Add Signal to notify WPS PBC Overlap event Signed-off-by: Saurav Babu <saurav.babu@samsung.com>
2015-05-28 05:53:07 +02:00
wpas_wps_pbc_overlap(wpa_s);
WPS: Cancel WPS operation on PBC session overlap detection Previously, wpa_supplicant remaining in scanning state without trying to connect, but there is no particular need to do that. Instead, cancel WPS operation completely whenever PBC session overlap is detected.
2010-09-20 02:04:04 +02:00
wpas_wps_cancel(wpa_s);
Fix wpa_supplicant build without CONFIG_WPS and CONFIG_AP
2010-10-07 09:41:58 +02:00
#endif /* CONFIG_WPS */
P2P: Fix wpa_supplicant crash on P2P WPS PBC overlap case Once PBC overlap detected when using dynamic group interfaces, the wpa_s corresponding to P2P group interface is freed. This patch avoids accessing the wpa_s data structure after it is freed. This fixes a possible crash in P2P client role in such a case.
2011-10-24 22:37:39 +02:00
return -1;
Split wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results() into helper functions
2009-09-29 13:30:11 +02:00
}
Fix already-associated detection with driver-based BSS selection wpa_s->pending_bssid is all zeros during connection attempt when driver-based BSS selection is used. Take this into account when determining whether new scan results should trigger a connection based on wpa_s->current_ssid, i.e., a connection attempt with the selected network instead of selected BSS. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-05-21 18:34:00 +02:00
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
"Considering connect request: reassociate: %d selected: "
MACSTR " bssid: " MACSTR " pending: " MACSTR
" wpa_state: %s ssid=%p current_ssid=%p",
wpa_s->reassociate, MAC2STR(selected->bssid),
MAC2STR(wpa_s->bssid), MAC2STR(wpa_s->pending_bssid),
wpa_supplicant_state_txt(wpa_s->wpa_state),
ssid, wpa_s->current_ssid);
Split wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results() into helper functions
2009-09-29 13:30:11 +02:00
/*
* Do not trigger new association unless the BSSID has changed or if
* reassociation is requested. If we are in process of associating with
* the selected BSSID, do not trigger new attempt.
*/
if (wpa_s->reassociate ||
(os_memcmp(selected->bssid, wpa_s->bssid, ETH_ALEN) != 0 &&
SME: Add timers for authentication and asscoiation mac80211 authentication or association operation may get stuck for some reasons, so wpa_supplicant better use an internal timer to recover from this. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-02-24 15:59:46 +01:00
((wpa_s->wpa_state != WPA_ASSOCIATING &&
wpa_s->wpa_state != WPA_AUTHENTICATING) ||
Fix already-associated detection with driver-based BSS selection wpa_s->pending_bssid is all zeros during connection attempt when driver-based BSS selection is used. Take this into account when determining whether new scan results should trigger a connection based on wpa_s->current_ssid, i.e., a connection attempt with the selected network instead of selected BSS. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-05-21 18:34:00 +02:00
(!is_zero_ether_addr(wpa_s->pending_bssid) &&
os_memcmp(selected->bssid, wpa_s->pending_bssid, ETH_ALEN) !=
0) ||
(is_zero_ether_addr(wpa_s->pending_bssid) &&
ssid != wpa_s->current_ssid)))) {
Split wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results() into helper functions
2009-09-29 13:30:11 +02:00
if (wpa_supplicant_scard_init(wpa_s, ssid)) {
Allow sub-second resolution for scan requests This is in preparation to use cases that may benefit from more frequent scanning.
2010-04-11 18:10:01 +02:00
wpa_supplicant_req_new_scan(wpa_s, 10, 0);
P2P: Fix wpa_supplicant crash on P2P WPS PBC overlap case Once PBC overlap detected when using dynamic group interfaces, the wpa_s corresponding to P2P group interface is freed. This patch avoids accessing the wpa_s data structure after it is freed. This fixes a possible crash in P2P client role in such a case.
2011-10-24 22:37:39 +02:00
return 0;
Split wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results() into helper functions
2009-09-29 13:30:11 +02:00
}
Fix already-associated detection with driver-based BSS selection wpa_s->pending_bssid is all zeros during connection attempt when driver-based BSS selection is used. Take this into account when determining whether new scan results should trigger a connection based on wpa_s->current_ssid, i.e., a connection attempt with the selected network instead of selected BSS. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-05-21 18:34:00 +02:00
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Request association with " MACSTR,
MAC2STR(selected->bssid));
Split wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results() into helper functions
2009-09-29 13:30:11 +02:00
wpa_supplicant_associate(wpa_s, selected, ssid);
} else {
Fix already-associated detection with driver-based BSS selection wpa_s->pending_bssid is all zeros during connection attempt when driver-based BSS selection is used. Take this into account when determining whether new scan results should trigger a connection based on wpa_s->current_ssid, i.e., a connection attempt with the selected network instead of selected BSS. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-05-21 18:34:00 +02:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Already associated or trying to "
"connect with the selected AP");
Split wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results() into helper functions
2009-09-29 13:30:11 +02:00
}
P2P: Fix wpa_supplicant crash on P2P WPS PBC overlap case Once PBC overlap detected when using dynamic group interfaces, the wpa_s corresponding to P2P group interface is freed. This patch avoids accessing the wpa_s data structure after it is freed. This fixes a possible crash in P2P client role in such a case.
2011-10-24 22:37:39 +02:00
return 0;
Split wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results() into helper functions
2009-09-29 13:30:11 +02:00
}
Allow IBSS/AP mode networks to be created in ap_scan=1 mode If no BSSes/IBSSes matching the enabled networks are found in the scan results, IBSS/AP mode network (if configured) can be created in ap_scan=1 mode instead of requiring ap_scan=2 mode to be used whenever using IBSS or AP mode.
2009-09-29 16:11:36 +02:00
static struct wpa_ssid *
wpa_supplicant_pick_new_network(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s)
{
int prio;
struct wpa_ssid *ssid;
for (prio = 0; prio < wpa_s->conf->num_prio; prio++) {
for (ssid = wpa_s->conf->pssid[prio]; ssid; ssid = ssid->pnext)
{
Validate WEP key lengths based on driver capabilities The nl80211 driver interface does not allow 128-bit WEP to be used without a vendor specific cipher suite and no such suite is defined for this purpose. Do not accept WEP key length 16 for nl80211 driver interface forn ow. wext-interface can still try to use these for backwards compatibility. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-05-10 13:34:46 +02:00
if (wpas_network_disabled(wpa_s, ssid))
Allow IBSS/AP mode networks to be created in ap_scan=1 mode If no BSSes/IBSSes matching the enabled networks are found in the scan results, IBSS/AP mode network (if configured) can be created in ap_scan=1 mode instead of requiring ap_scan=2 mode to be used whenever using IBSS or AP mode.
2009-09-29 16:11:36 +02:00
continue;
if (ssid->mode == IEEE80211_MODE_IBSS ||
mesh: Add mesh mode config option Modify network mode to support mode number 5 when CONFIG_MESH is enabled. Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name> Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <thomas@noack.us>
2014-09-01 06:23:26 +02:00
ssid->mode == IEEE80211_MODE_AP ||
ssid->mode == IEEE80211_MODE_MESH)
Allow IBSS/AP mode networks to be created in ap_scan=1 mode If no BSSes/IBSSes matching the enabled networks are found in the scan results, IBSS/AP mode network (if configured) can be created in ap_scan=1 mode instead of requiring ap_scan=2 mode to be used whenever using IBSS or AP mode.
2009-09-29 16:11:36 +02:00
return ssid;
}
}
return NULL;
}
Do not store raw scan results Use scan results to update the BSS table and to select the BSS for connection, but do not store the results for longer time.
2010-01-02 15:41:38 +01:00
/* TODO: move the rsn_preauth_scan_result*() to be called from notify.c based
* on BSS added and BSS changed events */
Split scan processing for RSN preauthentication into parts This avoids passing the raw scan results into the RSN code and by doing so, removes the only dependency on src/drivers from the src/rsn_supp code (or from any src subdirectory for that matter).
2009-11-29 16:06:03 +01:00
static void wpa_supplicant_rsn_preauth_scan_results(
Fix regression in RSN pre-authentication candidate list generation Processing of the scan results for RSN pre-authentication candidates was moved to happen before the network was selected. This resulted in all candidates being dropped due to no SSID having been configured. Fix this by moving the processing to happen after the network has been selected. Since the raw scan results are not available at that point, use the BSS table instead of scan results to fetch the information.
2011-05-19 16:52:46 +02:00
struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s)
Split scan processing for RSN preauthentication into parts This avoids passing the raw scan results into the RSN code and by doing so, removes the only dependency on src/drivers from the src/rsn_supp code (or from any src subdirectory for that matter).
2009-11-29 16:06:03 +01:00
{
Fix regression in RSN pre-authentication candidate list generation Processing of the scan results for RSN pre-authentication candidates was moved to happen before the network was selected. This resulted in all candidates being dropped due to no SSID having been configured. Fix this by moving the processing to happen after the network has been selected. Since the raw scan results are not available at that point, use the BSS table instead of scan results to fetch the information.
2011-05-19 16:52:46 +02:00
struct wpa_bss *bss;
Split scan processing for RSN preauthentication into parts This avoids passing the raw scan results into the RSN code and by doing so, removes the only dependency on src/drivers from the src/rsn_supp code (or from any src subdirectory for that matter).
2009-11-29 16:06:03 +01:00
if (rsn_preauth_scan_results(wpa_s->wpa) < 0)
return;
Fix regression in RSN pre-authentication candidate list generation Processing of the scan results for RSN pre-authentication candidates was moved to happen before the network was selected. This resulted in all candidates being dropped due to no SSID having been configured. Fix this by moving the processing to happen after the network has been selected. Since the raw scan results are not available at that point, use the BSS table instead of scan results to fetch the information.
2011-05-19 16:52:46 +02:00
dl_list_for_each(bss, &wpa_s->bss, struct wpa_bss, list) {
Split scan processing for RSN preauthentication into parts This avoids passing the raw scan results into the RSN code and by doing so, removes the only dependency on src/drivers from the src/rsn_supp code (or from any src subdirectory for that matter).
2009-11-29 16:06:03 +01:00
const u8 *ssid, *rsn;
Fix regression in RSN pre-authentication candidate list generation Processing of the scan results for RSN pre-authentication candidates was moved to happen before the network was selected. This resulted in all candidates being dropped due to no SSID having been configured. Fix this by moving the processing to happen after the network has been selected. Since the raw scan results are not available at that point, use the BSS table instead of scan results to fetch the information.
2011-05-19 16:52:46 +02:00
ssid = wpa_bss_get_ie(bss, WLAN_EID_SSID);
Split scan processing for RSN preauthentication into parts This avoids passing the raw scan results into the RSN code and by doing so, removes the only dependency on src/drivers from the src/rsn_supp code (or from any src subdirectory for that matter).
2009-11-29 16:06:03 +01:00
if (ssid == NULL)
continue;
Fix regression in RSN pre-authentication candidate list generation Processing of the scan results for RSN pre-authentication candidates was moved to happen before the network was selected. This resulted in all candidates being dropped due to no SSID having been configured. Fix this by moving the processing to happen after the network has been selected. Since the raw scan results are not available at that point, use the BSS table instead of scan results to fetch the information.
2011-05-19 16:52:46 +02:00
rsn = wpa_bss_get_ie(bss, WLAN_EID_RSN);
Split scan processing for RSN preauthentication into parts This avoids passing the raw scan results into the RSN code and by doing so, removes the only dependency on src/drivers from the src/rsn_supp code (or from any src subdirectory for that matter).
2009-11-29 16:06:03 +01:00
if (rsn == NULL)
continue;
Fix regression in RSN pre-authentication candidate list generation Processing of the scan results for RSN pre-authentication candidates was moved to happen before the network was selected. This resulted in all candidates being dropped due to no SSID having been configured. Fix this by moving the processing to happen after the network has been selected. Since the raw scan results are not available at that point, use the BSS table instead of scan results to fetch the information.
2011-05-19 16:52:46 +02:00
rsn_preauth_scan_result(wpa_s->wpa, bss->bssid, ssid, rsn);
Split scan processing for RSN preauthentication into parts This avoids passing the raw scan results into the RSN code and by doing so, removes the only dependency on src/drivers from the src/rsn_supp code (or from any src subdirectory for that matter).
2009-11-29 16:06:03 +01:00
}
}
Try to avoid some unnecessary roaming When multiple APs are present in scan results with similar signal strength, wpa_supplicant may end up bounching between them frequently whenever new scan results are available (e.g., due to periodic scans requested by NetworkManager). This can result in unnecessary roaming and in case of the current cfg80211 version, to frequent network disconnections. Do not request a roam if the current BSS is still present in the scan results and the selected BSS is in the same ESS and has only a slighly stronger signal strength.
2010-01-25 03:19:50 +01:00
static int wpa_supplicant_need_to_roam(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
struct wpa_bss *selected,
Use BSS table instead of scan results in need-to-roam determination The same information is available in the BSS table, so we can reduce the need for using the raw scan results in wpa_supplicant_need_to_roam(). Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 16:39:35 +02:00
struct wpa_ssid *ssid)
Try to avoid some unnecessary roaming When multiple APs are present in scan results with similar signal strength, wpa_supplicant may end up bounching between them frequently whenever new scan results are available (e.g., due to periodic scans requested by NetworkManager). This can result in unnecessary roaming and in case of the current cfg80211 version, to frequent network disconnections. Do not request a roam if the current BSS is still present in the scan results and the selected BSS is in the same ESS and has only a slighly stronger signal strength.
2010-01-25 03:19:50 +01:00
{
Use BSS table instead of scan results in need-to-roam determination The same information is available in the BSS table, so we can reduce the need for using the raw scan results in wpa_supplicant_need_to_roam(). Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 16:39:35 +02:00
struct wpa_bss *current_bss = NULL;
Add support for CONFIG_NO_ROAMING to Makefile Commit e9af53ad39a19264bf5307a1b5923afc2b2f9b06 introduced new CONFIG_NO_ROAMING configuration parameter but unfortunately it was added only to Android.mk. Enabling this parameter didn't have any effect when Makefile was used to build wpa_supplicant. This commit fixes that problem and cleans "unused variable" compiler warning. Signed-off-by: Lauri Hintsala <lauri.hintsala@silabs.com>
2015-03-20 19:46:03 +01:00
#ifndef CONFIG_NO_ROAMING
Try to avoid some unnecessary roaming When multiple APs are present in scan results with similar signal strength, wpa_supplicant may end up bounching between them frequently whenever new scan results are available (e.g., due to periodic scans requested by NetworkManager). This can result in unnecessary roaming and in case of the current cfg80211 version, to frequent network disconnections. Do not request a roam if the current BSS is still present in the scan results and the selected BSS is in the same ESS and has only a slighly stronger signal strength.
2010-01-25 03:19:50 +01:00
int min_diff;
Make it a bit easier to roam from 2.4 GHz to 5 GHz within ESS The initial connection to an ESS was already explicitly increasing the likelihood of picking a 5 GHz BSS. While the throughput estimation is likely to do same for the roaming decision, it might be possible that that does not cover all cases. Add couple of dB extra preference for 5 GHz in case the roaming decision falls back to comparing signal levels. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2016-03-25 10:53:59 +01:00
int to_5ghz;
Add support for CONFIG_NO_ROAMING to Makefile Commit e9af53ad39a19264bf5307a1b5923afc2b2f9b06 introduced new CONFIG_NO_ROAMING configuration parameter but unfortunately it was added only to Android.mk. Enabling this parameter didn't have any effect when Makefile was used to build wpa_supplicant. This commit fixes that problem and cleans "unused variable" compiler warning. Signed-off-by: Lauri Hintsala <lauri.hintsala@silabs.com>
2015-03-20 19:46:03 +01:00
#endif /* CONFIG_NO_ROAMING */
Try to avoid some unnecessary roaming When multiple APs are present in scan results with similar signal strength, wpa_supplicant may end up bounching between them frequently whenever new scan results are available (e.g., due to periodic scans requested by NetworkManager). This can result in unnecessary roaming and in case of the current cfg80211 version, to frequent network disconnections. Do not request a roam if the current BSS is still present in the scan results and the selected BSS is in the same ESS and has only a slighly stronger signal strength.
2010-01-25 03:19:50 +01:00
if (wpa_s->reassociate)
return 1; /* explicit request to reassociate */
if (wpa_s->wpa_state < WPA_ASSOCIATED)
return 1; /* we are not associated; continue */
if (wpa_s->current_ssid == NULL)
return 1; /* unknown current SSID */
if (wpa_s->current_ssid != ssid)
return 1; /* different network block */
Support driver-based BSS selection in ap_scan=1 mode If the driver indicates that it supports BSS selection (including roaming within an ESS) with WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_BSS_SELECTION, modify ap_scan=1 mode to behave like ap_scan=2 mode for BSS selection. The initial scan is still done to avoid the need for strict configuration of or security parameters (e.g., to figure out whether TKIP or CCMP is being used as the group cipher). However, when requesting the driver to connect, the bssid and freq parameters are not provided to leave the driver in control of selecting which BSS to use and to allow the driver to decide when to roam.
2011-09-26 13:57:23 +02:00
if (wpas_driver_bss_selection(wpa_s))
return 0; /* Driver-based roaming */
Use BSS table instead of scan results in need-to-roam determination The same information is available in the BSS table, so we can reduce the need for using the raw scan results in wpa_supplicant_need_to_roam(). Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 16:39:35 +02:00
if (wpa_s->current_ssid->ssid)
current_bss = wpa_bss_get(wpa_s, wpa_s->bssid,
wpa_s->current_ssid->ssid,
wpa_s->current_ssid->ssid_len);
if (!current_bss)
current_bss = wpa_bss_get_bssid(wpa_s, wpa_s->bssid);
Try to avoid some unnecessary roaming When multiple APs are present in scan results with similar signal strength, wpa_supplicant may end up bounching between them frequently whenever new scan results are available (e.g., due to periodic scans requested by NetworkManager). This can result in unnecessary roaming and in case of the current cfg80211 version, to frequent network disconnections. Do not request a roam if the current BSS is still present in the scan results and the selected BSS is in the same ESS and has only a slighly stronger signal strength.
2010-01-25 03:19:50 +01:00
if (!current_bss)
return 1; /* current BSS not seen in scan results */
Use BSS table instead of scan results in need-to-roam determination The same information is available in the BSS table, so we can reduce the need for using the raw scan results in wpa_supplicant_need_to_roam(). Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 16:39:35 +02:00
if (current_bss == selected)
return 0;
if (selected->last_update_idx > current_bss->last_update_idx)
return 1; /* current BSS not seen in the last scan */
Add CONFIG_NO_ROAMING option This can be used to disable wpa_supplicant controlled roaming. It should be noted that the WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_BSS_SELECTION capability is the preferred way for this and CONFIG_NO_ROAMING should be obsoleted once drivers support the new NL80211_ATTR_ROAM_SUPPORT capability advertisement. Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2011-08-16 20:55:46 +02:00
#ifndef CONFIG_NO_ROAMING
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Considering within-ESS reassociation");
Use estimated throughput to improve roaming selection Previously, within-ESS roaming was skipped if the selected BSS did not have a higher signal strength than the current BSS regardless of AP capabilities. This could result in not moving to a BSS that would provide higher throughput, e.g., due to larger channel bandwidth or higher rates (HT/VHT MCS). Use estimated throughput information from scan result processing to allow within-ESS roaming if the selected BSS is likely to provide better throughput even if the current BSS has larger RSSI. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-02-22 10:28:27 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Current BSS: " MACSTR
" level=%d snr=%d est_throughput=%u",
MAC2STR(current_bss->bssid), current_bss->level,
current_bss->snr, current_bss->est_throughput);
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Selected BSS: " MACSTR
" level=%d snr=%d est_throughput=%u",
MAC2STR(selected->bssid), selected->level,
selected->snr, selected->est_throughput);
Try to avoid some unnecessary roaming When multiple APs are present in scan results with similar signal strength, wpa_supplicant may end up bounching between them frequently whenever new scan results are available (e.g., due to periodic scans requested by NetworkManager). This can result in unnecessary roaming and in case of the current cfg80211 version, to frequent network disconnections. Do not request a roam if the current BSS is still present in the scan results and the selected BSS is in the same ESS and has only a slighly stronger signal strength.
2010-01-25 03:19:50 +01:00
Allow roam based on preferred BSSID regardless of signal strength
2010-02-28 10:09:58 +01:00
if (wpa_s->current_ssid->bssid_set &&
os_memcmp(selected->bssid, wpa_s->current_ssid->bssid, ETH_ALEN) ==
0) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Allow reassociation - selected BSS "
"has preferred BSSID");
Allow roam based on preferred BSSID regardless of signal strength
2010-02-28 10:09:58 +01:00
return 1;
}
Use estimated throughput to improve roaming selection Previously, within-ESS roaming was skipped if the selected BSS did not have a higher signal strength than the current BSS regardless of AP capabilities. This could result in not moving to a BSS that would provide higher throughput, e.g., due to larger channel bandwidth or higher rates (HT/VHT MCS). Use estimated throughput information from scan result processing to allow within-ESS roaming if the selected BSS is likely to provide better throughput even if the current BSS has larger RSSI. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-02-22 10:28:27 +01:00
if (selected->est_throughput > current_bss->est_throughput + 5000) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
"Allow reassociation - selected BSS has better estimated throughput");
return 1;
}
Make it a bit easier to roam from 2.4 GHz to 5 GHz within ESS The initial connection to an ESS was already explicitly increasing the likelihood of picking a 5 GHz BSS. While the throughput estimation is likely to do same for the roaming decision, it might be possible that that does not cover all cases. Add couple of dB extra preference for 5 GHz in case the roaming decision falls back to comparing signal levels. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2016-03-25 10:53:59 +01:00
to_5ghz = selected->freq > 4000 && current_bss->freq < 4000;
if (current_bss->level < 0 &&
current_bss->level > selected->level + to_5ghz * 2) {
Verify that the selected BSS has a better signal level before roaming This prevents situations like the following where we roam to a lesser quality BSS just because the signal level delta is over our threshold. wlan0: Considering within-ESS reassociation wlan0: Current BSS: 00:24:6c:74:0a:40 level=-51 wlan0: Selected BSS: 00:24:6c:74:0a:e0 level=-64 wlan0: Request association: reassociate: 0 selected: 00:24:6c:74:0a:e0 bssid: 00:24:6c:74:0a:40 pending: 00:00:00:00:00:00 wpa_state: COMPLETED Signed-hostap: Robert Shade <robert.shade@gmail.com>
2012-11-24 16:17:50 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Skip roam - Current BSS has better "
"signal level");
return 0;
}
Try to avoid some unnecessary roaming When multiple APs are present in scan results with similar signal strength, wpa_supplicant may end up bounching between them frequently whenever new scan results are available (e.g., due to periodic scans requested by NetworkManager). This can result in unnecessary roaming and in case of the current cfg80211 version, to frequent network disconnections. Do not request a roam if the current BSS is still present in the scan results and the selected BSS is in the same ESS and has only a slighly stronger signal strength.
2010-01-25 03:19:50 +01:00
min_diff = 2;
if (current_bss->level < 0) {
if (current_bss->level < -85)
min_diff = 1;
else if (current_bss->level < -80)
min_diff = 2;
else if (current_bss->level < -75)
min_diff = 3;
else if (current_bss->level < -70)
min_diff = 4;
else
min_diff = 5;
}
Make it a bit easier to roam from 2.4 GHz to 5 GHz within ESS The initial connection to an ESS was already explicitly increasing the likelihood of picking a 5 GHz BSS. While the throughput estimation is likely to do same for the roaming decision, it might be possible that that does not cover all cases. Add couple of dB extra preference for 5 GHz in case the roaming decision falls back to comparing signal levels. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2016-03-25 10:53:59 +01:00
if (to_5ghz) {
/* Make it easier to move to 5 GHz band */
if (min_diff > 2)
min_diff -= 2;
else
min_diff = 0;
}
Try to avoid some unnecessary roaming When multiple APs are present in scan results with similar signal strength, wpa_supplicant may end up bounching between them frequently whenever new scan results are available (e.g., due to periodic scans requested by NetworkManager). This can result in unnecessary roaming and in case of the current cfg80211 version, to frequent network disconnections. Do not request a roam if the current BSS is still present in the scan results and the selected BSS is in the same ESS and has only a slighly stronger signal strength.
2010-01-25 03:19:50 +01:00
if (abs(current_bss->level - selected->level) < min_diff) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Skip roam - too small difference "
"in signal level");
Try to avoid some unnecessary roaming When multiple APs are present in scan results with similar signal strength, wpa_supplicant may end up bounching between them frequently whenever new scan results are available (e.g., due to periodic scans requested by NetworkManager). This can result in unnecessary roaming and in case of the current cfg80211 version, to frequent network disconnections. Do not request a roam if the current BSS is still present in the scan results and the selected BSS is in the same ESS and has only a slighly stronger signal strength.
2010-01-25 03:19:50 +01:00
return 0;
}
return 1;
Add CONFIG_NO_ROAMING option This can be used to disable wpa_supplicant controlled roaming. It should be noted that the WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_BSS_SELECTION capability is the preferred way for this and CONFIG_NO_ROAMING should be obsoleted once drivers support the new NL80211_ATTR_ROAM_SUPPORT capability advertisement. Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2011-08-16 20:55:46 +02:00
#else /* CONFIG_NO_ROAMING */
return 0;
#endif /* CONFIG_NO_ROAMING */
Try to avoid some unnecessary roaming When multiple APs are present in scan results with similar signal strength, wpa_supplicant may end up bounching between them frequently whenever new scan results are available (e.g., due to periodic scans requested by NetworkManager). This can result in unnecessary roaming and in case of the current cfg80211 version, to frequent network disconnections. Do not request a roam if the current BSS is still present in the scan results and the selected BSS is in the same ESS and has only a slighly stronger signal strength.
2010-01-25 03:19:50 +01:00
}
Update WPA/RSN IE properly for driver based BSS selection This patch fixes an issue with roaming for drivers that set WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_BSS_SELECTION (currently ath6kl). On moving to an AP with a different BSSID, an EVENT_ASSOC is received and the subsequent 4-way handshake may fail because of a mismatch between the RSN IE in message 3/4 and in Beacon/Probe Response. This happens only when the APs use different RSN IE contents and ap_scan is set to 1, since wpa_supplicant fails to update its cached IEs. Initial association may fail, too, in case of multiple APs with the same SSID, since BSSID selection is done by the driver and again a mismatch could be seen. Fix these two issues by clearing and updating the cached IEs on receiving an Association event from the driver. Also, retrieve the scan results when the new BSS information is not present locally. Signed-off-by: Sujith Manoharan <c_manoha@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-01-23 16:34:39 +01:00
Do not inform other virtual interfaces of scan results in all cases If a connection operation is started on an interface based on scan results, other virtual interfaces should not be information about the results to avoid potential concurrent operations during the association steps. Since the sibling notification of scan results received was added as an optimization, skipping it for this type of cases is the simplest way of avoiding unnecessary concurrent operations. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-14 03:07:02 +02:00
/* Return != 0 if no scan results could be fetched or if scan results should not
Do not share special scan results with virtual interfaces When a special scan_res_handler is used the scan parameters may not have been suitable for other purposes (e.g., during a p2p_find operation). As such, do not indicate such scan results to other virtual interfaces using the same radio. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-06-30 19:30:40 +02:00
* be shared with other virtual interfaces. */
Do not propagate bad scan results to siblings sharing the radio This decreases useless work and re-scans by siblings when a device gets a scan failure. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-02-16 17:55:37 +01:00
static int _wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
Use special scan result processing steps only on requesting interface Scan result events are shared between all virtual interfaces sharing the same radio. However, some of the steps are not really appropriate on virtual interfaces that did not issue the scan request. Fix this by making these steps conditional on the scan results being processed on the interface that requested them. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-03-18 16:07:09 +01:00
union wpa_event_data *data,
int own_request)
Split wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results() into helper functions
2009-09-29 13:30:11 +02:00
{
Use radio work for scan requests Avoid concurrent scan requests by using the radio work queuing mechanism. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-11-24 21:07:05 +01:00
struct wpa_scan_results *scan_res = NULL;
int ret = 0;
Ignore scan results in wpa_supplicant AP mode This is needed to avoid trying to reassociate based on new scan results when using wpa_supplicant to control AP mode. This could happen if something external triggered the driver to run a scan.
2010-07-18 05:32:25 +02:00
int ap = 0;
Move variable declaration into the beginning of function The variables used within the #ifndef block here needs to be defined in the beginning of the function to avoid issues with some compilers. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-08-29 23:37:59 +02:00
#ifndef CONFIG_NO_RANDOM_POOL
size_t i, num;
#endif /* CONFIG_NO_RANDOM_POOL */
Ignore scan results in wpa_supplicant AP mode This is needed to avoid trying to reassociate based on new scan results when using wpa_supplicant to control AP mode. This could happen if something external triggered the driver to run a scan.
2010-07-18 05:32:25 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_AP
if (wpa_s->ap_iface)
ap = 1;
#endif /* CONFIG_AP */
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
dbus: add 'scanning' property When the supplicant is connected and performs a scan, it doesn't enter WPA_SCANNING state for various reasons. However, external programs still need to know that the supplicant is scanning since they may not wish to perform certain operations during a scan (as those operations will likely fail or yield incorrect results). Add a 'scanning' property and signal to the supplicant dbus interface to allow clients to synchronize better with the supplicant when it scans. Signed-off-by: Dan Williams <dcbw@redhat.com>
2009-05-27 20:06:40 +02:00
wpa_supplicant_notify_scanning(wpa_s, 0);
Do not store raw scan results Use scan results to update the BSS table and to select the BSS for connection, but do not store the results for longer time.
2010-01-02 15:41:38 +01:00
scan_res = wpa_supplicant_get_scan_results(wpa_s,
data ? &data->scan_info :
NULL, 1);
if (scan_res == NULL) {
Add 'SCAN TYPE=ONLY' functionality Usual manual scan request may cause reassociation due to several reasons. New command is intended to perform pure scan without taking any automatic action based on the results. Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2013-02-07 17:06:51 +01:00
if (wpa_s->conf->ap_scan == 2 || ap ||
wpa_s->scan_res_handler == scan_only_handler)
Do not propagate bad scan results to siblings sharing the radio This decreases useless work and re-scans by siblings when a device gets a scan failure. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-02-16 17:55:37 +01:00
return -1;
Use special scan result processing steps only on requesting interface Scan result events are shared between all virtual interfaces sharing the same radio. However, some of the steps are not really appropriate on virtual interfaces that did not issue the scan request. Fix this by making these steps conditional on the scan results being processed on the interface that requested them. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-03-18 16:07:09 +01:00
if (!own_request)
return -1;
nl80211: Support vendor scan together with normal scan Allow wpa_supplicant to use vendor scan (if supported by the driver) together with the normal nl80211 scan and handling external scan events. Since this results in possibility of concurrent scan operations, some of the operations related to scan results need to check more carefully when an event is relevant for a specific interface. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-09-16 14:15:05 +02:00
if (data && data->scan_info.external_scan)
return -1;
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Failed to get scan results - try "
"scanning again");
Allow sub-second resolution for scan requests This is in preparation to use cases that may benefit from more frequent scanning.
2010-04-11 18:10:01 +02:00
wpa_supplicant_req_new_scan(wpa_s, 1, 0);
Use radio work for scan requests Avoid concurrent scan requests by using the radio work queuing mechanism. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-11-24 21:07:05 +01:00
ret = -1;
goto scan_work_done;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
}
Maintain internal entropy pool for augmenting random number generation By default, make hostapd and wpa_supplicant maintain an internal entropy pool that is fed with following information: hostapd: - Probe Request frames (timing, RSSI) - Association events (timing) - SNonce from Supplicants wpa_supplicant: - Scan results (timing, signal/noise) - Association events (timing) The internal pool is used to augment the random numbers generated with the OS mechanism (os_get_random()). While the internal implementation is not expected to be very strong due to limited amount of generic (non-platform specific) information to feed the pool, this may strengthen key derivation on some devices that are not configured to provide strong random numbers through os_get_random() (e.g., /dev/urandom on Linux/BSD). This new mechanism is not supposed to replace proper OS provided random number generation mechanism. The OS mechanism needs to be initialized properly (e.g., hw random number generator, maintaining entropy pool over reboots, etc.) for any of the security assumptions to hold. If the os_get_random() is known to provide strong ramdom data (e.g., on Linux/BSD, the board in question is known to have reliable source of random data from /dev/urandom), the internal hostapd random pool can be disabled. This will save some in binary size and CPU use. However, this should only be considered for builds that are known to be used on devices that meet the requirements described above. The internal pool is disabled by adding CONFIG_NO_RANDOM_POOL=y to the .config file.
2010-11-24 00:29:40 +01:00
#ifndef CONFIG_NO_RANDOM_POOL
num = scan_res->num;
if (num > 10)
num = 10;
for (i = 0; i < num; i++) {
u8 buf[5];
struct wpa_scan_res *res = scan_res->res[i];
buf[0] = res->bssid[5];
buf[1] = res->qual & 0xff;
buf[2] = res->noise & 0xff;
buf[3] = res->level & 0xff;
buf[4] = res->tsf & 0xff;
random_add_randomness(buf, sizeof(buf));
}
#endif /* CONFIG_NO_RANDOM_POOL */
Ignore externally triggered scan results with scan_res_handler wpa_s->scan_res_handler is set only for cases where a scan operation is requested for a specific purpose. As such, this callback should only be called when a scan result from a scan that was triggered by wpa_supplicant is processed. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-01-03 11:00:13 +01:00
if (own_request && wpa_s->scan_res_handler &&
nl80211: Support vendor scan together with normal scan Allow wpa_supplicant to use vendor scan (if supported by the driver) together with the normal nl80211 scan and handling external scan events. Since this results in possibility of concurrent scan operations, some of the operations related to scan results need to check more carefully when an event is relevant for a specific interface. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-09-16 14:15:05 +02:00
!(data && data->scan_info.external_scan)) {
Allow setting scan_res_handler from the callback function Some new code I'm working on will need the scan_res_handler assigned all the time in certain circumstances, so the easiest way is to reset it within the handler. This is currently prevented by the way the code in the event handler works -- change that to permit such usage. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-12-17 14:31:05 +01:00
void (*scan_res_handler)(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
struct wpa_scan_results *scan_res);
scan_res_handler = wpa_s->scan_res_handler;
Add option for overriding scan result handler for a single scan
2010-04-11 18:53:31 +02:00
wpa_s->scan_res_handler = NULL;
Allow setting scan_res_handler from the callback function Some new code I'm working on will need the scan_res_handler assigned all the time in certain circumstances, so the easiest way is to reset it within the handler. This is currently prevented by the way the code in the event handler works -- change that to permit such usage. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-12-17 14:31:05 +01:00
scan_res_handler(wpa_s, scan_res);
Use radio work for scan requests Avoid concurrent scan requests by using the radio work queuing mechanism. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-11-24 21:07:05 +01:00
ret = -2;
goto scan_work_done;
Add option for overriding scan result handler for a single scan
2010-04-11 18:53:31 +02:00
}
Ignore scan results in wpa_supplicant AP mode This is needed to avoid trying to reassociate based on new scan results when using wpa_supplicant to control AP mode. This could happen if something external triggered the driver to run a scan.
2010-07-18 05:32:25 +02:00
if (ap) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Ignore scan results in AP mode");
wpa_s AP mode: propagate scan event When wpa_s scans in AP mode, it doesn't propagate the scan event to the AP code, so that code can get stuck if it uses the callbacks there. Simply call them where appropriate. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-03-19 12:08:08 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_AP
if (wpa_s->ap_iface->scan_cb)
wpa_s->ap_iface->scan_cb(wpa_s->ap_iface);
#endif /* CONFIG_AP */
Use radio work for scan requests Avoid concurrent scan requests by using the radio work queuing mechanism. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-11-24 21:07:05 +01:00
goto scan_work_done;
Ignore scan results in wpa_supplicant AP mode This is needed to avoid trying to reassociate based on new scan results when using wpa_supplicant to control AP mode. This could happen if something external triggered the driver to run a scan.
2010-07-18 05:32:25 +02:00
}
Track whether scan was started by us or an external program This can be used to improve scan behavior in cases external programs request scans directly from the driver. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-26 16:33:26 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "New scan results available (own=%u ext=%u)",
nl80211: Support vendor scan together with normal scan Allow wpa_supplicant to use vendor scan (if supported by the driver) together with the normal nl80211 scan and handling external scan events. Since this results in possibility of concurrent scan operations, some of the operations related to scan results need to check more carefully when an event is relevant for a specific interface. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-09-16 14:15:05 +02:00
wpa_s->own_scan_running,
data ? data->scan_info.external_scan : 0);
Optional scan id for ctrl_iface SCAN requests This allows users of wpa_supplicant control interface to figure out when their specific scan command has been started and completed. For example: CTRL-EVENT-SCAN-STARTED > scan freq=2412,2417 passive=1 use_id=1 3 CTRL-EVENT-SCAN-RESULTS CTRL-EVENT-SCAN-STARTED id=3 CTRL-EVENT-SCAN-RESULTS id=3 Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-26 16:35:48 +01:00
if (wpa_s->last_scan_req == MANUAL_SCAN_REQ &&
nl80211: Support vendor scan together with normal scan Allow wpa_supplicant to use vendor scan (if supported by the driver) together with the normal nl80211 scan and handling external scan events. Since this results in possibility of concurrent scan operations, some of the operations related to scan results need to check more carefully when an event is relevant for a specific interface. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-09-16 14:15:05 +02:00
wpa_s->manual_scan_use_id && wpa_s->own_scan_running &&
own_request && !(data && data->scan_info.external_scan)) {
Optional scan id for ctrl_iface SCAN requests This allows users of wpa_supplicant control interface to figure out when their specific scan command has been started and completed. For example: CTRL-EVENT-SCAN-STARTED > scan freq=2412,2417 passive=1 use_id=1 3 CTRL-EVENT-SCAN-RESULTS CTRL-EVENT-SCAN-STARTED id=3 CTRL-EVENT-SCAN-RESULTS id=3 Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-26 16:35:48 +01:00
wpa_msg_ctrl(wpa_s, MSG_INFO, WPA_EVENT_SCAN_RESULTS "id=%u",
wpa_s->manual_scan_id);
wpa_s->manual_scan_use_id = 0;
} else {
wpa_msg_ctrl(wpa_s, MSG_INFO, WPA_EVENT_SCAN_RESULTS);
}
Remove get-first-scan-results-before-request optimization This has already been disabled in most use cases and can result in problems with some drivers, so better just remove it completely.
2010-07-07 05:31:10 +02:00
wpas_notify_scan_results(wpa_s);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
Add wpa_supplicant notification calls This introduces a new mechanism for collecting notification calls into a single place (notify.c). As a result of this, most of the wpa_supplicant code does not need to know about dbus (etc. mechanisms that could use the notifications). Some empty placeholder functions are also added in preparation of new dbus code that needs more event notifications.
2009-09-13 19:53:32 +02:00
wpas_notify_scan_done(wpa_s, 1);
nl80211: Support vendor scan together with normal scan Allow wpa_supplicant to use vendor scan (if supported by the driver) together with the normal nl80211 scan and handling external scan events. Since this results in possibility of concurrent scan operations, some of the operations related to scan results need to check more carefully when an event is relevant for a specific interface. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-09-16 14:15:05 +02:00
if (data && data->scan_info.external_scan) {
Do not use results from externally requested scan for network selection It may not always be desirable to trigger reassociation or network change based on scan results from externally to wpa_supplicant trigger scan operations. Skip network selection and roaming determination if the received scan result is known to be triggered by something external to wpa_supplicant. The control interface SCAN command can be used to request wpa_supplicant to determine the best network. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-26 18:00:48 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Do not use results from externally requested scan operation for network selection");
wpa_scan_results_free(scan_res);
return 0;
}
WNM: Use recent scan results on BSS transition request If the last scans are recent (for now, less than ten seconds old), use them instead of triggering a new scan when a BSS Transition Management Request frame is received. As a fallback, allow a new scan to be triggered if no matches were found. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-11-22 19:12:12 +01:00
if (wnm_scan_process(wpa_s, 1) > 0)
WNM: Move transition candidate list processing to normal scan This makes it easier to optimize transition request processing. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-11-22 17:04:21 +01:00
goto scan_work_done;
Use radio work for scan requests Avoid concurrent scan requests by using the radio work queuing mechanism. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-11-24 21:07:05 +01:00
if (sme_proc_obss_scan(wpa_s) > 0)
goto scan_work_done;
Add handling of OBSS scan requests and 20/40 BSS coex reports Add support for HT STA to report 40 MHz intolerance to the associated AP. A HT station generates a report (20/40 BSS coexistence) of channel list if it finds a non-HT capable AP or a HT AP which prohibits 40 MHz transmission (i.e., 40 MHz intolerant bit is set in HT capabilities IE) from the scan results. Parse the OBSS scan parameter from Beacon or Probe Response frames and schedule periodic scan to generate 20/40 coexistence channel report if requested to do so. This patch decodes Scan Interval alone from the OBSS Scan Parameters element and triggers scan on timeout. Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-05-03 11:13:43 +02:00
Use radio work for scan requests Avoid concurrent scan requests by using the radio work queuing mechanism. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-11-24 21:07:05 +01:00
if ((wpa_s->conf->ap_scan == 2 && !wpas_wps_searching(wpa_s)))
goto scan_work_done;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
Use radio work for scan requests Avoid concurrent scan requests by using the radio work queuing mechanism. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-11-24 21:07:05 +01:00
if (autoscan_notify_scan(wpa_s, scan_res))
goto scan_work_done;
Add automatic scanning support Like bgscan, autoscan is an optional module based feature to automate scanning but while disconnected or inactive. Instead of requesting directly a scan, it only sets the scan_interval and the sched_scan_interval. So, if the driver supports sched_scan, autoscan will be able to tweak its interval. Otherwise, the tweaked scan_interval will be used. If scan parameters needs to be tweaked, an autoscan_params pointer in wpa_s will provide those. So req_scan / req_sched_scan will not set the scan parameters as they usually do, but instead will use this pointer. Modules will not have to request a scan directly, like bgscan does. Instead, it will need to return the interval it wants after each notification. Signed-hostap: Tomasz Bursztyka <tomasz.bursztyka@linux.intel.com>
2012-06-26 17:55:41 +02:00
Getting back to DISCONNECTED afer SCANNING After transitioning from DISCONNECTED to SCANNING, we never go back to DISCONNECTED even though scanning is done or failed. We're thus stuck in SCANNING while scanning is actually done.
2009-09-14 16:25:03 +02:00
if (wpa_s->disconnected) {
wpa_supplicant_set_state(wpa_s, WPA_DISCONNECTED);
Use radio work for scan requests Avoid concurrent scan requests by using the radio work queuing mechanism. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-11-24 21:07:05 +01:00
goto scan_work_done;
Getting back to DISCONNECTED afer SCANNING After transitioning from DISCONNECTED to SCANNING, we never go back to DISCONNECTED even though scanning is done or failed. We're thus stuck in SCANNING while scanning is actually done.
2009-09-14 16:25:03 +02:00
}
Support driver-based BSS selection in ap_scan=1 mode If the driver indicates that it supports BSS selection (including roaming within an ESS) with WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_BSS_SELECTION, modify ap_scan=1 mode to behave like ap_scan=2 mode for BSS selection. The initial scan is still done to avoid the need for strict configuration of or security parameters (e.g., to figure out whether TKIP or CCMP is being used as the group cipher). However, when requesting the driver to connect, the bssid and freq parameters are not provided to leave the driver in control of selecting which BSS to use and to allow the driver to decide when to roam.
2011-09-26 13:57:23 +02:00
if (!wpas_driver_bss_selection(wpa_s) &&
Use radio work for scan requests Avoid concurrent scan requests by using the radio work queuing mechanism. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-11-24 21:07:05 +01:00
bgscan_notify_scan(wpa_s, scan_res) == 1)
goto scan_work_done;
Do not store raw scan results Use scan results to update the BSS table and to select the BSS for connection, but do not store the results for longer time.
2010-01-02 15:41:38 +01:00
WPS: Maintain more AP state during WPS PIN iteration Maintain state of WPS APs during iteration to find the correct AP for WPS PIN operation when no specific BSSID is specified. This information can be used for optimizing the order in which the APs are tried. This commit is only adding the collection of the information and more detailed debug information to make debug logs more helpful in figuring out how the AP selection order could be improved. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-08-27 12:48:11 +02:00
wpas_wps_update_ap_info(wpa_s, scan_res);
Avoid network selection from scan during connection If scan results arrive during the connection process, the network selection function was called, interrupting the current connection. While a regular scan is mutually exclusive with connection establishment via the nature of radio work, there's no such protection for scheduled scan. Prevent network selection while a connection is in progress. Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
2015-12-10 11:56:04 +01:00
if (wpa_s->wpa_state >= WPA_AUTHENTICATING &&
wpa_s->wpa_state < WPA_COMPLETED)
goto scan_work_done;
Use BSS table instead of scan results in need-to-roam determination The same information is available in the BSS table, so we can reduce the need for using the raw scan results in wpa_supplicant_need_to_roam(). Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 16:39:35 +02:00
wpa_scan_results_free(scan_res);
nl80211: Support vendor scan together with normal scan Allow wpa_supplicant to use vendor scan (if supported by the driver) together with the normal nl80211 scan and handling external scan events. Since this results in possibility of concurrent scan operations, some of the operations related to scan results need to check more carefully when an event is relevant for a specific interface. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-09-16 14:15:05 +02:00
if (own_request && wpa_s->scan_work) {
Use radio work for scan requests Avoid concurrent scan requests by using the radio work queuing mechanism. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-11-24 21:07:05 +01:00
struct wpa_radio_work *work = wpa_s->scan_work;
wpa_s->scan_work = NULL;
radio_work_done(work);
}
Request new scan only for the original interface Request new scan only for the interface for which the original scan request and results has come. Otherwise while sharing scan results along with P2P interfaces, the new scan will be requested on P2P interfaces. Signed-hostap: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
2013-11-17 11:23:09 +01:00
return wpas_select_network_from_last_scan(wpa_s, 1, own_request);
Use radio work for scan requests Avoid concurrent scan requests by using the radio work queuing mechanism. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-11-24 21:07:05 +01:00
scan_work_done:
wpa_scan_results_free(scan_res);
nl80211: Support vendor scan together with normal scan Allow wpa_supplicant to use vendor scan (if supported by the driver) together with the normal nl80211 scan and handling external scan events. Since this results in possibility of concurrent scan operations, some of the operations related to scan results need to check more carefully when an event is relevant for a specific interface. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-09-16 14:15:05 +02:00
if (own_request && wpa_s->scan_work) {
Use radio work for scan requests Avoid concurrent scan requests by using the radio work queuing mechanism. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-11-24 21:07:05 +01:00
struct wpa_radio_work *work = wpa_s->scan_work;
wpa_s->scan_work = NULL;
radio_work_done(work);
}
return ret;
Interworking: Skip extra scan after network auto-select If the scan results from before ANQP fetch are fresh (less than five seconds old), do not run a new scan when selecting the BSS after having used Interworking network selection. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 19:18:48 +02:00
}
RSN: Update preauth scan results only based on new scan results The fast-connect optimization to skip a new scan did not update how the RSN preauthentication callback is used. There is no point in trying to add preauthentication candidates from cases where scan was skipped, so skip this call, too, in such cases. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-04-23 17:24:00 +02:00
static int wpas_select_network_from_last_scan(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
Request new scan only for the original interface Request new scan only for the interface for which the original scan request and results has come. Otherwise while sharing scan results along with P2P interfaces, the new scan will be requested on P2P interfaces. Signed-hostap: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
2013-11-17 11:23:09 +01:00
int new_scan, int own_request)
Interworking: Skip extra scan after network auto-select If the scan results from before ANQP fetch are fresh (less than five seconds old), do not run a new scan when selecting the BSS after having used Interworking network selection. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 19:18:48 +02:00
{
struct wpa_bss *selected;
struct wpa_ssid *ssid = NULL;
Delay AP selection if all networks are temporarily disabled If all networks are temporarily disabled, delay AP selection until at least one network is enabled. Running AP selection when all networks are disabled is useless as wpa_supplicant will not try to connect. In addition, it will result in needless scan iterations that may delay the connection when it is needed. Signed-off-by: Avraham Stern <avraham.stern@intel.com>
2015-03-16 06:20:02 +01:00
int time_to_reenable = wpas_reenabled_network_time(wpa_s);
if (time_to_reenable > 0) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
"Postpone network selection by %d seconds since all networks are disabled",
time_to_reenable);
eloop_cancel_timeout(wpas_network_reenabled, wpa_s, NULL);
eloop_register_timeout(time_to_reenable, 0,
wpas_network_reenabled, wpa_s, NULL);
return 0;
}
Interworking: Skip extra scan after network auto-select If the scan results from before ANQP fetch are fresh (less than five seconds old), do not run a new scan when selecting the BSS after having used Interworking network selection. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 19:18:48 +02:00
P2P: Do not allow scan or normal association on cfg80211 P2P Device The dedicated P2P management instance (wpas->p2p_mgmt == 1) using cfg80211 P2P Device cannot be used for non-P2P uses or connection (there is no netdev). Reject or ignore such operations to avoid unexpected operations if enabled network blocks are configured in the wpa_supplicant instance used to control this interface. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-03-01 10:23:09 +01:00
if (wpa_s->p2p_mgmt)
return 0; /* no normal connection on p2p_mgmt interface */
Use BSS entries instead of scan results for BSS selection This allows the BSS selection functions to be called without having the scan result data structure. This can be used to skip extra scans in cases where previous results can be considered fresh. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 18:56:57 +02:00
selected = wpa_supplicant_pick_network(wpa_s, &ssid);
mesh: Join an existing MBSS instead of creating a new one If scan results show a matching existing MBSS, join it instead of creating a new MBSS. Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
2016-07-08 04:39:12 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_MESH
if (wpa_s->ifmsh) {
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_INFO,
"Avoiding join because we already joined a mesh group");
return 0;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_MESH */
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
if (selected) {
Try to avoid some unnecessary roaming When multiple APs are present in scan results with similar signal strength, wpa_supplicant may end up bounching between them frequently whenever new scan results are available (e.g., due to periodic scans requested by NetworkManager). This can result in unnecessary roaming and in case of the current cfg80211 version, to frequent network disconnections. Do not request a roam if the current BSS is still present in the scan results and the selected BSS is in the same ESS and has only a slighly stronger signal strength.
2010-01-25 03:19:50 +01:00
int skip;
Use BSS table instead of scan results in need-to-roam determination The same information is available in the BSS table, so we can reduce the need for using the raw scan results in wpa_supplicant_need_to_roam(). Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-02 16:39:35 +02:00
skip = !wpa_supplicant_need_to_roam(wpa_s, selected, ssid);
Process RSN pre-authentication candidates when skipping roam wpa_supplicant_rsn_preauth_scan_results() needs to be called to update RSN pre-authentication candidates. This cannot be done before the wpa_supplicant_connect() call on the first association, but when trying to figure out whether to roam, it is fine to do so for the case when roaming is skipped. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-10-30 21:37:12 +01:00
if (skip) {
RSN: Update preauth scan results only based on new scan results The fast-connect optimization to skip a new scan did not update how the RSN preauthentication callback is used. There is no point in trying to add preauthentication candidates from cases where scan was skipped, so skip this call, too, in such cases. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-04-23 17:24:00 +02:00
if (new_scan)
wpa_supplicant_rsn_preauth_scan_results(wpa_s);
Do not propagate bad scan results to siblings sharing the radio This decreases useless work and re-scans by siblings when a device gets a scan failure. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-02-16 17:55:37 +01:00
return 0;
Process RSN pre-authentication candidates when skipping roam wpa_supplicant_rsn_preauth_scan_results() needs to be called to update RSN pre-authentication candidates. This cannot be done before the wpa_supplicant_connect() call on the first association, but when trying to figure out whether to roam, it is fine to do so for the case when roaming is skipped. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-10-30 21:37:12 +01:00
}
P2P: Fix wpa_supplicant crash on P2P WPS PBC overlap case Once PBC overlap detected when using dynamic group interfaces, the wpa_s corresponding to P2P group interface is freed. This patch avoids accessing the wpa_s data structure after it is freed. This fixes a possible crash in P2P client role in such a case.
2011-10-24 22:37:39 +02:00
Disconnect before trying to switch to a different network Previously, when wpa_supplicant received bgscan results with a preferred network, it connected to that network without disconnecting from the previous one. This might result in an inconsistent state of upper layers. Fix this by disconnecting from the current AP before connecting to the new one when the network profile changes and there is an existing connection. Signed-off-by: Ayala Beker <ayala.beker@intel.com>
2015-12-10 11:56:05 +01:00
if (ssid != wpa_s->current_ssid &&
wpa_s->wpa_state >= WPA_AUTHENTICATING) {
wpa_s->own_disconnect_req = 1;
wpa_supplicant_deauthenticate(
wpa_s, WLAN_REASON_DEAUTH_LEAVING);
}
P2P: Fix wpa_supplicant crash on P2P WPS PBC overlap case Once PBC overlap detected when using dynamic group interfaces, the wpa_s corresponding to P2P group interface is freed. This patch avoids accessing the wpa_s data structure after it is freed. This fixes a possible crash in P2P client role in such a case.
2011-10-24 22:37:39 +02:00
if (wpa_supplicant_connect(wpa_s, selected, ssid) < 0) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Connect failed");
return -1;
}
RSN: Update preauth scan results only based on new scan results The fast-connect optimization to skip a new scan did not update how the RSN preauthentication callback is used. There is no point in trying to add preauthentication candidates from cases where scan was skipped, so skip this call, too, in such cases. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-04-23 17:24:00 +02:00
if (new_scan)
wpa_supplicant_rsn_preauth_scan_results(wpa_s);
Do not inform other virtual interfaces of scan results in all cases If a connection operation is started on an interface based on scan results, other virtual interfaces should not be information about the results to avoid potential concurrent operations during the association steps. Since the sibling notification of scan results received was added as an optimization, skipping it for this type of cases is the simplest way of avoiding unnecessary concurrent operations. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-14 03:07:02 +02:00
/*
* Do not notify other virtual radios of scan results since we do not
* want them to start other associations at the same time.
*/
return 1;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
} else {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "No suitable network found");
Allow IBSS/AP mode networks to be created in ap_scan=1 mode If no BSSes/IBSSes matching the enabled networks are found in the scan results, IBSS/AP mode network (if configured) can be created in ap_scan=1 mode instead of requiring ap_scan=2 mode to be used whenever using IBSS or AP mode.
2009-09-29 16:11:36 +02:00
ssid = wpa_supplicant_pick_new_network(wpa_s);
if (ssid) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Setup a new network");
Allow IBSS/AP mode networks to be created in ap_scan=1 mode If no BSSes/IBSSes matching the enabled networks are found in the scan results, IBSS/AP mode network (if configured) can be created in ap_scan=1 mode instead of requiring ap_scan=2 mode to be used whenever using IBSS or AP mode.
2009-09-29 16:11:36 +02:00
wpa_supplicant_associate(wpa_s, NULL, ssid);
RSN: Update preauth scan results only based on new scan results The fast-connect optimization to skip a new scan did not update how the RSN preauthentication callback is used. There is no point in trying to add preauthentication candidates from cases where scan was skipped, so skip this call, too, in such cases. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-04-23 17:24:00 +02:00
if (new_scan)
wpa_supplicant_rsn_preauth_scan_results(wpa_s);
Request new scan only for the original interface Request new scan only for the interface for which the original scan request and results has come. Otherwise while sharing scan results along with P2P interfaces, the new scan will be requested on P2P interfaces. Signed-hostap: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
2013-11-17 11:23:09 +01:00
} else if (own_request) {
/*
* No SSID found. If SCAN results are as a result of
* own scan request and not due to a scan request on
* another shared interface, try another scan.
*/
Make scan interval configurable It is now possible to configure the the time in seconds that wpa_supplicant waits before requesting a new scan after failing to find a suitable network in scan results. Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2011-04-11 22:14:38 +02:00
int timeout_sec = wpa_s->scan_interval;
Allow sub-second resolution for scan requests This is in preparation to use cases that may benefit from more frequent scanning.
2010-04-11 18:10:01 +02:00
int timeout_usec = 0;
P2P: Optimize scan timeouts for group formation
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_P2P
P2P: Fix P2P_CONNECT-auto fallback to GO Neg with group interface If a separate P2P group interface was used, P2P_CONNECT-auto fallback to GO Negotiation could result in use of freed memory and segmentation fault. This happened in cases where the peer GO was found in some old scans, but not in the first scan triggered by the P2P_CONNECT-auto command ("P2P: Peer was found running GO in older scan -> try to join the group" shows up in the debug log). In addition, the GO would still need to reply to PD Request to allow this code path to be triggered. When five scans for the GO were completed in this sequence, the P2P group interface was removed as part of falling back to GO Negotiation. However, that ended up dereferencing the freed wpa_s instance at the end of scan event processing. Fix this by reordering code a bit and breaking out from EVENT_SCAN_RESULTS processing if the interface could have been removed. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-02-08 10:38:56 +01:00
int res;
res = wpas_p2p_scan_no_go_seen(wpa_s);
if (res == 2)
return 2;
if (res == 1)
P2P: Allow older scan results to improve p2p_connect-auto robustness Previusly the peer was assumed to not be operating a GO if the BSS entry for it was not updated in the single scan run started by p2p_connect-auto. This is not very robust since a scan may miss the peer if either a Probe Request or Probe Response frame is lost. Improve robustness by assuming the peer is still operating the GO and starting the join operation. If the GO is not found during PD-for-join or the single-channel scans during the join, fall back to GO Negotiation. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-05-08 16:13:56 +02:00
return 0;
P2P: Short scan wait to speed up the group re-invocation The shorter 250 ms wait for the next scan request can be used also for the case of persistent group re-invocation instead of just formation of a new group. This speeds up the process and makes this more robust especially in cases where the GO is using MCC. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-11-12 15:17:35 +01:00
if (wpa_s->p2p_in_provisioning ||
P2P: Optimize scan for GO during persistent group invocation Scan for GO on the negotiated operating channel for few iterations before searching on all the supported channels during persistent group reinvocation. In addition, use the already known SSID of the group in the scans. These optimizations reduce group formation time. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-03-21 13:56:02 +01:00
wpa_s->show_group_started ||
wpa_s->p2p_in_invitation) {
P2P: Optimize scan timeouts for group formation
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
/*
* Use shorter wait during P2P Provisioning
P2P: Short scan wait to speed up the group re-invocation The shorter 250 ms wait for the next scan request can be used also for the case of persistent group re-invocation instead of just formation of a new group. This speeds up the process and makes this more robust especially in cases where the GO is using MCC. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-11-12 15:17:35 +01:00
* state and during P2P join-a-group operation
* to speed up group formation.
P2P: Optimize scan timeouts for group formation
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
*/
timeout_sec = 0;
timeout_usec = 250000;
Use sched_scan in driver init This patch uses sched_scan, if available, when the driver is initialized. It also adds a couple of cancel operations where appropriate. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
2011-09-27 21:21:31 +02:00
wpa_supplicant_req_new_scan(wpa_s, timeout_sec,
timeout_usec);
return 0;
P2P: Optimize scan timeouts for group formation
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
}
#endif /* CONFIG_P2P */
Interworking: Add optional use of network selection on normal scans auto_interworking=1 configuration parameter can be used to request wpa_supplicant to use Interworking network selection automatically as a part of the normal (non-Interworking) network selection if the scan results do not match with enabled networks. This makes scanning work similarly to the "interworking_select auto" command. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-08-28 15:14:13 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_INTERWORKING
if (wpa_s->conf->auto_interworking &&
wpa_s->conf->interworking &&
wpa_s->conf->cred) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Interworking: "
"start ANQP fetch since no matching "
"networks found");
wpa_s->network_select = 1;
wpa_s->auto_network_select = 1;
interworking_start_fetch_anqp(wpa_s);
Do not inform other virtual interfaces of scan results in all cases If a connection operation is started on an interface based on scan results, other virtual interfaces should not be information about the results to avoid potential concurrent operations during the association steps. Since the sibling notification of scan results received was added as an optimization, skipping it for this type of cases is the simplest way of avoiding unnecessary concurrent operations. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-14 03:07:02 +02:00
return 1;
Interworking: Add optional use of network selection on normal scans auto_interworking=1 configuration parameter can be used to request wpa_supplicant to use Interworking network selection automatically as a part of the normal (non-Interworking) network selection if the scan results do not match with enabled networks. This makes scanning work similarly to the "interworking_select auto" command. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-08-28 15:14:13 +02:00
}
#endif /* CONFIG_INTERWORKING */
WPS: Reduce scan wait time during WPS processing Since the AP is expected to be available, there is no need to wait for the full five second wait between scans during WPS connection. This speeds up cases where the first scan misses the AP for some reason. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-11-28 11:56:21 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_WPS
WPS: Use shorter scan interval during pre-provisioning search Previously, the shorter scan interval was already in use for the connection following the provisioning step, but same optimization can also be used for the pre-provisioning scan. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-29 17:02:05 +01:00
if (wpa_s->after_wps > 0 || wpas_wps_searching(wpa_s)) {
WPS: Reduce scan wait time during WPS processing Since the AP is expected to be available, there is no need to wait for the full five second wait between scans during WPS connection. This speeds up cases where the first scan misses the AP for some reason. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-11-28 11:56:21 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Use shorter wait during WPS processing");
timeout_sec = 0;
timeout_usec = 500000;
wpa_supplicant_req_new_scan(wpa_s, timeout_sec,
timeout_usec);
return 0;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_WPS */
Use sched_scan in driver init This patch uses sched_scan, if available, when the driver is initialized. It also adds a couple of cancel operations where appropriate. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
2011-09-27 21:21:31 +02:00
if (wpa_supplicant_req_sched_scan(wpa_s))
wpa_supplicant_req_new_scan(wpa_s, timeout_sec,
timeout_usec);
Send CTRL-EVENT-NETWORK-NOT-FOUND if no suitable network was found This provides more information to upper layer programs on what happens with connection attempts in cases where the enabled networks are not found in scan results. Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2015-06-19 19:33:50 +02:00
wpa_msg_ctrl(wpa_s, MSG_INFO,
WPA_EVENT_NETWORK_NOT_FOUND);
Allow sub-second resolution for scan requests This is in preparation to use cases that may benefit from more frequent scanning.
2010-04-11 18:10:01 +02:00
}
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
}
Do not propagate bad scan results to siblings sharing the radio This decreases useless work and re-scans by siblings when a device gets a scan failure. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-02-16 17:55:37 +01:00
return 0;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
}
Enable sharing of scan result events among virtual interfaces When controlling multiple virtual interfaces on the same physical radio, share the scan results events with sibling interfaces. This decreases the time it takes to connect many virtual interfaces. This is currently only supported on Linux with cfg80211-based drivers when using nl80211 or wext driver interface. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2010-11-26 20:46:30 +01:00
P2P: Fix P2P_CONNECT-auto fallback to GO Neg with group interface If a separate P2P group interface was used, P2P_CONNECT-auto fallback to GO Negotiation could result in use of freed memory and segmentation fault. This happened in cases where the peer GO was found in some old scans, but not in the first scan triggered by the P2P_CONNECT-auto command ("P2P: Peer was found running GO in older scan -> try to join the group" shows up in the debug log). In addition, the GO would still need to reply to PD Request to allow this code path to be triggered. When five scans for the GO were completed in this sequence, the P2P group interface was removed as part of falling back to GO Negotiation. However, that ended up dereferencing the freed wpa_s instance at the end of scan event processing. Fix this by reordering code a bit and breaking out from EVENT_SCAN_RESULTS processing if the interface could have been removed. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-02-08 10:38:56 +01:00
static int wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
union wpa_event_data *data)
Enable sharing of scan result events among virtual interfaces When controlling multiple virtual interfaces on the same physical radio, share the scan results events with sibling interfaces. This decreases the time it takes to connect many virtual interfaces. This is currently only supported on Linux with cfg80211-based drivers when using nl80211 or wext driver interface. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2010-11-26 20:46:30 +01:00
{
struct wpa_supplicant *ifs;
P2P: Fix P2P_CONNECT-auto fallback to GO Neg with group interface If a separate P2P group interface was used, P2P_CONNECT-auto fallback to GO Negotiation could result in use of freed memory and segmentation fault. This happened in cases where the peer GO was found in some old scans, but not in the first scan triggered by the P2P_CONNECT-auto command ("P2P: Peer was found running GO in older scan -> try to join the group" shows up in the debug log). In addition, the GO would still need to reply to PD Request to allow this code path to be triggered. When five scans for the GO were completed in this sequence, the P2P group interface was removed as part of falling back to GO Negotiation. However, that ended up dereferencing the freed wpa_s instance at the end of scan event processing. Fix this by reordering code a bit and breaking out from EVENT_SCAN_RESULTS processing if the interface could have been removed. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-02-08 10:38:56 +01:00
int res;
Enable sharing of scan result events among virtual interfaces When controlling multiple virtual interfaces on the same physical radio, share the scan results events with sibling interfaces. This decreases the time it takes to connect many virtual interfaces. This is currently only supported on Linux with cfg80211-based drivers when using nl80211 or wext driver interface. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2010-11-26 20:46:30 +01:00
P2P: Fix P2P_CONNECT-auto fallback to GO Neg with group interface If a separate P2P group interface was used, P2P_CONNECT-auto fallback to GO Negotiation could result in use of freed memory and segmentation fault. This happened in cases where the peer GO was found in some old scans, but not in the first scan triggered by the P2P_CONNECT-auto command ("P2P: Peer was found running GO in older scan -> try to join the group" shows up in the debug log). In addition, the GO would still need to reply to PD Request to allow this code path to be triggered. When five scans for the GO were completed in this sequence, the P2P group interface was removed as part of falling back to GO Negotiation. However, that ended up dereferencing the freed wpa_s instance at the end of scan event processing. Fix this by reordering code a bit and breaking out from EVENT_SCAN_RESULTS processing if the interface could have been removed. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-02-08 10:38:56 +01:00
res = _wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results(wpa_s, data, 1);
if (res == 2) {
/*
* Interface may have been removed, so must not dereference
* wpa_s after this.
*/
return 1;
}
if (res != 0) {
Do not propagate bad scan results to siblings sharing the radio This decreases useless work and re-scans by siblings when a device gets a scan failure. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-02-16 17:55:37 +01:00
/*
* If no scan results could be fetched, then no need to
* notify those interfaces that did not actually request
Do not inform other virtual interfaces of scan results in all cases If a connection operation is started on an interface based on scan results, other virtual interfaces should not be information about the results to avoid potential concurrent operations during the association steps. Since the sibling notification of scan results received was added as an optimization, skipping it for this type of cases is the simplest way of avoiding unnecessary concurrent operations. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-14 03:07:02 +02:00
* this scan. Similarly, if scan results started a new operation on this
* interface, do not notify other interfaces to avoid concurrent
* operations during a connection attempt.
Do not propagate bad scan results to siblings sharing the radio This decreases useless work and re-scans by siblings when a device gets a scan failure. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-02-16 17:55:37 +01:00
*/
P2P: Fix P2P_CONNECT-auto fallback to GO Neg with group interface If a separate P2P group interface was used, P2P_CONNECT-auto fallback to GO Negotiation could result in use of freed memory and segmentation fault. This happened in cases where the peer GO was found in some old scans, but not in the first scan triggered by the P2P_CONNECT-auto command ("P2P: Peer was found running GO in older scan -> try to join the group" shows up in the debug log). In addition, the GO would still need to reply to PD Request to allow this code path to be triggered. When five scans for the GO were completed in this sequence, the P2P group interface was removed as part of falling back to GO Negotiation. However, that ended up dereferencing the freed wpa_s instance at the end of scan event processing. Fix this by reordering code a bit and breaking out from EVENT_SCAN_RESULTS processing if the interface could have been removed. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-02-08 10:38:56 +01:00
return 0;
Do not propagate bad scan results to siblings sharing the radio This decreases useless work and re-scans by siblings when a device gets a scan failure. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-02-16 17:55:37 +01:00
}
Enable sharing of scan result events among virtual interfaces When controlling multiple virtual interfaces on the same physical radio, share the scan results events with sibling interfaces. This decreases the time it takes to connect many virtual interfaces. This is currently only supported on Linux with cfg80211-based drivers when using nl80211 or wext driver interface. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2010-11-26 20:46:30 +01:00
/*
Use wpa_radio data for scan result updates This replaces the now unnecessary iteration of get_radio_name() calls. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-11-24 18:57:43 +01:00
* Check other interfaces to see if they share the same radio. If
Enable sharing of scan result events among virtual interfaces When controlling multiple virtual interfaces on the same physical radio, share the scan results events with sibling interfaces. This decreases the time it takes to connect many virtual interfaces. This is currently only supported on Linux with cfg80211-based drivers when using nl80211 or wext driver interface. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2010-11-26 20:46:30 +01:00
* so, they get updated with this same scan info.
*/
Use wpa_radio data for scan result updates This replaces the now unnecessary iteration of get_radio_name() calls. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-11-24 18:57:43 +01:00
dl_list_for_each(ifs, &wpa_s->radio->ifaces, struct wpa_supplicant,
radio_list) {
if (ifs != wpa_s) {
Enable sharing of scan result events among virtual interfaces When controlling multiple virtual interfaces on the same physical radio, share the scan results events with sibling interfaces. This decreases the time it takes to connect many virtual interfaces. This is currently only supported on Linux with cfg80211-based drivers when using nl80211 or wext driver interface. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2010-11-26 20:46:30 +01:00
wpa_printf(MSG_DEBUG, "%s: Updating scan results from "
"sibling", ifs->ifname);
Use special scan result processing steps only on requesting interface Scan result events are shared between all virtual interfaces sharing the same radio. However, some of the steps are not really appropriate on virtual interfaces that did not issue the scan request. Fix this by making these steps conditional on the scan results being processed on the interface that requested them. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-03-18 16:07:09 +01:00
_wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results(ifs, data, 0);
Enable sharing of scan result events among virtual interfaces When controlling multiple virtual interfaces on the same physical radio, share the scan results events with sibling interfaces. This decreases the time it takes to connect many virtual interfaces. This is currently only supported on Linux with cfg80211-based drivers when using nl80211 or wext driver interface. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2010-11-26 20:46:30 +01:00
}
}
P2P: Fix P2P_CONNECT-auto fallback to GO Neg with group interface If a separate P2P group interface was used, P2P_CONNECT-auto fallback to GO Negotiation could result in use of freed memory and segmentation fault. This happened in cases where the peer GO was found in some old scans, but not in the first scan triggered by the P2P_CONNECT-auto command ("P2P: Peer was found running GO in older scan -> try to join the group" shows up in the debug log). In addition, the GO would still need to reply to PD Request to allow this code path to be triggered. When five scans for the GO were completed in this sequence, the P2P group interface was removed as part of falling back to GO Negotiation. However, that ended up dereferencing the freed wpa_s instance at the end of scan event processing. Fix this by reordering code a bit and breaking out from EVENT_SCAN_RESULTS processing if the interface could have been removed. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-02-08 10:38:56 +01:00
return 0;
Enable sharing of scan result events among virtual interfaces When controlling multiple virtual interfaces on the same physical radio, share the scan results events with sibling interfaces. This decreases the time it takes to connect many virtual interfaces. This is currently only supported on Linux with cfg80211-based drivers when using nl80211 or wext driver interface. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2010-11-26 20:46:30 +01:00
}
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
#endif /* CONFIG_NO_SCAN_PROCESSING */
wpa_supplicant: Implement fast-associate on SelectNetwork If scan results are available when we perform a SelectNetwork, use them to make an associate decision. This can save an entire scan interval-worth of time in situations where something external to wpa_supplicant (like a connection manager) has just previously requested a scan before calling SelectNetwork. Signed-hostap: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org>
2013-02-03 20:08:31 +01:00
int wpa_supplicant_fast_associate(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s)
{
#ifdef CONFIG_NO_SCAN_PROCESSING
return -1;
#else /* CONFIG_NO_SCAN_PROCESSING */
wpa_supplicant: Use monotonic time for last_scan check This just serves to check if there was a scan within the last 5 seconds, hence it should use monotonic time. While at it, also use os_reltime_expired(). Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2013-12-16 21:08:44 +01:00
struct os_reltime now;
wpa_supplicant: Implement fast-associate on SelectNetwork If scan results are available when we perform a SelectNetwork, use them to make an associate decision. This can save an entire scan interval-worth of time in situations where something external to wpa_supplicant (like a connection manager) has just previously requested a scan before calling SelectNetwork. Signed-hostap: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org>
2013-02-03 20:08:31 +01:00
Do not check unsigned size is less than zero The variables here are unsigned and as such, cannot have a negative value. Use == 0 instead of <= 0 to make this cleaner. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-06-23 20:12:29 +02:00
if (wpa_s->last_scan_res_used == 0)
wpa_supplicant: Implement fast-associate on SelectNetwork If scan results are available when we perform a SelectNetwork, use them to make an associate decision. This can save an entire scan interval-worth of time in situations where something external to wpa_supplicant (like a connection manager) has just previously requested a scan before calling SelectNetwork. Signed-hostap: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org>
2013-02-03 20:08:31 +01:00
return -1;
wpa_supplicant: Use monotonic time for last_scan check This just serves to check if there was a scan within the last 5 seconds, hence it should use monotonic time. While at it, also use os_reltime_expired(). Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2013-12-16 21:08:44 +01:00
os_get_reltime(&now);
if (os_reltime_expired(&now, &wpa_s->last_scan, 5)) {
wpa_supplicant: Implement fast-associate on SelectNetwork If scan results are available when we perform a SelectNetwork, use them to make an associate decision. This can save an entire scan interval-worth of time in situations where something external to wpa_supplicant (like a connection manager) has just previously requested a scan before calling SelectNetwork. Signed-hostap: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org>
2013-02-03 20:08:31 +01:00
wpa_printf(MSG_DEBUG, "Fast associate: Old scan results");
return -1;
}
Request new scan only for the original interface Request new scan only for the interface for which the original scan request and results has come. Otherwise while sharing scan results along with P2P interfaces, the new scan will be requested on P2P interfaces. Signed-hostap: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
2013-11-17 11:23:09 +01:00
return wpas_select_network_from_last_scan(wpa_s, 0, 1);
wpa_supplicant: Implement fast-associate on SelectNetwork If scan results are available when we perform a SelectNetwork, use them to make an associate decision. This can save an entire scan interval-worth of time in situations where something external to wpa_supplicant (like a connection manager) has just previously requested a scan before calling SelectNetwork. Signed-hostap: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org>
2013-02-03 20:08:31 +01:00
#endif /* CONFIG_NO_SCAN_PROCESSING */
}
WNM: Add advertisement of BSS max idle period If WNM is enabled for the build (CONFIG_WNM=y), add BSS max idle period information to the (Re)Association Response frame from the AP and parse this information on the station. For SME-in-wpa_supplicant case, add a timer to handle periodic transmission of the keep-alive frame. The actual request for the driver to transmit a frame is not yet implemented. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-05-28 02:35:00 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_WNM
static void wnm_bss_keep_alive(void *eloop_ctx, void *sock_ctx)
{
struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s = eloop_ctx;
if (wpa_s->wpa_state < WPA_ASSOCIATED)
return;
WNM: Add option to disable keep-alive frames for testing purposes "wpa_cli set no_keep_alive 1/0" can now be used to disable/enable keep alive frames to enable testing. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-12-18 15:57:52 +01:00
if (!wpa_s->no_keep_alive) {
wpa_printf(MSG_DEBUG, "WNM: Send keep-alive to AP " MACSTR,
MAC2STR(wpa_s->bssid));
/* TODO: could skip this if normal data traffic has been sent */
/* TODO: Consider using some more appropriate data frame for
* this */
if (wpa_s->l2)
l2_packet_send(wpa_s->l2, wpa_s->bssid, 0x0800,
(u8 *) "", 0);
}
WNM: Add advertisement of BSS max idle period If WNM is enabled for the build (CONFIG_WNM=y), add BSS max idle period information to the (Re)Association Response frame from the AP and parse this information on the station. For SME-in-wpa_supplicant case, add a timer to handle periodic transmission of the keep-alive frame. The actual request for the driver to transmit a frame is not yet implemented. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-05-28 02:35:00 +02:00
WNM: Fix build without CONFIG_SME=y Commit b6668734ab8ac235f129d1cd0aff4c4e1c922b41 missed #ifdef CONFIG_SME protection around wpa_s->sme access. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-05-28 03:17:41 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_SME
WNM: Add advertisement of BSS max idle period If WNM is enabled for the build (CONFIG_WNM=y), add BSS max idle period information to the (Re)Association Response frame from the AP and parse this information on the station. For SME-in-wpa_supplicant case, add a timer to handle periodic transmission of the keep-alive frame. The actual request for the driver to transmit a frame is not yet implemented. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-05-28 02:35:00 +02:00
if (wpa_s->sme.bss_max_idle_period) {
unsigned int msec;
msec = wpa_s->sme.bss_max_idle_period * 1024; /* times 1000 */
if (msec > 100)
msec -= 100;
eloop_register_timeout(msec / 1000, msec % 1000 * 1000,
wnm_bss_keep_alive, wpa_s, NULL);
}
WNM: Fix build without CONFIG_SME=y Commit b6668734ab8ac235f129d1cd0aff4c4e1c922b41 missed #ifdef CONFIG_SME protection around wpa_s->sme access. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-05-28 03:17:41 +02:00
#endif /* CONFIG_SME */
WNM: Add advertisement of BSS max idle period If WNM is enabled for the build (CONFIG_WNM=y), add BSS max idle period information to the (Re)Association Response frame from the AP and parse this information on the station. For SME-in-wpa_supplicant case, add a timer to handle periodic transmission of the keep-alive frame. The actual request for the driver to transmit a frame is not yet implemented. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-05-28 02:35:00 +02:00
}
static void wnm_process_assoc_resp(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
const u8 *ies, size_t ies_len)
{
struct ieee802_11_elems elems;
if (ies == NULL)
return;
if (ieee802_11_parse_elems(ies, ies_len, &elems, 1) == ParseFailed)
return;
#ifdef CONFIG_SME
if (elems.bss_max_idle_period) {
unsigned int msec;
wpa_s->sme.bss_max_idle_period =
WPA_GET_LE16(elems.bss_max_idle_period);
wpa_printf(MSG_DEBUG, "WNM: BSS Max Idle Period: %u (* 1000 "
"TU)%s", wpa_s->sme.bss_max_idle_period,
(elems.bss_max_idle_period[2] & 0x01) ?
" (protected keep-live required)" : "");
if (wpa_s->sme.bss_max_idle_period == 0)
wpa_s->sme.bss_max_idle_period = 1;
if (wpa_s->drv_flags & WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_SME) {
eloop_cancel_timeout(wnm_bss_keep_alive, wpa_s, NULL);
/* msec times 1000 */
msec = wpa_s->sme.bss_max_idle_period * 1024;
if (msec > 100)
msec -= 100;
eloop_register_timeout(msec / 1000, msec % 1000 * 1000,
wnm_bss_keep_alive, wpa_s,
NULL);
}
}
#endif /* CONFIG_SME */
}
#endif /* CONFIG_WNM */
void wnm_bss_keep_alive_deinit(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s)
{
#ifdef CONFIG_WNM
eloop_cancel_timeout(wnm_bss_keep_alive, wpa_s, NULL);
#endif /* CONFIG_WNM */
}
Interworking: Add support for QoS Mapping functionality for the STA Indicate support for QoS Mapping and configure driver to update the QoS Map if QoS Map Set elements is received from the AP either in (Re)Association Response or QoS Map Configure frame. This commit adds support for receiving the frames with nl80211 drivers, but the actual QoS Map configuration command is still missing. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-07-24 12:17:56 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_INTERWORKING
static int wpas_qos_map_set(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s, const u8 *qos_map,
size_t len)
{
int res;
wpa_hexdump(MSG_DEBUG, "Interworking: QoS Map Set", qos_map, len);
res = wpa_drv_set_qos_map(wpa_s, qos_map, len);
if (res) {
wpa_printf(MSG_DEBUG, "Interworking: Failed to configure QoS Map Set to the driver");
}
return res;
}
static void interworking_process_assoc_resp(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
const u8 *ies, size_t ies_len)
{
struct ieee802_11_elems elems;
if (ies == NULL)
return;
if (ieee802_11_parse_elems(ies, ies_len, &elems, 1) == ParseFailed)
return;
if (elems.qos_map_set) {
wpas_qos_map_set(wpa_s, elems.qos_map_set,
elems.qos_map_set_len);
}
}
#endif /* CONFIG_INTERWORKING */
FST: Improve parsing of Multiband IEs Previously, MB IEs were parsed only from association event. Try to get MB IEs from other management frames like Probe Response frames. The MB IEs from the association event may not be up-to-date and in some cases may actually be missing and updating the information based on other frames can improve robustness of FST exchanges. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-11-22 13:46:54 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_FST
static int wpas_fst_update_mbie(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
const u8 *ie, size_t ie_len)
{
struct mb_ies_info mb_ies;
if (!ie || !ie_len || !wpa_s->fst)
return -ENOENT;
os_memset(&mb_ies, 0, sizeof(mb_ies));
while (ie_len >= 2 && mb_ies.nof_ies < MAX_NOF_MB_IES_SUPPORTED) {
size_t len;
len = 2 + ie[1];
if (len > ie_len) {
wpa_hexdump(MSG_DEBUG, "FST: Truncated IE found",
ie, ie_len);
break;
}
if (ie[0] == WLAN_EID_MULTI_BAND) {
wpa_printf(MSG_DEBUG, "MB IE of %u bytes found",
(unsigned int) len);
mb_ies.ies[mb_ies.nof_ies].ie = ie + 2;
mb_ies.ies[mb_ies.nof_ies].ie_len = len - 2;
mb_ies.nof_ies++;
}
ie_len -= len;
ie += len;
}
if (mb_ies.nof_ies > 0) {
wpabuf_free(wpa_s->received_mb_ies);
wpa_s->received_mb_ies = mb_ies_by_info(&mb_ies);
return 0;
}
return -ENOENT;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_FST */
FT: Deauthenticate in case of Reassoc Response validation error If validation of the Reassociation Response frame fails during FT Protocol, do not allow association to be completed; instead, force deauthentication.
2010-04-09 15:59:27 +02:00
static int wpa_supplicant_event_associnfo(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
union wpa_event_data *data)
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
{
int l, len, found = 0, wpa_found, rsn_found;
Add SME support (separate authentication and association) This can be used, e.g., with mac80211-based Linux drivers with nl80211. This allows over-the-air FT protocol to be used (IEEE 802.11r). Since the nl80211 interface needed for this is very recent (added today into wireless-testing.git), driver_nl80211.c has backwards compatibility code that uses WEXT for association if the kernel does not support the new commands. This compatibility code can be disabled by defining NO_WEXT_COMPAT. That code will also be removed at some point to clean up driver_nl80211.c.
2009-03-20 21:26:41 +01:00
const u8 *p;
Fix compiler warning when CONFIG_IEEE80211R is not included Commit 6a1ce39599c857e6e612d8dd81e892ec5ca36c7c moved the bssid variable declaration to be outside CONFIG_IEEE80211R block and triggered a compiler warning about unused variable. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-03-13 11:38:26 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_IEEE80211R
FT: Add support for IEEE 802.11r with driver-based SME Add NL80211_CMD_UPDATE_FT_IES to support update of FT IEs to the WLAN driver. Add NL80211_CMD_FT_EVENT to send FT event from the WLAN driver. This will carry the target AP's MAC address along with the relevant Information Elements. This event is used to report received FT IEs (MDIE, FTIE, RSN IE, TIE, RICIE). Signed-off-by: Deepthi Gowri <deepthi@codeaurora.org>
2013-03-12 19:08:53 +01:00
u8 bssid[ETH_ALEN];
Fix compiler warning when CONFIG_IEEE80211R is not included Commit 6a1ce39599c857e6e612d8dd81e892ec5ca36c7c moved the bssid variable declaration to be outside CONFIG_IEEE80211R block and triggered a compiler warning about unused variable. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-03-13 11:38:26 +01:00
#endif /* CONFIG_IEEE80211R */
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Association info event");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
if (data->assoc_info.req_ies)
wpa_hexdump(MSG_DEBUG, "req_ies", data->assoc_info.req_ies,
data->assoc_info.req_ies_len);
TDLS: Do not allow setup to be started if AP prohibits TDLS
2011-01-28 18:27:28 +01:00
if (data->assoc_info.resp_ies) {
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
wpa_hexdump(MSG_DEBUG, "resp_ies", data->assoc_info.resp_ies,
data->assoc_info.resp_ies_len);
TDLS: Do not allow setup to be started if AP prohibits TDLS
2011-01-28 18:27:28 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_TDLS
wpa_tdls_assoc_resp_ies(wpa_s->wpa, data->assoc_info.resp_ies,
data->assoc_info.resp_ies_len);
#endif /* CONFIG_TDLS */
WNM: Add advertisement of BSS max idle period If WNM is enabled for the build (CONFIG_WNM=y), add BSS max idle period information to the (Re)Association Response frame from the AP and parse this information on the station. For SME-in-wpa_supplicant case, add a timer to handle periodic transmission of the keep-alive frame. The actual request for the driver to transmit a frame is not yet implemented. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-05-28 02:35:00 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_WNM
wnm_process_assoc_resp(wpa_s, data->assoc_info.resp_ies,
data->assoc_info.resp_ies_len);
#endif /* CONFIG_WNM */
Interworking: Add support for QoS Mapping functionality for the STA Indicate support for QoS Mapping and configure driver to update the QoS Map if QoS Map Set elements is received from the AP either in (Re)Association Response or QoS Map Configure frame. This commit adds support for receiving the frames with nl80211 drivers, but the actual QoS Map configuration command is still missing. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-07-24 12:17:56 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_INTERWORKING
interworking_process_assoc_resp(wpa_s, data->assoc_info.resp_ies,
data->assoc_info.resp_ies_len);
#endif /* CONFIG_INTERWORKING */
TDLS: Do not allow setup to be started if AP prohibits TDLS
2011-01-28 18:27:28 +01:00
}
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
if (data->assoc_info.beacon_ies)
wpa_hexdump(MSG_DEBUG, "beacon_ies",
data->assoc_info.beacon_ies,
data->assoc_info.beacon_ies_len);
Add an option for driver wrappers to report operational frequency
2009-12-28 12:23:13 +01:00
if (data->assoc_info.freq)
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "freq=%u MHz",
data->assoc_info.freq);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
p = data->assoc_info.req_ies;
l = data->assoc_info.req_ies_len;
/* Go through the IEs and make a copy of the WPA/RSN IE, if present. */
while (p && l >= 2) {
len = p[1] + 2;
if (len > l) {
wpa_hexdump(MSG_DEBUG, "Truncated IE in assoc_info",
p, l);
break;
}
if ((p[0] == WLAN_EID_VENDOR_SPECIFIC && p[1] >= 6 &&
(os_memcmp(&p[2], "\x00\x50\xF2\x01\x01\x00", 6) == 0)) ||
Handle OSEN IE in Assoc Request info if req_ies exists The 4-way handshake fails with the error "WPA: No wpa_ie set - cannot generate msg 2/4" while connecting to OSEN network with drivers that indicate used Association Request frame elements because OSEN IE is not handled in wpa_supplicant_event_associnfo() if data->assoc_info.req_ies is not NULL. Signed-off-by: Daichi Ueura <daichi.ueura@sonymobile.com>
2016-03-16 07:01:59 +01:00
(p[0] == WLAN_EID_VENDOR_SPECIFIC && p[1] >= 4 &&
(os_memcmp(&p[2], "\x50\x6F\x9A\x12", 4) == 0)) ||
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
(p[0] == WLAN_EID_RSN && p[1] >= 2)) {
if (wpa_sm_set_assoc_wpa_ie(wpa_s->wpa, p, len))
break;
found = 1;
wpa_find_assoc_pmkid(wpa_s);
break;
}
l -= len;
p += len;
}
if (!found && data->assoc_info.req_ies)
wpa_sm_set_assoc_wpa_ie(wpa_s->wpa, NULL, 0);
Add SME support (separate authentication and association) This can be used, e.g., with mac80211-based Linux drivers with nl80211. This allows over-the-air FT protocol to be used (IEEE 802.11r). Since the nl80211 interface needed for this is very recent (added today into wireless-testing.git), driver_nl80211.c has backwards compatibility code that uses WEXT for association if the kernel does not support the new commands. This compatibility code can be disabled by defining NO_WEXT_COMPAT. That code will also be removed at some point to clean up driver_nl80211.c.
2009-03-20 21:26:41 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_IEEE80211R
FT: Process reassoc resp FT IEs when using wpa_supplicant SME
2010-03-13 20:13:18 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_SME
if (wpa_s->sme.auth_alg == WPA_AUTH_ALG_FT) {
if (wpa_drv_get_bssid(wpa_s, bssid) < 0 ||
wpa_ft_validate_reassoc_resp(wpa_s->wpa,
data->assoc_info.resp_ies,
data->assoc_info.resp_ies_len,
bssid) < 0) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "FT: Validation of "
"Reassociation Response failed");
FT: Deauthenticate in case of Reassoc Response validation error If validation of the Reassociation Response frame fails during FT Protocol, do not allow association to be completed; instead, force deauthentication.
2010-04-09 15:59:27 +02:00
wpa_supplicant_deauthenticate(
wpa_s, WLAN_REASON_INVALID_IE);
return -1;
FT: Process reassoc resp FT IEs when using wpa_supplicant SME
2010-03-13 20:13:18 +01:00
}
}
Add SME support (separate authentication and association) This can be used, e.g., with mac80211-based Linux drivers with nl80211. This allows over-the-air FT protocol to be used (IEEE 802.11r). Since the nl80211 interface needed for this is very recent (added today into wireless-testing.git), driver_nl80211.c has backwards compatibility code that uses WEXT for association if the kernel does not support the new commands. This compatibility code can be disabled by defining NO_WEXT_COMPAT. That code will also be removed at some point to clean up driver_nl80211.c.
2009-03-20 21:26:41 +01:00
p = data->assoc_info.resp_ies;
l = data->assoc_info.resp_ies_len;
WPS 2.0: Validate WPS attributes in management frames and WSC messages If CONFIG_WPS_STRICT is set, validate WPS IE(s) in management frames and reject the frames if any of the mandatory attributes is missing or if an included attribute uses an invalid value. In addition, verify that all mandatory attributes are included and have valid values in the WSC messages.
2010-05-26 16:16:14 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_WPS_STRICT
WPS: Use strict validation of (Re)AssocResp only if IEs are known
2011-04-14 01:55:38 +02:00
if (p && wpa_s->current_ssid &&
WPS 2.0: Validate WPS attributes in management frames and WSC messages If CONFIG_WPS_STRICT is set, validate WPS IE(s) in management frames and reject the frames if any of the mandatory attributes is missing or if an included attribute uses an invalid value. In addition, verify that all mandatory attributes are included and have valid values in the WSC messages.
2010-05-26 16:16:14 +02:00
wpa_s->current_ssid->key_mgmt == WPA_KEY_MGMT_WPS) {
struct wpabuf *wps;
wps = ieee802_11_vendor_ie_concat(p, l, WPS_IE_VENDOR_TYPE);
if (wps == NULL) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_INFO, "WPS-STRICT: AP did not "
"include WPS IE in (Re)Association Response");
WPS 2.0: Validate WPS attributes in management frames and WSC messages If CONFIG_WPS_STRICT is set, validate WPS IE(s) in management frames and reject the frames if any of the mandatory attributes is missing or if an included attribute uses an invalid value. In addition, verify that all mandatory attributes are included and have valid values in the WSC messages.
2010-05-26 16:16:14 +02:00
return -1;
}
if (wps_validate_assoc_resp(wps) < 0) {
wpabuf_free(wps);
wpa_supplicant_deauthenticate(
wpa_s, WLAN_REASON_INVALID_IE);
return -1;
}
wpabuf_free(wps);
}
#endif /* CONFIG_WPS_STRICT */
FT: Clean up wpa_sm_set_ft_params() by using common parse Instead of parsing the IEs in the callers, use the already existing parser in wpa_ft.c to handle MDIE and FTIE from initial MD association response. In addition, this provides more complete access to association response IEs to FT code which will be needed to fix FT 4-way handshake message 2/4.
2010-04-10 10:36:35 +02:00
/* Go through the IEs and make a copy of the MDIE, if present. */
Add SME support (separate authentication and association) This can be used, e.g., with mac80211-based Linux drivers with nl80211. This allows over-the-air FT protocol to be used (IEEE 802.11r). Since the nl80211 interface needed for this is very recent (added today into wireless-testing.git), driver_nl80211.c has backwards compatibility code that uses WEXT for association if the kernel does not support the new commands. This compatibility code can be disabled by defining NO_WEXT_COMPAT. That code will also be removed at some point to clean up driver_nl80211.c.
2009-03-20 21:26:41 +01:00
while (p && l >= 2) {
len = p[1] + 2;
if (len > l) {
wpa_hexdump(MSG_DEBUG, "Truncated IE in assoc_info",
p, l);
break;
}
FT: Clean up wpa_sm_set_ft_params() by using common parse Instead of parsing the IEs in the callers, use the already existing parser in wpa_ft.c to handle MDIE and FTIE from initial MD association response. In addition, this provides more complete access to association response IEs to FT code which will be needed to fix FT 4-way handshake message 2/4.
2010-04-10 10:36:35 +02:00
if (p[0] == WLAN_EID_MOBILITY_DOMAIN &&
p[1] >= MOBILITY_DOMAIN_ID_LEN) {
wpa_s->sme.ft_used = 1;
os_memcpy(wpa_s->sme.mobility_domain, p + 2,
MOBILITY_DOMAIN_ID_LEN);
break;
}
Add SME support (separate authentication and association) This can be used, e.g., with mac80211-based Linux drivers with nl80211. This allows over-the-air FT protocol to be used (IEEE 802.11r). Since the nl80211 interface needed for this is very recent (added today into wireless-testing.git), driver_nl80211.c has backwards compatibility code that uses WEXT for association if the kernel does not support the new commands. This compatibility code can be disabled by defining NO_WEXT_COMPAT. That code will also be removed at some point to clean up driver_nl80211.c.
2009-03-20 21:26:41 +01:00
l -= len;
p += len;
}
FT: Clean up wpa_sm_set_ft_params() by using common parse Instead of parsing the IEs in the callers, use the already existing parser in wpa_ft.c to handle MDIE and FTIE from initial MD association response. In addition, this provides more complete access to association response IEs to FT code which will be needed to fix FT 4-way handshake message 2/4.
2010-04-10 10:36:35 +02:00
#endif /* CONFIG_SME */
Add SME support (separate authentication and association) This can be used, e.g., with mac80211-based Linux drivers with nl80211. This allows over-the-air FT protocol to be used (IEEE 802.11r). Since the nl80211 interface needed for this is very recent (added today into wireless-testing.git), driver_nl80211.c has backwards compatibility code that uses WEXT for association if the kernel does not support the new commands. This compatibility code can be disabled by defining NO_WEXT_COMPAT. That code will also be removed at some point to clean up driver_nl80211.c.
2009-03-20 21:26:41 +01:00
FT: Add support for IEEE 802.11r with driver-based SME Add NL80211_CMD_UPDATE_FT_IES to support update of FT IEs to the WLAN driver. Add NL80211_CMD_FT_EVENT to send FT event from the WLAN driver. This will carry the target AP's MAC address along with the relevant Information Elements. This event is used to report received FT IEs (MDIE, FTIE, RSN IE, TIE, RICIE). Signed-off-by: Deepthi Gowri <deepthi@codeaurora.org>
2013-03-12 19:08:53 +01:00
/* Process FT when SME is in the driver */
if (!(wpa_s->drv_flags & WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_SME) &&
wpa_ft_is_completed(wpa_s->wpa)) {
if (wpa_drv_get_bssid(wpa_s, bssid) < 0 ||
wpa_ft_validate_reassoc_resp(wpa_s->wpa,
data->assoc_info.resp_ies,
data->assoc_info.resp_ies_len,
bssid) < 0) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "FT: Validation of "
"Reassociation Response failed");
wpa_supplicant_deauthenticate(
wpa_s, WLAN_REASON_INVALID_IE);
return -1;
}
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "FT: Reassociation Response done");
}
FT: Clean up wpa_sm_set_ft_params() by using common parse Instead of parsing the IEs in the callers, use the already existing parser in wpa_ft.c to handle MDIE and FTIE from initial MD association response. In addition, this provides more complete access to association response IEs to FT code which will be needed to fix FT 4-way handshake message 2/4.
2010-04-10 10:36:35 +02:00
wpa_sm_set_ft_params(wpa_s->wpa, data->assoc_info.resp_ies,
data->assoc_info.resp_ies_len);
Add SME support (separate authentication and association) This can be used, e.g., with mac80211-based Linux drivers with nl80211. This allows over-the-air FT protocol to be used (IEEE 802.11r). Since the nl80211 interface needed for this is very recent (added today into wireless-testing.git), driver_nl80211.c has backwards compatibility code that uses WEXT for association if the kernel does not support the new commands. This compatibility code can be disabled by defining NO_WEXT_COMPAT. That code will also be removed at some point to clean up driver_nl80211.c.
2009-03-20 21:26:41 +01:00
#endif /* CONFIG_IEEE80211R */
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
/* WPA/RSN IE from Beacon/ProbeResp */
p = data->assoc_info.beacon_ies;
l = data->assoc_info.beacon_ies_len;
/* Go through the IEs and make a copy of the WPA/RSN IEs, if present.
*/
wpa_found = rsn_found = 0;
while (p && l >= 2) {
len = p[1] + 2;
if (len > l) {
wpa_hexdump(MSG_DEBUG, "Truncated IE in beacon_ies",
p, l);
break;
}
if (!wpa_found &&
p[0] == WLAN_EID_VENDOR_SPECIFIC && p[1] >= 6 &&
os_memcmp(&p[2], "\x00\x50\xF2\x01\x01\x00", 6) == 0) {
wpa_found = 1;
wpa_sm_set_ap_wpa_ie(wpa_s->wpa, p, len);
}
if (!rsn_found &&
p[0] == WLAN_EID_RSN && p[1] >= 2) {
rsn_found = 1;
wpa_sm_set_ap_rsn_ie(wpa_s->wpa, p, len);
}
l -= len;
p += len;
}
if (!wpa_found && data->assoc_info.beacon_ies)
wpa_sm_set_ap_wpa_ie(wpa_s->wpa, NULL, 0);
if (!rsn_found && data->assoc_info.beacon_ies)
wpa_sm_set_ap_rsn_ie(wpa_s->wpa, NULL, 0);
if (wpa_found || rsn_found)
wpa_s->ap_ies_from_associnfo = 1;
Add an option for driver wrappers to report operational frequency
2009-12-28 12:23:13 +01:00
Update BSS table entry if roaming event indicates frequency change This is needed to make sure the frequency in the BSS table entry remains up-to-date if the AP changes its operating frequency.
2011-05-16 18:19:30 +02:00
if (wpa_s->assoc_freq && data->assoc_info.freq &&
wpa_s->assoc_freq != data->assoc_info.freq) {
wpa_printf(MSG_DEBUG, "Operating frequency changed from "
"%u to %u MHz",
wpa_s->assoc_freq, data->assoc_info.freq);
wpa_supplicant_update_scan_results(wpa_s);
}
Add an option for driver wrappers to report operational frequency
2009-12-28 12:23:13 +01:00
wpa_s->assoc_freq = data->assoc_info.freq;
FT: Deauthenticate in case of Reassoc Response validation error If validation of the Reassociation Response frame fails during FT Protocol, do not allow association to be completed; instead, force deauthentication.
2010-04-09 15:59:27 +02:00
return 0;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
}
Fix CONFIG_NO_SCAN_PROCESSING=y build This fixes a build regression from commit cd2f4ddfb91c330c778d7464a393c5f26f07d432 by moving wpa_supplicant_assoc_update_ie() outside the no-scan-processing ifdef block. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-02-11 09:51:31 +01:00
static int wpa_supplicant_assoc_update_ie(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s)
{
const u8 *bss_wpa = NULL, *bss_rsn = NULL;
if (!wpa_s->current_bss || !wpa_s->current_ssid)
return -1;
if (!wpa_key_mgmt_wpa_any(wpa_s->current_ssid->key_mgmt))
return 0;
bss_wpa = wpa_bss_get_vendor_ie(wpa_s->current_bss,
WPA_IE_VENDOR_TYPE);
bss_rsn = wpa_bss_get_ie(wpa_s->current_bss, WLAN_EID_RSN);
if (wpa_sm_set_ap_wpa_ie(wpa_s->wpa, bss_wpa,
bss_wpa ? 2 + bss_wpa[1] : 0) ||
wpa_sm_set_ap_rsn_ie(wpa_s->wpa, bss_rsn,
bss_rsn ? 2 + bss_rsn[1] : 0))
return -1;
return 0;
}
FST: Improve parsing of Multiband IEs Previously, MB IEs were parsed only from association event. Try to get MB IEs from other management frames like Probe Response frames. The MB IEs from the association event may not be up-to-date and in some cases may actually be missing and updating the information based on other frames can improve robustness of FST exchanges. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-11-22 13:46:54 +01:00
static void wpas_fst_update_mb_assoc(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
union wpa_event_data *data)
{
#ifdef CONFIG_FST
struct assoc_info *ai = data ? &data->assoc_info : NULL;
struct wpa_bss *bss = wpa_s->current_bss;
const u8 *ieprb, *iebcn;
wpabuf_free(wpa_s->received_mb_ies);
wpa_s->received_mb_ies = NULL;
if (ai &&
!wpas_fst_update_mbie(wpa_s, ai->resp_ies, ai->resp_ies_len)) {
wpa_printf(MSG_DEBUG,
"FST: MB IEs updated from Association Response frame");
return;
}
if (ai &&
!wpas_fst_update_mbie(wpa_s, ai->beacon_ies, ai->beacon_ies_len)) {
wpa_printf(MSG_DEBUG,
"FST: MB IEs updated from association event Beacon IEs");
return;
}
if (!bss)
return;
ieprb = (const u8 *) (bss + 1);
iebcn = ieprb + bss->ie_len;
if (!wpas_fst_update_mbie(wpa_s, ieprb, bss->ie_len))
wpa_printf(MSG_DEBUG, "FST: MB IEs updated from bss IE");
else if (!wpas_fst_update_mbie(wpa_s, iebcn, bss->beacon_ie_len))
wpa_printf(MSG_DEBUG, "FST: MB IEs updated from bss beacon IE");
#endif /* CONFIG_FST */
}
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
static void wpa_supplicant_event_assoc(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
union wpa_event_data *data)
{
u8 bssid[ETH_ALEN];
Fix EAP state machine reset with offloaded roaming and authorization If the driver indicates a roamed event with already completed authorization, altAccept = TRUE could have resulted in the EAP state machine ending up in the FAILURE state from the INITIALIZE state. This is not correct behavior and similar cases were already addressed for FT and WPA-PSK. Fix the offloaded roamed+authorized (EAP/PMKSA caching) case by doing similar changes to EAPOL/EAP state variable updates during association event handling. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2016-08-10 22:51:21 +02:00
int ft_completed, already_authorized;
Update AP WPA/RSN IE on all associations if driver can select BSS It is possible for driver-based BSS selection to end up reassociating back to the current AP. If wpa_supplicant preferred another BSS, it would have updated the internal knowledge of the AP's WPA/RSN IE when requesting a new connection. In the special case of existing association and new association being with the same BSS that is different from the wpa_supplicant preference, association event processing skipped the WPA/RSN IE update. This could result in the following 4-way handshake getting rejected due to incorrectly detected mismatch with AP's RSN/WPA IE between Beacon/Probe Response frame and EAPOL-Key msg 3/4. Fix this by updating the AP WPA/RSN IE on all association events when driver-based BSS selection is used regardless of whether the BSSID changes. This could also cover a theoretical case of the AP changing its RSN/WPA IE at the very moment we try to reassociate back to the same BSS. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-09-17 12:30:42 +02:00
int new_bss = 0;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
Use generic driver event notification for AP mode assoc/disassoc
2010-01-03 17:22:22 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_AP
if (wpa_s->ap_iface) {
Check for EVENT_ASSOC data to be present for AP mode operation wpa_supplicant_event() is required to include the event data for AP mode events. In theory, a non-AP mode event could be sent here from the driver wrapper, so reject such event. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-06-07 18:15:50 +02:00
if (!data)
return;
Use generic driver event notification for AP mode assoc/disassoc
2010-01-03 17:22:22 +01:00
hostapd_notif_assoc(wpa_s->ap_iface->bss[0],
data->assoc_info.addr,
data->assoc_info.req_ies,
Indicate assoc vs. reassoc in association event This allows driver wrappers to indicate whether the association was done using Association Request/Response or with Reassociation Request/Response frames.
2010-10-25 12:50:34 +02:00
data->assoc_info.req_ies_len,
data->assoc_info.reassoc);
Use generic driver event notification for AP mode assoc/disassoc
2010-01-03 17:22:22 +01:00
return;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_AP */
Delay AP selection if all networks are temporarily disabled If all networks are temporarily disabled, delay AP selection until at least one network is enabled. Running AP selection when all networks are disabled is useless as wpa_supplicant will not try to connect. In addition, it will result in needless scan iterations that may delay the connection when it is needed. Signed-off-by: Avraham Stern <avraham.stern@intel.com>
2015-03-16 06:20:02 +01:00
eloop_cancel_timeout(wpas_network_reenabled, wpa_s, NULL);
Use generic driver event notification for AP mode assoc/disassoc
2010-01-03 17:22:22 +01:00
ft_completed = wpa_ft_is_completed(wpa_s->wpa);
FT: Deauthenticate in case of Reassoc Response validation error If validation of the Reassociation Response frame fails during FT Protocol, do not allow association to be completed; instead, force deauthentication.
2010-04-09 15:59:27 +02:00
if (data && wpa_supplicant_event_associnfo(wpa_s, data) < 0)
return;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
Do not proceed with association if get_bssid() returns failure This is the normal flow for association: wpa_supplicant <--(EVENT_ASSOC event )-- device driver wpa_supplicant --( get_bssid() )--> device driver wpa_supplicant <--( return BSSID )-- device driver However, a device driver could return EINVAL for get_bssid() because it recognizes it has already been disconnected. When the wpa_supplicant received EINVAL, the bssid field could be used uninitialized in the following flow: wpa_supplicant <--(EVENT_ASSOC event )-- device driver device driver (receive deauth) wpa_supplicant --( get_bssid() )--> device driver wpa_supplicant <--( return EINVAL )-- device driver Prevent this by requiring the get_bssid() call to succeed when processing association events.
2012-08-11 16:46:58 +02:00
if (wpa_drv_get_bssid(wpa_s, bssid) < 0) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_ERROR, "Failed to get BSSID");
Use deauthentication instead of disassociation if not associated cfg80211/mac80211 may reject disassociation command if association has not yet been formed. Use deauthentication in cases where it is possible that we are associating at the moment the command is issued. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-11-05 15:55:30 +01:00
wpa_supplicant_deauthenticate(
Do not proceed with association if get_bssid() returns failure This is the normal flow for association: wpa_supplicant <--(EVENT_ASSOC event )-- device driver wpa_supplicant --( get_bssid() )--> device driver wpa_supplicant <--( return BSSID )-- device driver However, a device driver could return EINVAL for get_bssid() because it recognizes it has already been disconnected. When the wpa_supplicant received EINVAL, the bssid field could be used uninitialized in the following flow: wpa_supplicant <--(EVENT_ASSOC event )-- device driver device driver (receive deauth) wpa_supplicant --( get_bssid() )--> device driver wpa_supplicant <--( return EINVAL )-- device driver Prevent this by requiring the get_bssid() call to succeed when processing association events.
2012-08-11 16:46:58 +02:00
wpa_s, WLAN_REASON_DEAUTH_LEAVING);
return;
}
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
wpa_supplicant_set_state(wpa_s, WPA_ASSOCIATED);
Do not proceed with association if get_bssid() returns failure This is the normal flow for association: wpa_supplicant <--(EVENT_ASSOC event )-- device driver wpa_supplicant --( get_bssid() )--> device driver wpa_supplicant <--( return BSSID )-- device driver However, a device driver could return EINVAL for get_bssid() because it recognizes it has already been disconnected. When the wpa_supplicant received EINVAL, the bssid field could be used uninitialized in the following flow: wpa_supplicant <--(EVENT_ASSOC event )-- device driver device driver (receive deauth) wpa_supplicant --( get_bssid() )--> device driver wpa_supplicant <--( return EINVAL )-- device driver Prevent this by requiring the get_bssid() call to succeed when processing association events.
2012-08-11 16:46:58 +02:00
if (os_memcmp(bssid, wpa_s->bssid, ETH_ALEN) != 0) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Associated to a new BSS: BSSID="
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
MACSTR, MAC2STR(bssid));
Update AP WPA/RSN IE on all associations if driver can select BSS It is possible for driver-based BSS selection to end up reassociating back to the current AP. If wpa_supplicant preferred another BSS, it would have updated the internal knowledge of the AP's WPA/RSN IE when requesting a new connection. In the special case of existing association and new association being with the same BSS that is different from the wpa_supplicant preference, association event processing skipped the WPA/RSN IE update. This could result in the following 4-way handshake getting rejected due to incorrectly detected mismatch with AP's RSN/WPA IE between Beacon/Probe Response frame and EAPOL-Key msg 3/4. Fix this by updating the AP WPA/RSN IE on all association events when driver-based BSS selection is used regardless of whether the BSSID changes. This could also cover a theoretical case of the AP changing its RSN/WPA IE at the very moment we try to reassociate back to the same BSS. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-09-17 12:30:42 +02:00
new_bss = 1;
Maintain internal entropy pool for augmenting random number generation By default, make hostapd and wpa_supplicant maintain an internal entropy pool that is fed with following information: hostapd: - Probe Request frames (timing, RSSI) - Association events (timing) - SNonce from Supplicants wpa_supplicant: - Scan results (timing, signal/noise) - Association events (timing) The internal pool is used to augment the random numbers generated with the OS mechanism (os_get_random()). While the internal implementation is not expected to be very strong due to limited amount of generic (non-platform specific) information to feed the pool, this may strengthen key derivation on some devices that are not configured to provide strong random numbers through os_get_random() (e.g., /dev/urandom on Linux/BSD). This new mechanism is not supposed to replace proper OS provided random number generation mechanism. The OS mechanism needs to be initialized properly (e.g., hw random number generator, maintaining entropy pool over reboots, etc.) for any of the security assumptions to hold. If the os_get_random() is known to provide strong ramdom data (e.g., on Linux/BSD, the board in question is known to have reliable source of random data from /dev/urandom), the internal hostapd random pool can be disabled. This will save some in binary size and CPU use. However, this should only be considered for builds that are known to be used on devices that meet the requirements described above. The internal pool is disabled by adding CONFIG_NO_RANDOM_POOL=y to the .config file.
2010-11-24 00:29:40 +01:00
random_add_randomness(bssid, ETH_ALEN);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
os_memcpy(wpa_s->bssid, bssid, ETH_ALEN);
os_memset(wpa_s->pending_bssid, 0, ETH_ALEN);
Remove unnecessary bssid_changed check The os_memcmp of bssid and wpa_s->bssid cannot return 0 in this code path since identical os_memcmp was already done above. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-08-11 16:54:43 +02:00
wpas_notify_bssid_changed(wpa_s);
Add wpa_supplicant notification calls This introduces a new mechanism for collecting notification calls into a single place (notify.c). As a result of this, most of the wpa_supplicant code does not need to know about dbus (etc. mechanisms that could use the notifications). Some empty placeholder functions are also added in preparation of new dbus code that needs more event notifications.
2009-09-13 19:53:32 +02:00
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
if (wpa_supplicant_dynamic_keys(wpa_s) && !ft_completed) {
wpa_clear_keys(wpa_s, bssid);
}
if (wpa_supplicant_select_config(wpa_s) < 0) {
Use deauthentication instead of disassociation if not associated cfg80211/mac80211 may reject disassociation command if association has not yet been formed. Use deauthentication in cases where it is possible that we are associating at the moment the command is issued. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-11-05 15:55:30 +01:00
wpa_supplicant_deauthenticate(
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
wpa_s, WLAN_REASON_DEAUTH_LEAVING);
return;
}
Update AP WPA/RSN IE on all associations if driver can select BSS It is possible for driver-based BSS selection to end up reassociating back to the current AP. If wpa_supplicant preferred another BSS, it would have updated the internal knowledge of the AP's WPA/RSN IE when requesting a new connection. In the special case of existing association and new association being with the same BSS that is different from the wpa_supplicant preference, association event processing skipped the WPA/RSN IE update. This could result in the following 4-way handshake getting rejected due to incorrectly detected mismatch with AP's RSN/WPA IE between Beacon/Probe Response frame and EAPOL-Key msg 3/4. Fix this by updating the AP WPA/RSN IE on all association events when driver-based BSS selection is used regardless of whether the BSSID changes. This could also cover a theoretical case of the AP changing its RSN/WPA IE at the very moment we try to reassociate back to the same BSS. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-09-17 12:30:42 +02:00
}
Update WPA/RSN IE properly for driver based BSS selection This patch fixes an issue with roaming for drivers that set WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_BSS_SELECTION (currently ath6kl). On moving to an AP with a different BSSID, an EVENT_ASSOC is received and the subsequent 4-way handshake may fail because of a mismatch between the RSN IE in message 3/4 and in Beacon/Probe Response. This happens only when the APs use different RSN IE contents and ap_scan is set to 1, since wpa_supplicant fails to update its cached IEs. Initial association may fail, too, in case of multiple APs with the same SSID, since BSSID selection is done by the driver and again a mismatch could be seen. Fix these two issues by clearing and updating the cached IEs on receiving an Association event from the driver. Also, retrieve the scan results when the new BSS information is not present locally. Signed-off-by: Sujith Manoharan <c_manoha@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-01-23 16:34:39 +01:00
Update AP WPA/RSN IE on all associations if driver can select BSS It is possible for driver-based BSS selection to end up reassociating back to the current AP. If wpa_supplicant preferred another BSS, it would have updated the internal knowledge of the AP's WPA/RSN IE when requesting a new connection. In the special case of existing association and new association being with the same BSS that is different from the wpa_supplicant preference, association event processing skipped the WPA/RSN IE update. This could result in the following 4-way handshake getting rejected due to incorrectly detected mismatch with AP's RSN/WPA IE between Beacon/Probe Response frame and EAPOL-Key msg 3/4. Fix this by updating the AP WPA/RSN IE on all association events when driver-based BSS selection is used regardless of whether the BSSID changes. This could also cover a theoretical case of the AP changing its RSN/WPA IE at the very moment we try to reassociate back to the same BSS. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-09-17 12:30:42 +02:00
if (wpa_s->conf->ap_scan == 1 &&
wpa_s->drv_flags & WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_BSS_SELECTION) {
if (wpa_supplicant_assoc_update_ie(wpa_s) < 0 && new_bss)
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_WARNING,
"WPA/RSN IEs not updated");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
}
FST: Improve parsing of Multiband IEs Previously, MB IEs were parsed only from association event. Try to get MB IEs from other management frames like Probe Response frames. The MB IEs from the association event may not be up-to-date and in some cases may actually be missing and updating the information based on other frames can improve robustness of FST exchanges. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-11-22 13:46:54 +01:00
wpas_fst_update_mb_assoc(wpa_s, data);
nl80211/SME: Use reassociation when roaming within the ESS
2009-11-17 18:25:05 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_SME
os_memcpy(wpa_s->sme.prev_bssid, bssid, ETH_ALEN);
wpa_s->sme.prev_bssid_set = 1;
Rate limit SA Query procedure initiation on unprotected disconnect There is no need to trigger new SA Query procedure to check the state of the connection immediately after having performed such a check. Limit the impact of burst of unprotected Deauth/Disassoc frames by starting a new SA Query procedure only once at least 10 seconds has passed from the previous SA Query that was triggered by reception of an unprotected disconnection. The first SA Query procedure for each association does not follow this rule to avoid issues with test cases that expect to see an SA Query every time. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-06-19 19:56:32 +02:00
wpa_s->sme.last_unprot_disconnect.sec = 0;
nl80211/SME: Use reassociation when roaming within the ESS
2009-11-17 18:25:05 +01:00
#endif /* CONFIG_SME */
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_INFO, "Associated with " MACSTR, MAC2STR(bssid));
if (wpa_s->current_ssid) {
/* When using scanning (ap_scan=1), SIM PC/SC interface can be
* initialized before association, but for other modes,
* initialize PC/SC here, if the current configuration needs
* smartcard or SIM/USIM. */
wpa_supplicant_scard_init(wpa_s, wpa_s->current_ssid);
}
wpa_sm_notify_assoc(wpa_s->wpa, bssid);
Verify that l2_packet is initialized before notification call It is possible that l2_packet is not used with wpa_supplicant in some cases, so better make sure we do not end up notifying l2_packet code about authentications unless it was actually initialized in the first place.
2010-07-18 05:26:47 +02:00
if (wpa_s->l2)
l2_packet_notify_auth_start(wpa_s->l2);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
Fix EAP state machine reset with offloaded roaming and authorization If the driver indicates a roamed event with already completed authorization, altAccept = TRUE could have resulted in the EAP state machine ending up in the FAILURE state from the INITIALIZE state. This is not correct behavior and similar cases were already addressed for FT and WPA-PSK. Fix the offloaded roamed+authorized (EAP/PMKSA caching) case by doing similar changes to EAPOL/EAP state variable updates during association event handling. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2016-08-10 22:51:21 +02:00
already_authorized = data && data->assoc_info.authorized;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
/*
* Set portEnabled first to FALSE in order to get EAP state machine out
* of the SUCCESS state and eapSuccess cleared. Without this, EAPOL PAE
* state machine may transit to AUTHENTICATING state based on obsolete
* eapSuccess and then trigger BE_AUTH to SUCCESS and PAE to
* AUTHENTICATED without ever giving chance to EAP state machine to
* reset the state.
*/
Fix EAP state machine reset with offloaded roaming and authorization If the driver indicates a roamed event with already completed authorization, altAccept = TRUE could have resulted in the EAP state machine ending up in the FAILURE state from the INITIALIZE state. This is not correct behavior and similar cases were already addressed for FT and WPA-PSK. Fix the offloaded roamed+authorized (EAP/PMKSA caching) case by doing similar changes to EAPOL/EAP state variable updates during association event handling. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2016-08-10 22:51:21 +02:00
if (!ft_completed && !already_authorized) {
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
eapol_sm_notify_portEnabled(wpa_s->eapol, FALSE);
eapol_sm_notify_portValid(wpa_s->eapol, FALSE);
}
Fix EAP state machine reset with offloaded roaming and authorization If the driver indicates a roamed event with already completed authorization, altAccept = TRUE could have resulted in the EAP state machine ending up in the FAILURE state from the INITIALIZE state. This is not correct behavior and similar cases were already addressed for FT and WPA-PSK. Fix the offloaded roamed+authorized (EAP/PMKSA caching) case by doing similar changes to EAPOL/EAP state variable updates during association event handling. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2016-08-10 22:51:21 +02:00
if (wpa_key_mgmt_wpa_psk(wpa_s->key_mgmt) || ft_completed ||
already_authorized)
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
eapol_sm_notify_eap_success(wpa_s->eapol, FALSE);
/* 802.1X::portControl = Auto */
eapol_sm_notify_portEnabled(wpa_s->eapol, TRUE);
wpa_s->eapol_received = 0;
if (wpa_s->key_mgmt == WPA_KEY_MGMT_NONE ||
IBSS RSN: Wait for connection event and do not use auth timeout Wait for connection (IBSS join completed) event before marking state completed. In addition, do not use the station mode authentication timeout since that can trigger full disconnection from IBSS when there is a timeout with just one of the peers.
2009-12-04 21:09:06 +01:00
wpa_s->key_mgmt == WPA_KEY_MGMT_WPA_NONE ||
(wpa_s->current_ssid &&
wpa_s->current_ssid->mode == IEEE80211_MODE_IBSS)) {
Check current_ssid on unexpected association event This is mainly to keep static analyzers silent since it does not look like this code path can be reached in practice due to the way association events are handled and current_ssid is either set before resched here or the association is rejected. Anyway, if this could be reached, the wpa_supplicant_set_wpa_none_key() call would end up dereferencing a NULL pointer, so add an explicit check to make sure that does not happen. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-06-07 12:32:13 +02:00
if (wpa_s->current_ssid &&
wpa_s->key_mgmt == WPA_KEY_MGMT_WPA_NONE &&
Try to set WPA-None key after IBSS-joined event cfg80211 rejects the set_key operations before the IBSS network has been fully formed, so add one more attempt to set the key for WPA-None at IBSS joined driver event. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-05-07 17:14:56 +02:00
(wpa_s->drv_flags &
WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_SET_KEYS_AFTER_ASSOC_DONE)) {
/*
* Set the key after having received joined-IBSS event
* from the driver.
*/
wpa_supplicant_set_wpa_none_key(wpa_s,
wpa_s->current_ssid);
}
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
wpa_supplicant_cancel_auth_timeout(wpa_s);
wpa_supplicant_set_state(wpa_s, WPA_COMPLETED);
} else if (!ft_completed) {
/* Timeout for receiving the first EAPOL packet */
wpa_supplicant_req_auth_timeout(wpa_s, 10, 0);
}
wpa_supplicant_cancel_scan(wpa_s);
Add SME support (separate authentication and association) This can be used, e.g., with mac80211-based Linux drivers with nl80211. This allows over-the-air FT protocol to be used (IEEE 802.11r). Since the nl80211 interface needed for this is very recent (added today into wireless-testing.git), driver_nl80211.c has backwards compatibility code that uses WEXT for association if the kernel does not support the new commands. This compatibility code can be disabled by defining NO_WEXT_COMPAT. That code will also be removed at some point to clean up driver_nl80211.c.
2009-03-20 21:26:41 +01:00
if ((wpa_s->drv_flags & WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_4WAY_HANDSHAKE) &&
Added support for using SHA256-based stronger key derivation for WPA2 IEEE 802.11w/D6.0 defines new AKMPs to indicate SHA256-based algorithms for key derivation (and AES-CMAC for EAPOL-Key MIC). Add support for using new AKMPs and clean up AKMP processing with helper functions in defs.h.
2008-08-31 21:57:28 +02:00
wpa_key_mgmt_wpa_psk(wpa_s->key_mgmt)) {
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
/*
* We are done; the driver will take care of RSN 4-way
* handshake.
*/
wpa_supplicant_cancel_auth_timeout(wpa_s);
wpa_supplicant_set_state(wpa_s, WPA_COMPLETED);
eapol_sm_notify_portValid(wpa_s->eapol, TRUE);
eapol_sm_notify_eap_success(wpa_s->eapol, TRUE);
Set portValid=TRUE on association for driver-based 4-way handshake This was previously done for WPA/WPA2-Personal as part of association processing when the driver is implementing 4-way handshake. The portValid needs to be done for WPA/WPA2-Enterprise to get the proper EAPOL authentication completed callback to configure PMK to the driver.
2011-01-31 23:04:02 +01:00
} else if ((wpa_s->drv_flags & WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_4WAY_HANDSHAKE) &&
wpa_key_mgmt_wpa_ieee8021x(wpa_s->key_mgmt)) {
/*
* The driver will take care of RSN 4-way handshake, so we need
* to allow EAPOL supplicant to complete its work without
* waiting for WPA supplicant.
*/
eapol_sm_notify_portValid(wpa_s->eapol, TRUE);
FT: Set EAPOL state machined to authenticated state with FT-EAP When FT protocol run is completed with FT-EAP, the EAPOL state machine needs to be notified of the completed authentication to make sure it does not try to start new authentication.
2011-02-20 20:57:53 +01:00
} else if (ft_completed) {
/*
* FT protocol completed - make sure EAPOL state machine ends
* up in authenticated.
*/
wpa_supplicant_cancel_auth_timeout(wpa_s);
wpa_supplicant_set_state(wpa_s, WPA_COMPLETED);
eapol_sm_notify_portValid(wpa_s->eapol, TRUE);
eapol_sm_notify_eap_success(wpa_s->eapol, TRUE);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
}
Delay processing of EAPOL frames when not associated If an EAPOL frame is received while wpa_supplicant thinks the driver is not associated, queue the frame for processing at the moment when the association event is received. This is a workaround to a race condition in receiving data frames and management events from the kernel. The pending EAPOL frame will not be processed unless an association event is received within 100 msec for the same BSSID.
2009-09-04 17:04:41 +02:00
Extend EAPOL frames processing workaround for roaming cases Commit 1ff733383f3d5c73233ef452a738765667021609 added a mechanism to work around issues due to association events and EAPOL RX events being getting reordered. However, this applied only for the case where wpa_supplicant is not in associated state. The same issue can happen in roaming case with drivers that perform BSS selection internally (or in firmware). Handle that case similarly by delaying received EAPOL frame processing if the source address of the EAPOL frame does not match the current BSSID. Since wired IEEE 802.1X do not have BSSID, make this additional workaround conditional on BSSID match having been observed during the previous association. This fixes issues where the initial EAPOL frame after reassociation was either dropped (e.g., due to replay counter not increasing) or replied to with incorrect destination address (the BSSID of the old AP). This can result in significantly more robust roaming behavior with drivers that do not use wpa_supplicant for BSS selection. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-12-21 20:35:35 +01:00
wpa_s->last_eapol_matches_bssid = 0;
Delay processing of EAPOL frames when not associated If an EAPOL frame is received while wpa_supplicant thinks the driver is not associated, queue the frame for processing at the moment when the association event is received. This is a workaround to a race condition in receiving data frames and management events from the kernel. The pending EAPOL frame will not be processed unless an association event is received within 100 msec for the same BSSID.
2009-09-04 17:04:41 +02:00
if (wpa_s->pending_eapol_rx) {
wpa_supplicant: Use monotonic time for EAPOL RX workaround The EAPOL RX workaround checks that the events are less than 100 ms apart, so only uses relative times and should use monotonic time. Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2013-12-16 21:08:33 +01:00
struct os_reltime now, age;
os_get_reltime(&now);
os_reltime_sub(&now, &wpa_s->pending_eapol_rx_time, &age);
Delay processing of EAPOL frames when not associated If an EAPOL frame is received while wpa_supplicant thinks the driver is not associated, queue the frame for processing at the moment when the association event is received. This is a workaround to a race condition in receiving data frames and management events from the kernel. The pending EAPOL frame will not be processed unless an association event is received within 100 msec for the same BSSID.
2009-09-04 17:04:41 +02:00
if (age.sec == 0 && age.usec < 100000 &&
os_memcmp(wpa_s->pending_eapol_rx_src, bssid, ETH_ALEN) ==
0) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Process pending EAPOL "
"frame that was received just before "
"association notification");
Delay processing of EAPOL frames when not associated If an EAPOL frame is received while wpa_supplicant thinks the driver is not associated, queue the frame for processing at the moment when the association event is received. This is a workaround to a race condition in receiving data frames and management events from the kernel. The pending EAPOL frame will not be processed unless an association event is received within 100 msec for the same BSSID.
2009-09-04 17:04:41 +02:00
wpa_supplicant_rx_eapol(
wpa_s, wpa_s->pending_eapol_rx_src,
wpabuf_head(wpa_s->pending_eapol_rx),
wpabuf_len(wpa_s->pending_eapol_rx));
}
wpabuf_free(wpa_s->pending_eapol_rx);
wpa_s->pending_eapol_rx = NULL;
}
Add preliminary background scan and roaming module design This allows background scanning and roaming decisions to be contained in a single place based on a defined set of notification events which will hopefully make it easier to experiment with roaming improvements. In addition, this allows multiple intra-ESS roaming policies to be used (each network configuration block can configure its own bgscan module). The beacon loss and signal strength notifications are implemented for the bgscan API, but the actual events are not yet available from the driver. The included sample bgscan module ("simple") is an example of what can be done with the new bgscan mechanism. It requests periodic background scans when the device remains associated with an ESS and has couple of notes on what a more advanced bgscan module could do to optimize background scanning and roaming. The periodic scans will cause the scan result handler to pick a better AP if one becomes available. This bgscan module can be taken into use by adding bgscan="simple" (or bgscan="simple:<bgscan interval in seconds>") into the network configuration block.
2009-09-14 23:08:24 +02:00
driver_nl80211: Fix MLME key settings for static WEP Current wpa_supplicant has a bug with WEP keys, it adds a zero-length sequence counter field to netlink which the kernel doesn't accept. Additionally, the kernel API slightly changed to accept keys only when connected, so we need to send it the keys after that. For that to work with shared key authentication, we also include the default WEP TX key in the authentication command. To upload the keys properly _after_ associating, add a new flag WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_SET_KEYS_AFTER_ASSOC_DONE indicating that the driver needs the keys at that point and not earlier.
2009-09-15 09:48:30 +02:00
if ((wpa_s->key_mgmt == WPA_KEY_MGMT_NONE ||
wpa_s->key_mgmt == WPA_KEY_MGMT_IEEE8021X_NO_WPA) &&
Use cached driver capabilities instead of new fetch for each operation There is no need to repeat the driver capability fetch for each operation since we already cache driver flags in wpa_s->drv_flags. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-05-07 16:36:40 +02:00
wpa_s->current_ssid &&
(wpa_s->drv_flags & WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_SET_KEYS_AFTER_ASSOC_DONE)) {
driver_nl80211: Fix MLME key settings for static WEP Current wpa_supplicant has a bug with WEP keys, it adds a zero-length sequence counter field to netlink which the kernel doesn't accept. Additionally, the kernel API slightly changed to accept keys only when connected, so we need to send it the keys after that. For that to work with shared key authentication, we also include the default WEP TX key in the authentication command. To upload the keys properly _after_ associating, add a new flag WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_SET_KEYS_AFTER_ASSOC_DONE indicating that the driver needs the keys at that point and not earlier.
2009-09-15 09:48:30 +02:00
/* Set static WEP keys again */
wpa_set_wep_keys(wpa_s, wpa_s->current_ssid);
}
IBSS RSN: Delay setting of the initial TX GTK The driver may get confused if we set the initial TX GTK before having fully configured and connected to an IBSS, so better delay this operation until the connection (join/start IBSS) has been completed.
2011-01-15 13:07:02 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_IBSS_RSN
if (wpa_s->current_ssid &&
wpa_s->current_ssid->mode == WPAS_MODE_IBSS &&
wpa_s->key_mgmt != WPA_KEY_MGMT_NONE &&
RSN IBSS: Restart IBSS state machines for each new IBSS Change the old design of running a single long living RSN IBSS instance to keep a separate instance for each IBSS connection. This fixes number of issues in getting keys set properly for new connections and is in general quite a bit more correct design.
2011-03-23 20:15:46 +01:00
wpa_s->key_mgmt != WPA_KEY_MGMT_WPA_NONE &&
wpa_s->ibss_rsn == NULL) {
Add group_rekey parameter for IBSS The new network profile parameter group_rekey can now be used to specify the group rekeying internal in seconds for IBSS. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2016-08-13 15:22:53 +02:00
wpa_s->ibss_rsn = ibss_rsn_init(wpa_s, wpa_s->current_ssid);
RSN IBSS: Restart IBSS state machines for each new IBSS Change the old design of running a single long living RSN IBSS instance to keep a separate instance for each IBSS connection. This fixes number of issues in getting keys set properly for new connections and is in general quite a bit more correct design.
2011-03-23 20:15:46 +01:00
if (!wpa_s->ibss_rsn) {
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_INFO, "Failed to init IBSS RSN");
wpa_supplicant_deauthenticate(
wpa_s, WLAN_REASON_DEAUTH_LEAVING);
return;
}
ibss_rsn_set_psk(wpa_s->ibss_rsn, wpa_s->current_ssid->psk);
}
IBSS RSN: Delay setting of the initial TX GTK The driver may get confused if we set the initial TX GTK before having fully configured and connected to an IBSS, so better delay this operation until the connection (join/start IBSS) has been completed.
2011-01-15 13:07:02 +01:00
#endif /* CONFIG_IBSS_RSN */
WPS: Maintain more AP state during WPS PIN iteration Maintain state of WPS APs during iteration to find the correct AP for WPS PIN operation when no specific BSSID is specified. This information can be used for optimizing the order in which the APs are tried. This commit is only adding the collection of the information and more detailed debug information to make debug logs more helpful in figuring out how the AP selection order could be improved. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-08-27 12:48:11 +02:00
wpas_wps_notify_assoc(wpa_s, bssid);
WMM AC: Parse WMM IE on association Initialize WMM AC data structures upon successful association with an AP that publishes WMM support, and deinitialize the data structure when the association is no longer valid. Signed-off-by: Moshe Benji <moshe.benji@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
2014-10-22 14:03:54 +02:00
if (data) {
wmm_ac_notify_assoc(wpa_s, data->assoc_info.resp_ies,
data->assoc_info.resp_ies_len,
&data->assoc_info.wmm_params);
WMM AC: Reconfigure tspecs on reassociation to the same BSS The specification requires the tspecs to be kept upon reassociation to the same BSS. Save the last tspecs before such reassociation, and reconfigure on the association notification. Note that the current flow is not transparent to the user (it is notified about deauth/reassoc and tspec removal/addition). Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
2014-12-29 03:15:01 +01:00
if (wpa_s->reassoc_same_bss)
wmm_ac_restore_tspecs(wpa_s);
WMM AC: Parse WMM IE on association Initialize WMM AC data structures upon successful association with an AP that publishes WMM support, and deinitialize the data structure when the association is no longer valid. Signed-off-by: Moshe Benji <moshe.benji@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
2014-10-22 14:03:54 +02:00
}
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
}
Try to reconnect to the same BSS on recoverable disconnection If the AP disconnects us with a reason code that indicates that it has dropped the association, but could allow us to connect again, try to reconnect to the same BSS without going through the full scan. This can save quite a bit of time in some common use cases, e.g., when inactivity timeout is used on the AP (and especially, when waking up from suspend which has likely triggered some timeout on the AP). Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-12-04 20:57:14 +01:00
static int disconnect_reason_recoverable(u16 reason_code)
{
return reason_code == WLAN_REASON_DISASSOC_DUE_TO_INACTIVITY ||
reason_code == WLAN_REASON_CLASS2_FRAME_FROM_NONAUTH_STA ||
reason_code == WLAN_REASON_CLASS3_FRAME_FROM_NONASSOC_STA;
}
Add BSSID and reason code (if available) to disconnect event This adds more details into the CTRL-EVENT-DISCONNECTED event to make it easier to figure out which network was disconnected in some race conditions and to what could have been the reason for disconnection. The reason code is currently only available with the nl80211 driver wrapper.
2010-04-11 20:25:15 +02:00
static void wpa_supplicant_event_disassoc(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
Do not trigger fast reconnection on locally generated deauth/disassoc The deauthentication and disassociation events from nl80211 were being processed identically regardless of whether the frame was generated by the local STA or the AP. This resulted in fast reconnection mechanism getting triggered even in the case where the disconnection was detected locally (e.g., due to beacon loss) while this was supposed to happen only in the case where the AP is sending an explicit Deauthentication or Disassociation frame with a specific reason code. Fix this by adding a new deauth/disassoc event variable to indicate whether the event was generated locally. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-01-01 17:53:12 +01:00
u16 reason_code,
int locally_generated)
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
{
const u8 *bssid;
Fix disconnection event processing Commit 0d30cc240fa36905b034dc9676f9d8da0ac18e56 forced wpa_s->current_ssid and wpa_s->key_mgmt to be cleared in wpa_supplicant_mark_disassoc() which gets called from wpa_supplicant_event_disassoc(). This broke IEEE 802.1X authentication failure processing and P2P deauthentication notification (group termination). Fix this by splitting wpa_supplicant_event_disassoc() into two parts and make wpas_p2p_deauth_notif() indicate whether the interface was removed. If so, the last part of disassocition event processing is skipped. Since the wpa_supplicant_mark_disassoc() call is in the second part, the above mentioned issues are resolved. In addition, this cleans up the P2P group interface removal case by not trying to use fast reconnection mechanism just before the interface gets removed. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-08-31 21:04:41 +02:00
if (wpa_s->key_mgmt == WPA_KEY_MGMT_WPA_NONE) {
/*
* At least Host AP driver and a Prism3 card seemed to be
* generating streams of disconnected events when configuring
* IBSS for WPA-None. Ignore them for now.
*/
return;
}
bssid = wpa_s->bssid;
if (is_zero_ether_addr(bssid))
bssid = wpa_s->pending_bssid;
if (!is_zero_ether_addr(bssid) ||
wpa_s->wpa_state >= WPA_AUTHENTICATING) {
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_INFO, WPA_EVENT_DISCONNECTED "bssid=" MACSTR
" reason=%d%s",
MAC2STR(bssid), reason_code,
locally_generated ? " locally_generated=1" : "");
}
}
Filter out unlikely "pre-shared key may be incorrect" messages Add a function to filter out known cases of disconnection during 4-way handshake that are caused by something else than mismatch in PSK. This commit adds the case where the local end determines a mismatch in WPA/RSN element between Beacon/Probe Response frames and EAPOL-Key msg 3/4. This can avoid some potentially confusing "WPA: 4-Way Handshake failed - pre-shared key may be incorrect" ctrl_iface messages. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-10-08 16:49:54 +02:00
static int could_be_psk_mismatch(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s, u16 reason_code,
int locally_generated)
{
if (wpa_s->wpa_state != WPA_4WAY_HANDSHAKE ||
!wpa_key_mgmt_wpa_psk(wpa_s->key_mgmt))
return 0; /* Not in 4-way handshake with PSK */
/*
* It looks like connection was lost while trying to go through PSK
* 4-way handshake. Filter out known disconnection cases that are caused
* by something else than PSK mismatch to avoid confusing reports.
*/
if (locally_generated) {
if (reason_code == WLAN_REASON_IE_IN_4WAY_DIFFERS)
return 0;
}
return 1;
}
Fix disconnection event processing Commit 0d30cc240fa36905b034dc9676f9d8da0ac18e56 forced wpa_s->current_ssid and wpa_s->key_mgmt to be cleared in wpa_supplicant_mark_disassoc() which gets called from wpa_supplicant_event_disassoc(). This broke IEEE 802.1X authentication failure processing and P2P deauthentication notification (group termination). Fix this by splitting wpa_supplicant_event_disassoc() into two parts and make wpas_p2p_deauth_notif() indicate whether the interface was removed. If so, the last part of disassocition event processing is skipped. Since the wpa_supplicant_mark_disassoc() call is in the second part, the above mentioned issues are resolved. In addition, this cleans up the P2P group interface removal case by not trying to use fast reconnection mechanism just before the interface gets removed. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-08-31 21:04:41 +02:00
static void wpa_supplicant_event_disassoc_finish(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
u16 reason_code,
int locally_generated)
{
const u8 *bssid;
nl80211: Work around mac80211 limitation on (re)auth when authenticated mac80211 does not currently allow (re)authentication when we are already authenticated. In order to work around this, force deauthentication if nl80211 authentication command fails with EALREADY. Unfortunately, the workaround code in driver_nl80211.c alone is not enough since the following disconnection event would clear wpa_supplicant authentication state. To handle this, add some code to restore authentication state when using userspace SME. This workaround will hopefully become unnecessary in some point should mac80211 start accepting new authentication requests even when in authenticated state.
2009-10-12 08:39:55 +02:00
int authenticating;
u8 prev_pending_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
Try to reconnect to the same BSS on recoverable disconnection If the AP disconnects us with a reason code that indicates that it has dropped the association, but could allow us to connect again, try to reconnect to the same BSS without going through the full scan. This can save quite a bit of time in some common use cases, e.g., when inactivity timeout is used on the AP (and especially, when waking up from suspend which has likely triggered some timeout on the AP). Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-12-04 20:57:14 +01:00
struct wpa_bss *fast_reconnect = NULL;
struct wpa_ssid *fast_reconnect_ssid = NULL;
SME: Fix disconnec-while-authenticating Commit 0d30cc240fa36905b034dc9676f9d8da0ac18e56 forced wpa_s->current_ssid to be cleared in wpa_supplicant_mark_disassoc() which gets called from wpa_supplicant_event_disassoc(). This broke SME disassoc-while-authenticating workaround for cfg80211. Fix this by restoring wpa_s->current_ssid in case SME authentication is in progress. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-01 16:20:27 +02:00
struct wpa_ssid *last_ssid;
nl80211: Work around mac80211 limitation on (re)auth when authenticated mac80211 does not currently allow (re)authentication when we are already authenticated. In order to work around this, force deauthentication if nl80211 authentication command fails with EALREADY. Unfortunately, the workaround code in driver_nl80211.c alone is not enough since the following disconnection event would clear wpa_supplicant authentication state. To handle this, add some code to restore authentication state when using userspace SME. This workaround will hopefully become unnecessary in some point should mac80211 start accepting new authentication requests even when in authenticated state.
2009-10-12 08:39:55 +02:00
authenticating = wpa_s->wpa_state == WPA_AUTHENTICATING;
os_memcpy(prev_pending_bssid, wpa_s->pending_bssid, ETH_ALEN);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
if (wpa_s->key_mgmt == WPA_KEY_MGMT_WPA_NONE) {
/*
* At least Host AP driver and a Prism3 card seemed to be
* generating streams of disconnected events when configuring
* IBSS for WPA-None. Ignore them for now.
*/
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Disconnect event - ignore in "
"IBSS/WPA-None mode");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
return;
}
Filter out unlikely "pre-shared key may be incorrect" messages Add a function to filter out known cases of disconnection during 4-way handshake that are caused by something else than mismatch in PSK. This commit adds the case where the local end determines a mismatch in WPA/RSN element between Beacon/Probe Response frames and EAPOL-Key msg 3/4. This can avoid some potentially confusing "WPA: 4-Way Handshake failed - pre-shared key may be incorrect" ctrl_iface messages. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-10-08 16:49:54 +02:00
if (could_be_psk_mismatch(wpa_s, reason_code, locally_generated)) {
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_INFO, "WPA: 4-Way Handshake failed - "
"pre-shared key may be incorrect");
P2P: Add event messages for possible PSK failures on P2P groups It is possible for the GO of a persistent group to change the PSK or remove a client when per-client PSKs are used and this can happen without the SSID changing (i.e., the group is still valid, but just not for a specific client). If the client side of such persistent group ends up trying to use an invalidated persistent group information, the connection will fail in 4-way handshake. A new WPS provisioning step is needed to recover from this. Detect this type of case based on two 4-way handshake failures when acting as a P2P client in a persistent group. A new "P2P-PERSISTENT-PSK-FAIL id=<persistent group id>" event is used to indicate when this happens. This makes it easier for upper layers to remove the persistent group information with "REMOVE_NETWORK <persistent group id>" if desired (e.g., based on user confirmation). In addition to indicating the error cases for persistent groups, all this type of PSK failures end up in the client removing the group with the new reason=PSK_FAILURE information in the P2P-GROUP-REMOVED event. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-09-01 20:28:16 +02:00
if (wpas_p2p_4way_hs_failed(wpa_s) > 0)
return; /* P2P group removed */
Send authentication failure reason in wpas_auth_failed() "WRONG_KEY" - possibly wrong psk "AUTH_FAILED" - authentication failure "CONN_FAILED" - continiuos connection failure Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2014-05-16 00:55:21 +02:00
wpas_auth_failed(wpa_s, "WRONG_KEY");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
}
Do not try auto connect mechanism in disconnected state This cleans up debug log by not requesting the auto connect on dissassociation event if we are already in disconnected state and would not try to connect anyway. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-05-12 18:15:33 +02:00
if (!wpa_s->disconnected &&
(!wpa_s->auto_reconnect_disabled ||
WPS: Fix WPS-in-search check when STA_AUTOCONNECT is disabled If "STA_AUTOCONNECT 0" has been used to disable automatic connection on disconnection event and the driver indicates multiple disconnection events for the disconnection from the current AP when WPS is started, it could have been possible to hit a case where wpa_s->disconnected was set to 1 during WPS processing and the following scan result processing would stop the operation. wpa_s->key_mgmt == WPA_KEY_MGMT_WPS check was trying to avoid to skip autoconnect when WPS was in use, but that does not seem to work anymore. Fix this by checking through wpas_wps_searching() as well to avoid setting wpa_s->disconnect = 1 when there is an ongoing WPS operation. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-09-27 21:41:28 +02:00
wpa_s->key_mgmt == WPA_KEY_MGMT_WPS ||
WPS: Reconnect for a failed data connection when STA_AUTOCONNECT is 0 If "STA_AUTOCONNECT 0" has been used to disable automatic connection on disconnection event and the driver indicates a failure for the data connection after successful WPS handshake, it is possible to hit a case where wpa_s->disconnected is set to 1 and further attempts to connect shall stop. While "STA_AUTOCONNECT 0" is used to disable automatic reconnection attempts in general, this specific WPS case can benefit from trying again even with that configuration for a short period of time. Extend the wpa_supplicant re-enable-networks-after-WPS 10 second timeout to apply for ignoring disabled STA_AUTOCONNECT immediately after a WPS provisioning step. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-11-16 16:02:56 +01:00
wpas_wps_searching(wpa_s) ||
wpas_wps_reenable_networks_pending(wpa_s))) {
Try to reconnect to the same BSS on recoverable disconnection If the AP disconnects us with a reason code that indicates that it has dropped the association, but could allow us to connect again, try to reconnect to the same BSS without going through the full scan. This can save quite a bit of time in some common use cases, e.g., when inactivity timeout is used on the AP (and especially, when waking up from suspend which has likely triggered some timeout on the AP). Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-12-04 20:57:14 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Auto connect enabled: try to "
WPS: Fix WPS-in-search check when STA_AUTOCONNECT is disabled If "STA_AUTOCONNECT 0" has been used to disable automatic connection on disconnection event and the driver indicates multiple disconnection events for the disconnection from the current AP when WPS is started, it could have been possible to hit a case where wpa_s->disconnected was set to 1 during WPS processing and the following scan result processing would stop the operation. wpa_s->key_mgmt == WPA_KEY_MGMT_WPS check was trying to avoid to skip autoconnect when WPS was in use, but that does not seem to work anymore. Fix this by checking through wpas_wps_searching() as well to avoid setting wpa_s->disconnect = 1 when there is an ongoing WPS operation. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-09-27 21:41:28 +02:00
"reconnect (wps=%d/%d wpa_state=%d)",
Make reconnect-on-disassoc debug prints somewhat more helpful Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2011-12-01 17:22:10 +01:00
wpa_s->key_mgmt == WPA_KEY_MGMT_WPS,
WPS: Fix WPS-in-search check when STA_AUTOCONNECT is disabled If "STA_AUTOCONNECT 0" has been used to disable automatic connection on disconnection event and the driver indicates multiple disconnection events for the disconnection from the current AP when WPS is started, it could have been possible to hit a case where wpa_s->disconnected was set to 1 during WPS processing and the following scan result processing would stop the operation. wpa_s->key_mgmt == WPA_KEY_MGMT_WPS check was trying to avoid to skip autoconnect when WPS was in use, but that does not seem to work anymore. Fix this by checking through wpas_wps_searching() as well to avoid setting wpa_s->disconnect = 1 when there is an ongoing WPS operation. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-09-27 21:41:28 +02:00
wpas_wps_searching(wpa_s),
Make reconnect-on-disassoc debug prints somewhat more helpful Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2011-12-01 17:22:10 +01:00
wpa_s->wpa_state);
Try to reconnect to the same BSS on recoverable disconnection If the AP disconnects us with a reason code that indicates that it has dropped the association, but could allow us to connect again, try to reconnect to the same BSS without going through the full scan. This can save quite a bit of time in some common use cases, e.g., when inactivity timeout is used on the AP (and especially, when waking up from suspend which has likely triggered some timeout on the AP). Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-12-04 20:57:14 +01:00
if (wpa_s->wpa_state == WPA_COMPLETED &&
wpa_s->current_ssid &&
wpa_s->current_ssid->mode == WPAS_MODE_INFRA &&
Do not trigger fast reconnection on locally generated deauth/disassoc The deauthentication and disassociation events from nl80211 were being processed identically regardless of whether the frame was generated by the local STA or the AP. This resulted in fast reconnection mechanism getting triggered even in the case where the disconnection was detected locally (e.g., due to beacon loss) while this was supposed to happen only in the case where the AP is sending an explicit Deauthentication or Disassociation frame with a specific reason code. Fix this by adding a new deauth/disassoc event variable to indicate whether the event was generated locally. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-01-01 17:53:12 +01:00
!locally_generated &&
Try to reconnect to the same BSS on recoverable disconnection If the AP disconnects us with a reason code that indicates that it has dropped the association, but could allow us to connect again, try to reconnect to the same BSS without going through the full scan. This can save quite a bit of time in some common use cases, e.g., when inactivity timeout is used on the AP (and especially, when waking up from suspend which has likely triggered some timeout on the AP). Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-12-04 20:57:14 +01:00
disconnect_reason_recoverable(reason_code)) {
/*
* It looks like the AP has dropped association with
* us, but could allow us to get back in. Try to
* reconnect to the same BSS without full scan to save
* time for some common cases.
*/
fast_reconnect = wpa_s->current_bss;
fast_reconnect_ssid = wpa_s->current_ssid;
} else if (wpa_s->wpa_state >= WPA_ASSOCIATING)
Add option for disabling automatic reconnection on disconnection ctrl_interface STA_AUTOCONNECT command can now be used to disable automatic reconnection on receiving disconnection event. The default behavior is for wpa_supplicant to try to reconnect automatically, i.e., to maintain previous behavior.
2010-09-06 16:28:45 +02:00
wpa_supplicant_req_scan(wpa_s, 0, 100000);
Make reconnect-on-disassoc debug prints somewhat more helpful Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2011-12-01 17:22:10 +01:00
else
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Do not request new "
"immediate scan");
Add option for disabling automatic reconnection on disconnection ctrl_interface STA_AUTOCONNECT command can now be used to disable automatic reconnection on receiving disconnection event. The default behavior is for wpa_supplicant to try to reconnect automatically, i.e., to maintain previous behavior.
2010-09-06 16:28:45 +02:00
} else {
Try to reconnect to the same BSS on recoverable disconnection If the AP disconnects us with a reason code that indicates that it has dropped the association, but could allow us to connect again, try to reconnect to the same BSS without going through the full scan. This can save quite a bit of time in some common use cases, e.g., when inactivity timeout is used on the AP (and especially, when waking up from suspend which has likely triggered some timeout on the AP). Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-12-04 20:57:14 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Auto connect disabled: do not "
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
"try to re-connect");
Add option for disabling automatic reconnection on disconnection ctrl_interface STA_AUTOCONNECT command can now be used to disable automatic reconnection on receiving disconnection event. The default behavior is for wpa_supplicant to try to reconnect automatically, i.e., to maintain previous behavior.
2010-09-06 16:28:45 +02:00
wpa_s->reassociate = 0;
wpa_s->disconnected = 1;
Do not stop ongoing PNO sched_scan on association/disconnection PNO was stopped by the wpa_supplicant during the connection attempts or while handling disassociation indication. External entities, mainly, the Android Wi-Fi framework, does not expects PNO to be stopped by other modules. Hence, do not stop the sched_scan in these scenarios if it is triggered externally for PNO. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-06-30 09:11:27 +02:00
if (!wpa_s->pno)
wpa_supplicant_cancel_sched_scan(wpa_s);
Add option for disabling automatic reconnection on disconnection ctrl_interface STA_AUTOCONNECT command can now be used to disable automatic reconnection on receiving disconnection event. The default behavior is for wpa_supplicant to try to reconnect automatically, i.e., to maintain previous behavior.
2010-09-06 16:28:45 +02:00
}
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
bssid = wpa_s->bssid;
Introduced new helper function is_zero_ether_addr() Use this inline function to replace os_memcmp(addr, "\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00", ETH_ALEN) == 0.
2008-06-03 17:08:48 +02:00
if (is_zero_ether_addr(bssid))
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
bssid = wpa_s->pending_bssid;
Call wpas_connection_failed() only if actually trying to connect A disconnection event from the driver may end up getting delivered at a time when wpa_supplicant is not even trying to connect (e.g., during a scan that was already started after WPS provisioning step). In such a case, there is not much point calling wpas_connection_failed() and skipping this avoids confusing attempts of re-starting scanning while the previous scan is still in progress. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2011-12-01 17:22:56 +01:00
if (wpa_s->wpa_state >= WPA_AUTHENTICATING)
wpas_connection_failed(wpa_s, bssid);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
wpa_sm_notify_disassoc(wpa_s->wpa);
Export disconnect reason code to dbus In the properties changed signal, added a new property "DisconnectReason", which carries the IEEE 802.11 reason code of the most recent disassociation or deauthentication event. The reason code is negative if it is locally generated. The property is sent to the DBUS immediately so as to prevent it from being coalesced with other disconnect events. Signed-off-by: Gary Morain <gmorain@chromium.org>
2012-06-30 15:43:50 +02:00
if (locally_generated)
wpa_s->disconnect_reason = -reason_code;
else
wpa_s->disconnect_reason = reason_code;
wpas_notify_disconnect_reason(wpa_s);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
if (wpa_supplicant_dynamic_keys(wpa_s)) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Disconnect event - remove keys");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
wpa_clear_keys(wpa_s, wpa_s->bssid);
}
SME: Fix disconnec-while-authenticating Commit 0d30cc240fa36905b034dc9676f9d8da0ac18e56 forced wpa_s->current_ssid to be cleared in wpa_supplicant_mark_disassoc() which gets called from wpa_supplicant_event_disassoc(). This broke SME disassoc-while-authenticating workaround for cfg80211. Fix this by restoring wpa_s->current_ssid in case SME authentication is in progress. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-01 16:20:27 +02:00
last_ssid = wpa_s->current_ssid;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
wpa_supplicant_mark_disassoc(wpa_s);
SME: Add timers for authentication and asscoiation mac80211 authentication or association operation may get stuck for some reasons, so wpa_supplicant better use an internal timer to recover from this. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-02-24 15:59:46 +01:00
SME: Fix disconnec-while-authenticating Commit 0d30cc240fa36905b034dc9676f9d8da0ac18e56 forced wpa_s->current_ssid to be cleared in wpa_supplicant_mark_disassoc() which gets called from wpa_supplicant_event_disassoc(). This broke SME disassoc-while-authenticating workaround for cfg80211. Fix this by restoring wpa_s->current_ssid in case SME authentication is in progress. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-01 16:20:27 +02:00
if (authenticating && (wpa_s->drv_flags & WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_SME)) {
SME: Add timers for authentication and asscoiation mac80211 authentication or association operation may get stuck for some reasons, so wpa_supplicant better use an internal timer to recover from this. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-02-24 15:59:46 +01:00
sme_disassoc_while_authenticating(wpa_s, prev_pending_bssid);
SME: Fix disconnec-while-authenticating Commit 0d30cc240fa36905b034dc9676f9d8da0ac18e56 forced wpa_s->current_ssid to be cleared in wpa_supplicant_mark_disassoc() which gets called from wpa_supplicant_event_disassoc(). This broke SME disassoc-while-authenticating workaround for cfg80211. Fix this by restoring wpa_s->current_ssid in case SME authentication is in progress. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-09-01 16:20:27 +02:00
wpa_s->current_ssid = last_ssid;
}
Try to reconnect to the same BSS on recoverable disconnection If the AP disconnects us with a reason code that indicates that it has dropped the association, but could allow us to connect again, try to reconnect to the same BSS without going through the full scan. This can save quite a bit of time in some common use cases, e.g., when inactivity timeout is used on the AP (and especially, when waking up from suspend which has likely triggered some timeout on the AP). Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-12-04 20:57:14 +01:00
Only try fast reconnect if network is not disabled Previously, it would have been possible for the network to be marked disabled and that marking to be ignored if a recoverable disconnection reason event were processed. Avoid this by verifying network status before trying to reconenct back to the same BSS. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-02-18 11:07:06 +01:00
if (fast_reconnect &&
!wpas_network_disabled(wpa_s, fast_reconnect_ssid) &&
!disallowed_bssid(wpa_s, fast_reconnect->bssid) &&
!disallowed_ssid(wpa_s, fast_reconnect->ssid,
fast_reconnect->ssid_len) &&
MBO: Parse MBO IE in BSS Transition Management Request frames Add parsing of MBO IE in BSS Transition Management Request frames. If the MBO IE includes the association retry delay attribute, do not try to reconnect to the current BSS until the delay time is over. If the MBO IE includes the cellular data connection preference attribute or the transition rejection reason attribute, send a message to upper layers with the data. Signed-off-by: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Avraham Stern <avraham.stern@intel.com>
2016-02-15 15:53:36 +01:00
!wpas_temp_disabled(wpa_s, fast_reconnect_ssid) &&
!wpa_is_bss_tmp_disallowed(wpa_s, fast_reconnect->bssid)) {
Fix compiler warning with CONFIG_NO_SCAN_PROCESSING=y Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-12-11 17:14:09 +01:00
#ifndef CONFIG_NO_SCAN_PROCESSING
Try to reconnect to the same BSS on recoverable disconnection If the AP disconnects us with a reason code that indicates that it has dropped the association, but could allow us to connect again, try to reconnect to the same BSS without going through the full scan. This can save quite a bit of time in some common use cases, e.g., when inactivity timeout is used on the AP (and especially, when waking up from suspend which has likely triggered some timeout on the AP). Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-12-04 20:57:14 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Try to reconnect to the same BSS");
if (wpa_supplicant_connect(wpa_s, fast_reconnect,
fast_reconnect_ssid) < 0) {
/* Recover through full scan */
wpa_supplicant_req_scan(wpa_s, 0, 100000);
}
Fix compiler warning with CONFIG_NO_SCAN_PROCESSING=y Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-12-11 17:14:09 +01:00
#endif /* CONFIG_NO_SCAN_PROCESSING */
Only try fast reconnect if network is not disabled Previously, it would have been possible for the network to be marked disabled and that marking to be ignored if a recoverable disconnection reason event were processed. Avoid this by verifying network status before trying to reconenct back to the same BSS. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-02-18 11:07:06 +01:00
} else if (fast_reconnect) {
/*
* Could not reconnect to the same BSS due to network being
* disabled. Use a new scan to match the alternative behavior
* above, i.e., to continue automatic reconnection attempt in a
* way that enforces disabled network rules.
*/
wpa_supplicant_req_scan(wpa_s, 0, 100000);
Try to reconnect to the same BSS on recoverable disconnection If the AP disconnects us with a reason code that indicates that it has dropped the association, but could allow us to connect again, try to reconnect to the same BSS without going through the full scan. This can save quite a bit of time in some common use cases, e.g., when inactivity timeout is used on the AP (and especially, when waking up from suspend which has likely triggered some timeout on the AP). Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-12-04 20:57:14 +01:00
}
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
}
Added an optional mitigation mechanism for certain attacks against TKIP by delaying Michael MIC error reports by a random amount of time between 0 and 60 seconds if multiple Michael MIC failures are detected with the same PTK (i.e., the Authenticator does not rekey PTK on first failure report). This is disabled by default and can be enabled with a build option CONFIG_DELAYED_MIC_ERROR_REPORT=y in .config. This may help in making a chopchop attack take much longer time by forcing the attacker to wait 60 seconds before knowing whether a modified frame resulted in a MIC failure.
2008-11-08 03:43:12 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_DELAYED_MIC_ERROR_REPORT
Fix TKIP countermeasures stopping in deinit paths The eloop timeout to stop TKIP countermeasures has to be canceled on deinit path to avoid leaving bogus timeouts behind. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-10-30 11:43:30 +01:00
void wpa_supplicant_delayed_mic_error_report(void *eloop_ctx, void *sock_ctx)
Added an optional mitigation mechanism for certain attacks against TKIP by delaying Michael MIC error reports by a random amount of time between 0 and 60 seconds if multiple Michael MIC failures are detected with the same PTK (i.e., the Authenticator does not rekey PTK on first failure report). This is disabled by default and can be enabled with a build option CONFIG_DELAYED_MIC_ERROR_REPORT=y in .config. This may help in making a chopchop attack take much longer time by forcing the attacker to wait 60 seconds before knowing whether a modified frame resulted in a MIC failure.
2008-11-08 03:43:12 +01:00
{
struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s = eloop_ctx;
if (!wpa_s->pending_mic_error_report)
return;
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "WPA: Sending pending MIC error report");
Added an optional mitigation mechanism for certain attacks against TKIP by delaying Michael MIC error reports by a random amount of time between 0 and 60 seconds if multiple Michael MIC failures are detected with the same PTK (i.e., the Authenticator does not rekey PTK on first failure report). This is disabled by default and can be enabled with a build option CONFIG_DELAYED_MIC_ERROR_REPORT=y in .config. This may help in making a chopchop attack take much longer time by forcing the attacker to wait 60 seconds before knowing whether a modified frame resulted in a MIC failure.
2008-11-08 03:43:12 +01:00
wpa_sm_key_request(wpa_s->wpa, 1, wpa_s->pending_mic_error_pairwise);
wpa_s->pending_mic_error_report = 0;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_DELAYED_MIC_ERROR_REPORT */
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
static void
wpa_supplicant_event_michael_mic_failure(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
union wpa_event_data *data)
{
int pairwise;
wpa_supplicant: Use relative time for TKIP Michael MIC failures The MMIC failure code should use monotonic time to check whether 60 seconds have elapsed or not. For type-safety, use struct os_reltime for the timestamp variable, and also convert to using os_reltime_expired(). Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2013-12-16 21:08:42 +01:00
struct os_reltime t;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_WARNING, "Michael MIC failure detected");
pairwise = (data && data->michael_mic_failure.unicast);
wpa_supplicant: Use relative time for TKIP Michael MIC failures The MMIC failure code should use monotonic time to check whether 60 seconds have elapsed or not. For type-safety, use struct os_reltime for the timestamp variable, and also convert to using os_reltime_expired(). Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2013-12-16 21:08:42 +01:00
os_get_reltime(&t);
if ((wpa_s->last_michael_mic_error.sec &&
!os_reltime_expired(&t, &wpa_s->last_michael_mic_error, 60)) ||
Added an optional mitigation mechanism for certain attacks against TKIP by delaying Michael MIC error reports by a random amount of time between 0 and 60 seconds if multiple Michael MIC failures are detected with the same PTK (i.e., the Authenticator does not rekey PTK on first failure report). This is disabled by default and can be enabled with a build option CONFIG_DELAYED_MIC_ERROR_REPORT=y in .config. This may help in making a chopchop attack take much longer time by forcing the attacker to wait 60 seconds before knowing whether a modified frame resulted in a MIC failure.
2008-11-08 03:43:12 +01:00
wpa_s->pending_mic_error_report) {
if (wpa_s->pending_mic_error_report) {
/*
* Send the pending MIC error report immediately since
* we are going to start countermeasures and AP better
* do the same.
*/
wpa_sm_key_request(wpa_s->wpa, 1,
wpa_s->pending_mic_error_pairwise);
}
/* Send the new MIC error report immediately since we are going
* to start countermeasures and AP better do the same.
*/
wpa_sm_key_request(wpa_s->wpa, 1, pairwise);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
/* initialize countermeasures */
wpa_s->countermeasures = 1;
Add BSSID into blacklist and do not clean blacklist during countermeasures If scanning continues during TKIP countermeasures, try to avoid selecting the BSS that triggered the counter measures.
2011-12-25 20:09:17 +01:00
wpa_blacklist_add(wpa_s, wpa_s->bssid);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_WARNING, "TKIP countermeasures started");
/*
* Need to wait for completion of request frame. We do not get
* any callback for the message completion, so just wait a
* short while and hope for the best. */
os_sleep(0, 10000);
wpa_drv_set_countermeasures(wpa_s, 1);
wpa_supplicant_deauthenticate(wpa_s,
WLAN_REASON_MICHAEL_MIC_FAILURE);
eloop_cancel_timeout(wpa_supplicant_stop_countermeasures,
wpa_s, NULL);
eloop_register_timeout(60, 0,
wpa_supplicant_stop_countermeasures,
wpa_s, NULL);
/* TODO: mark the AP rejected for 60 second. STA is
* allowed to associate with another AP.. */
Added an optional mitigation mechanism for certain attacks against TKIP by delaying Michael MIC error reports by a random amount of time between 0 and 60 seconds if multiple Michael MIC failures are detected with the same PTK (i.e., the Authenticator does not rekey PTK on first failure report). This is disabled by default and can be enabled with a build option CONFIG_DELAYED_MIC_ERROR_REPORT=y in .config. This may help in making a chopchop attack take much longer time by forcing the attacker to wait 60 seconds before knowing whether a modified frame resulted in a MIC failure.
2008-11-08 03:43:12 +01:00
} else {
#ifdef CONFIG_DELAYED_MIC_ERROR_REPORT
if (wpa_s->mic_errors_seen) {
/*
* Reduce the effectiveness of Michael MIC error
* reports as a means for attacking against TKIP if
* more than one MIC failure is noticed with the same
* PTK. We delay the transmission of the reports by a
* random time between 0 and 60 seconds in order to
* force the attacker wait 60 seconds before getting
* the information on whether a frame resulted in a MIC
* failure.
*/
u8 rval[4];
int sec;
if (os_get_random(rval, sizeof(rval)) < 0)
sec = os_random() % 60;
else
sec = WPA_GET_BE32(rval) % 60;
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "WPA: Delay MIC error "
"report %d seconds", sec);
Added an optional mitigation mechanism for certain attacks against TKIP by delaying Michael MIC error reports by a random amount of time between 0 and 60 seconds if multiple Michael MIC failures are detected with the same PTK (i.e., the Authenticator does not rekey PTK on first failure report). This is disabled by default and can be enabled with a build option CONFIG_DELAYED_MIC_ERROR_REPORT=y in .config. This may help in making a chopchop attack take much longer time by forcing the attacker to wait 60 seconds before knowing whether a modified frame resulted in a MIC failure.
2008-11-08 03:43:12 +01:00
wpa_s->pending_mic_error_report = 1;
wpa_s->pending_mic_error_pairwise = pairwise;
eloop_cancel_timeout(
wpa_supplicant_delayed_mic_error_report,
wpa_s, NULL);
eloop_register_timeout(
sec, os_random() % 1000000,
wpa_supplicant_delayed_mic_error_report,
wpa_s, NULL);
} else {
wpa_sm_key_request(wpa_s->wpa, 1, pairwise);
}
#else /* CONFIG_DELAYED_MIC_ERROR_REPORT */
wpa_sm_key_request(wpa_s->wpa, 1, pairwise);
#endif /* CONFIG_DELAYED_MIC_ERROR_REPORT */
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
}
wpa_supplicant: Use relative time for TKIP Michael MIC failures The MMIC failure code should use monotonic time to check whether 60 seconds have elapsed or not. For type-safety, use struct os_reltime for the timestamp variable, and also convert to using os_reltime_expired(). Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2013-12-16 21:08:42 +01:00
wpa_s->last_michael_mic_error = t;
Added an optional mitigation mechanism for certain attacks against TKIP by delaying Michael MIC error reports by a random amount of time between 0 and 60 seconds if multiple Michael MIC failures are detected with the same PTK (i.e., the Authenticator does not rekey PTK on first failure report). This is disabled by default and can be enabled with a build option CONFIG_DELAYED_MIC_ERROR_REPORT=y in .config. This may help in making a chopchop attack take much longer time by forcing the attacker to wait 60 seconds before knowing whether a modified frame resulted in a MIC failure.
2008-11-08 03:43:12 +01:00
wpa_s->mic_errors_seen++;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
}
Add build option CONFIG_TERMINATE_ONLASTIF This makes wpa_supplicant terminate automatically if the configured interface(s) disappear.
2009-03-02 20:57:00 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_TERMINATE_ONLASTIF
static int any_interfaces(struct wpa_supplicant *head)
{
struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s;
for (wpa_s = head; wpa_s != NULL; wpa_s = wpa_s->next)
if (!wpa_s->interface_removed)
return 1;
return 0;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_TERMINATE_ONLASTIF */
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
static void
wpa_supplicant_event_interface_status(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
union wpa_event_data *data)
{
if (os_strcmp(wpa_s->ifname, data->interface_status.ifname) != 0)
return;
switch (data->interface_status.ievent) {
case EVENT_INTERFACE_ADDED:
if (!wpa_s->interface_removed)
break;
wpa_s->interface_removed = 0;
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Configured interface was added");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
if (wpa_supplicant_driver_init(wpa_s) < 0) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_INFO, "Failed to initialize the "
"driver after interface was added");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
}
P2P: Handle P2P Device dedicated interface parent removal In case of a network interface removal, check if the interface was also the parent interface of the P2P Device dedicated interface. If this is the case, then stop the P2P Device functionality, and remove the P2P Device dedicated interface. In case that the interface is added again and P2P Device functionality can be enabled again, add a new P2P Device dedicated interface and allow further P2P Device functionality. In case that the P2P Device dedicated interface is re-created, the original P2P Device configuration file is needed, so store it in the global params (instead in the wpa_interface configuration). Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
2015-06-17 15:18:20 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_P2P
if (!wpa_s->global->p2p &&
!wpa_s->global->p2p_disabled &&
!wpa_s->conf->p2p_disabled &&
(wpa_s->drv_flags &
WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_DEDICATED_P2P_DEVICE) &&
wpas_p2p_add_p2pdev_interface(
wpa_s, wpa_s->global->params.conf_p2p_dev) < 0) {
wpa_printf(MSG_INFO,
"P2P: Failed to enable P2P Device interface");
/* Try to continue without. P2P will be disabled. */
}
#endif /* CONFIG_P2P */
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
break;
case EVENT_INTERFACE_REMOVED:
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Configured interface was removed");
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
wpa_s->interface_removed = 1;
wpa_supplicant_mark_disassoc(wpa_s);
Use WPA_INTERFACE_DISABLED with interface removed events This makes WPA_INTERFACE_DISABLED more consistent in indicating that wpa_supplicant cannot currently control the interface regardless of whether the interface is disabled or completely removed. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> intended-for: hostap-1
2012-02-18 12:16:17 +01:00
wpa_supplicant_set_state(wpa_s, WPA_INTERFACE_DISABLED);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
l2_packet_deinit(wpa_s->l2);
wpa_s->l2 = NULL;
P2P: Handle P2P Device dedicated interface parent removal In case of a network interface removal, check if the interface was also the parent interface of the P2P Device dedicated interface. If this is the case, then stop the P2P Device functionality, and remove the P2P Device dedicated interface. In case that the interface is added again and P2P Device functionality can be enabled again, add a new P2P Device dedicated interface and allow further P2P Device functionality. In case that the P2P Device dedicated interface is re-created, the original P2P Device configuration file is needed, so store it in the global params (instead in the wpa_interface configuration). Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
2015-06-17 15:18:20 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_P2P
if (wpa_s->global->p2p &&
wpa_s->global->p2p_init_wpa_s->parent == wpa_s &&
(wpa_s->drv_flags &
WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_DEDICATED_P2P_DEVICE)) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
"Removing P2P Device interface");
wpa_supplicant_remove_iface(
wpa_s->global, wpa_s->global->p2p_init_wpa_s,
0);
wpa_s->global->p2p_init_wpa_s = NULL;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_P2P */
Add interface matching support with -M, guarded by CONFIG_MATCH_IFACE The new wpa_supplicant command line argument -M can be used to describe matching rules with a wildcard interface name (e.g., "wlan*"). This is very useful for systems without udev (Linux) or devd (FreeBSD). Signed-off-by: Roy Marples <roy@marples.name>
2016-03-15 14:40:14 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_MATCH_IFACE
if (wpa_s->matched) {
wpa_supplicant_remove_iface(wpa_s->global, wpa_s, 0);
break;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_MATCH_IFACE */
Add build option CONFIG_TERMINATE_ONLASTIF This makes wpa_supplicant terminate automatically if the configured interface(s) disappear.
2009-03-02 20:57:00 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_TERMINATE_ONLASTIF
/* check if last interface */
if (!any_interfaces(wpa_s->global->ifaces))
eloop_terminate();
#endif /* CONFIG_TERMINATE_ONLASTIF */
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
break;
}
}
#ifdef CONFIG_PEERKEY
static void
wpa_supplicant_event_stkstart(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
union wpa_event_data *data)
{
if (data == NULL)
return;
wpa_sm_stkstart(wpa_s->wpa, data->stkstart.peer);
}
#endif /* CONFIG_PEERKEY */
TDLS: Add initial support for TDLS (IEEE Std 802.11z-2010)
2010-10-07 09:26:56 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_TDLS
static void wpa_supplicant_event_tdls(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
union wpa_event_data *data)
{
if (data == NULL)
return;
switch (data->tdls.oper) {
case TDLS_REQUEST_SETUP:
TDLS: Remove link, if any, on an implicit set up request If an implicit TDLS set up request is obtained on an existing link or an to be established link, the previous link was not removed. This commit disables the existing link on a new set up request. Also, wpa_tdls_reneg() function was invoking wpa_tdls_start() on an already existing peer for the case of internal setup, which is incorrect. Thus the invocation of wpa_tdls_start() is removed in wpa_tdls_reneg() and also this function is renamed to wps_tdls_remove() as it does not renegotiation rather shall remove the link (if any) for the case of external setup. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-02-05 12:27:56 +01:00
wpa_tdls_remove(wpa_s->wpa, data->tdls.peer);
if (wpa_tdls_is_external_setup(wpa_s->wpa))
wpa_tdls_start(wpa_s->wpa, data->tdls.peer);
else
wpa_drv_tdls_oper(wpa_s, TDLS_SETUP, data->tdls.peer);
TDLS: Add initial support for TDLS (IEEE Std 802.11z-2010)
2010-10-07 09:26:56 +02:00
break;
case TDLS_REQUEST_TEARDOWN:
TDLS: Clean up wpa_tdls_teardown_link() uses Making this function be used only for external setup case simplifies the implementation and makes core wpa_supplicant calls in ctrl_iface.c and events.c consistent. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-09-30 16:10:18 +02:00
if (wpa_tdls_is_external_setup(wpa_s->wpa))
wpa_tdls_teardown_link(wpa_s->wpa, data->tdls.peer,
data->tdls.reason_code);
else
wpa_drv_tdls_oper(wpa_s, TDLS_TEARDOWN,
data->tdls.peer);
TDLS: Add initial support for TDLS (IEEE Std 802.11z-2010)
2010-10-07 09:26:56 +02:00
break;
TDLS: Allow driver to request TDLS Discovery Request initiation This extends the TDLS operation request mechanism to allow TDLS Discovery Request to be initiated by the driver similarly to the existing Setup and Teardown requests. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-03-06 15:47:29 +01:00
case TDLS_REQUEST_DISCOVER:
wpa_tdls_send_discovery_request(wpa_s->wpa,
data->tdls.peer);
break;
TDLS: Add initial support for TDLS (IEEE Std 802.11z-2010)
2010-10-07 09:26:56 +02:00
}
}
#endif /* CONFIG_TDLS */
WNM: Use CONFIG_WNM more consistently Replace CONFIG_IEEE80211V with CONFIG_WNM to get more consistent build options for WNM-Sleep Mode operations. Previously it was possible to define CONFIG_IEEE80211V without CONFIG_WNM which would break the build. In addition, IEEE 802.11v has been merged into IEEE Std 802.11-2012 and WNM is a better term to use for this new functionality anyway. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-12-16 17:22:54 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_WNM
WNM: Add WNM-Sleep Mode for station mode Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-02-26 16:27:19 +01:00
static void wpa_supplicant_event_wnm(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
union wpa_event_data *data)
{
if (data == NULL)
return;
switch (data->wnm.oper) {
case WNM_OPER_SLEEP:
wpa_printf(MSG_DEBUG, "Start sending WNM-Sleep Request "
"(action=%d, intval=%d)",
data->wnm.sleep_action, data->wnm.sleep_intval);
ieee802_11_send_wnmsleep_req(wpa_s, data->wnm.sleep_action,
WNM: Add option for passing TFS request from external programs The optional tfs_req=<hex dump> parameter can be added for the wnm_sleep command to specify the TFS request element to use in the WNM-Sleep Mode Request frame. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-12-16 11:31:16 +01:00
data->wnm.sleep_intval, NULL);
WNM: Add WNM-Sleep Mode for station mode Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-02-26 16:27:19 +01:00
break;
}
}
WNM: Use CONFIG_WNM more consistently Replace CONFIG_IEEE80211V with CONFIG_WNM to get more consistent build options for WNM-Sleep Mode operations. Previously it was possible to define CONFIG_IEEE80211V without CONFIG_WNM which would break the build. In addition, IEEE 802.11v has been merged into IEEE Std 802.11-2012 and WNM is a better term to use for this new functionality anyway. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-12-16 17:22:54 +01:00
#endif /* CONFIG_WNM */
WNM: Add WNM-Sleep Mode for station mode Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-02-26 16:27:19 +01:00
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_IEEE80211R
static void
wpa_supplicant_event_ft_response(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
union wpa_event_data *data)
{
if (data == NULL)
return;
if (wpa_ft_process_response(wpa_s->wpa, data->ft_ies.ies,
data->ft_ies.ies_len,
data->ft_ies.ft_action,
FT: Add RIC Request generation and validation (but not processing) This adds first part of FT resource request as part of Reassocition Request frame (i.e., FT Protocol, not FT Resource Request Protocol). wpa_supplicant can generate a test resource request when driver_test.c is used with internal MLME code and hostapd can verify the FTIE MIC properly with the included RIC Request. The actual RIC Request IEs are not processed yet and hostapd does not yet reply with RIC Response (nor would wpa_supplicant be able to validate the FTIE MIC for a frame with RIC Response).
2009-03-09 19:45:17 +01:00
data->ft_ies.target_ap,
data->ft_ies.ric_ies,
data->ft_ies.ric_ies_len) < 0) {
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
/* TODO: prevent MLME/driver from trying to associate? */
}
}
#endif /* CONFIG_IEEE80211R */
Added initial step for IBSS RSN support This commit adds a new build option, CONFIG_IBSS_RSN=y, that can be used to enable RSN support for IBSS. This links in RSN Authenticator code from hostapd and adds code for managing per-peer information for IBSS. A new wpa_cli command or driver event can be used to request RSN authentication with an IBSS peer. New RSN Authenticator and Supplicant will be allocated for each peer. The basic state machine setup code is included in this commit, but the state machines are not properly started yet. In addition, some of the callback functions are not yet complete.
2009-01-15 00:21:55 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_IBSS_RSN
static void wpa_supplicant_event_ibss_rsn_start(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
union wpa_event_data *data)
{
IBSS RSN: Do not start 4-way handshake unless RSN is enabled
2010-12-05 03:17:05 +01:00
struct wpa_ssid *ssid;
IBSS RSN: Do not start if not yet connected to IBSS This is used to avoid starting IBSS RSN processing with a peer before the IBSS connection itself has been completed.
2011-03-16 15:26:26 +01:00
if (wpa_s->wpa_state < WPA_ASSOCIATED)
return;
Added initial step for IBSS RSN support This commit adds a new build option, CONFIG_IBSS_RSN=y, that can be used to enable RSN support for IBSS. This links in RSN Authenticator code from hostapd and adds code for managing per-peer information for IBSS. A new wpa_cli command or driver event can be used to request RSN authentication with an IBSS peer. New RSN Authenticator and Supplicant will be allocated for each peer. The basic state machine setup code is included in this commit, but the state machines are not properly started yet. In addition, some of the callback functions are not yet complete.
2009-01-15 00:21:55 +01:00
if (data == NULL)
return;
IBSS RSN: Do not start 4-way handshake unless RSN is enabled
2010-12-05 03:17:05 +01:00
ssid = wpa_s->current_ssid;
if (ssid == NULL)
return;
if (ssid->mode != WPAS_MODE_IBSS || !wpa_key_mgmt_wpa(ssid->key_mgmt))
return;
Added initial step for IBSS RSN support This commit adds a new build option, CONFIG_IBSS_RSN=y, that can be used to enable RSN support for IBSS. This links in RSN Authenticator code from hostapd and adds code for managing per-peer information for IBSS. A new wpa_cli command or driver event can be used to request RSN authentication with an IBSS peer. New RSN Authenticator and Supplicant will be allocated for each peer. The basic state machine setup code is included in this commit, but the state machines are not properly started yet. In addition, some of the callback functions are not yet complete.
2009-01-15 00:21:55 +01:00
ibss_rsn_start(wpa_s->ibss_rsn, data->ibss_rsn_start.peer);
}
IBSS RSN: Add peer restart detection To better support the IBSS/RSN mechanism, wpa_supplicant has to be able to detect a possible peer reboot and in this case it should start a new EAPOL handshake. To perform such reboot detection wpa_supplicant has to perform an Open Authentication by sending an Authentication frame and then replying to it. IF an Authentication frame is received when the key have already been exchanged, wpa_supplicant understands that the peer has rebooted and can reset its state machine. Whenever a new peer is added to the IBSS wpa_supplicant will start the Open Authentication and only after having accomplished it will start the key exchange. If the driver does not support Authentication frame exchange initiated from user space, this step is skipped to maintain previous behavior (just go through EAPOL-Key frame processing). The Open Authentication was partly supported by the Linux kernel but now wpa_supplicant can register for Authentication frames, handle it in userspace and so avoid any possible race condition. Signed-hostap: Nicolas Cavallari <cavallar@lri.fr> Signed-hostap: Antonio Quartulli <antonio@open-mesh.com>
2013-07-21 14:56:53 +02:00
static void wpa_supplicant_event_ibss_auth(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
union wpa_event_data *data)
{
struct wpa_ssid *ssid = wpa_s->current_ssid;
if (ssid == NULL)
return;
/* check if the ssid is correctly configured as IBSS/RSN */
if (ssid->mode != WPAS_MODE_IBSS || !wpa_key_mgmt_wpa(ssid->key_mgmt))
return;
ibss_rsn_handle_auth(wpa_s->ibss_rsn, data->rx_mgmt.frame,
data->rx_mgmt.frame_len);
}
Added initial step for IBSS RSN support This commit adds a new build option, CONFIG_IBSS_RSN=y, that can be used to enable RSN support for IBSS. This links in RSN Authenticator code from hostapd and adds code for managing per-peer information for IBSS. A new wpa_cli command or driver event can be used to request RSN authentication with an IBSS peer. New RSN Authenticator and Supplicant will be allocated for each peer. The basic state machine setup code is included in this commit, but the state machines are not properly started yet. In addition, some of the callback functions are not yet complete.
2009-01-15 00:21:55 +01:00
#endif /* CONFIG_IBSS_RSN */
FT: Add preliminary processing of FT Action Response from EVENT_RX_ACTION Previously, this was only done with userspace MLME (i.e., driver_test.c); now, driver_nl80211.c can deliver the FT Action Response (FT-over-DS) for processing. The reassociation after successful FT Action frame exchange is not yet implemented.
2010-03-11 23:43:00 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_IEEE80211R
static void ft_rx_action(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s, const u8 *data,
size_t len)
{
const u8 *sta_addr, *target_ap_addr;
u16 status;
wpa_hexdump(MSG_MSGDUMP, "FT: RX Action", data, len);
if (!(wpa_s->drv_flags & WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_SME))
return; /* only SME case supported for now */
if (len < 1 + 2 * ETH_ALEN + 2)
return;
if (data[0] != 2)
return; /* Only FT Action Response is supported for now */
sta_addr = data + 1;
target_ap_addr = data + 1 + ETH_ALEN;
status = WPA_GET_LE16(data + 1 + 2 * ETH_ALEN);
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "FT: Received FT Action Response: STA "
MACSTR " TargetAP " MACSTR " status %u",
MAC2STR(sta_addr), MAC2STR(target_ap_addr), status);
FT: Add preliminary processing of FT Action Response from EVENT_RX_ACTION Previously, this was only done with userspace MLME (i.e., driver_test.c); now, driver_nl80211.c can deliver the FT Action Response (FT-over-DS) for processing. The reassociation after successful FT Action frame exchange is not yet implemented.
2010-03-11 23:43:00 +01:00
if (os_memcmp(sta_addr, wpa_s->own_addr, ETH_ALEN) != 0) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "FT: Foreign STA Address " MACSTR
" in FT Action Response", MAC2STR(sta_addr));
FT: Add preliminary processing of FT Action Response from EVENT_RX_ACTION Previously, this was only done with userspace MLME (i.e., driver_test.c); now, driver_nl80211.c can deliver the FT Action Response (FT-over-DS) for processing. The reassociation after successful FT Action frame exchange is not yet implemented.
2010-03-11 23:43:00 +01:00
return;
}
if (status) {
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "FT: FT Action Response indicates "
"failure (status code %d)", status);
FT: Add preliminary processing of FT Action Response from EVENT_RX_ACTION Previously, this was only done with userspace MLME (i.e., driver_test.c); now, driver_nl80211.c can deliver the FT Action Response (FT-over-DS) for processing. The reassociation after successful FT Action frame exchange is not yet implemented.
2010-03-11 23:43:00 +01:00
/* TODO: report error to FT code(?) */
return;
}
if (wpa_ft_process_response(wpa_s->wpa, data + 1 + 2 * ETH_ALEN + 2,
len - (1 + 2 * ETH_ALEN + 2), 1,
target_ap_addr, NULL, 0) < 0)
return;
FT: Update SME frequency info before sme_associate() call This is needed to allow FT-over-DS to request correct channel for the reassociation with the target AP.
2010-03-13 17:26:25 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_SME
{
struct wpa_bss *bss;
bss = wpa_bss_get_bssid(wpa_s, target_ap_addr);
if (bss)
wpa_s->sme.freq = bss->freq;
FT: Process reassoc resp FT IEs when using wpa_supplicant SME
2010-03-13 20:13:18 +01:00
wpa_s->sme.auth_alg = WPA_AUTH_ALG_FT;
FT: Update SME frequency info before sme_associate() call This is needed to allow FT-over-DS to request correct channel for the reassociation with the target AP.
2010-03-13 17:26:25 +01:00
sme_associate(wpa_s, WPAS_MODE_INFRA, target_ap_addr,
WLAN_AUTH_FT);
}
#endif /* CONFIG_SME */
FT: Add preliminary processing of FT Action Response from EVENT_RX_ACTION Previously, this was only done with userspace MLME (i.e., driver_test.c); now, driver_nl80211.c can deliver the FT Action Response (FT-over-DS) for processing. The reassociation after successful FT Action frame exchange is not yet implemented.
2010-03-11 23:43:00 +01:00
}
#endif /* CONFIG_IEEE80211R */
Use SA Query procedure to recovery from AP/STA state mismatch If a station received unprotected Deauthentication or Disassociation frame with reason code 6 or 7 from the current AP, there may be a mismatch in association state between the AP and STA. Verify whether this is the case by using SA Query procedure. If not response is received from the AP, deauthenticate. This implementation is only for user space SME with driver_nl80211.c.
2010-12-19 10:58:00 +01:00
static void wpa_supplicant_event_unprot_deauth(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
struct unprot_deauth *e)
{
#ifdef CONFIG_IEEE80211W
wpa_printf(MSG_DEBUG, "Unprotected Deauthentication frame "
"dropped: " MACSTR " -> " MACSTR
" (reason code %u)",
MAC2STR(e->sa), MAC2STR(e->da), e->reason_code);
sme_event_unprot_disconnect(wpa_s, e->sa, e->da, e->reason_code);
#endif /* CONFIG_IEEE80211W */
}
static void wpa_supplicant_event_unprot_disassoc(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
struct unprot_disassoc *e)
{
#ifdef CONFIG_IEEE80211W
wpa_printf(MSG_DEBUG, "Unprotected Disassociation frame "
"dropped: " MACSTR " -> " MACSTR
" (reason code %u)",
MAC2STR(e->sa), MAC2STR(e->da), e->reason_code);
sme_event_unprot_disconnect(wpa_s, e->sa, e->da, e->reason_code);
#endif /* CONFIG_IEEE80211W */
}
Clean up wpa_supplicant_event() with deauth/disassoc helper functions wpa_supplicant_event() has grown overly large, so it is useful to split it into smaller pieces. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-07-21 15:40:40 +02:00
static void wpas_event_disconnect(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s, const u8 *addr,
u16 reason_code, int locally_generated,
const u8 *ie, size_t ie_len, int deauth)
{
#ifdef CONFIG_AP
if (wpa_s->ap_iface && addr) {
hostapd_notif_disassoc(wpa_s->ap_iface->bss[0], addr);
return;
}
if (wpa_s->ap_iface) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Ignore deauth event in AP mode");
return;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_AP */
Do not add blacklist entries based on normal disconnect request cases There are number of cases where wpa_supplicant requests the current connection to be disconnected before starting a new operation. Such cases do not really indicate that there was an error in connecting or a disconnection initiated by the AP, so do not add a temporary blacklist entry in such sequences. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-03-01 14:54:24 +01:00
if (!locally_generated)
wpa_s->own_disconnect_req = 0;
Clean up wpa_supplicant_event() with deauth/disassoc helper functions wpa_supplicant_event() has grown overly large, so it is useful to split it into smaller pieces. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-07-21 15:40:40 +02:00
wpa_supplicant_event_disassoc(wpa_s, reason_code, locally_generated);
Skip network disabling on expected EAP failure Some EAP methods can go through a step that is expected to fail and as such, should not trigger temporary network disabling when processing EAP-Failure or deauthentication. EAP-WSC for WPS was already handled as a special case, but similar behavior is needed for EAP-FAST with unauthenticated provisioning. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-01-08 09:24:05 +01:00
if (((reason_code == WLAN_REASON_IEEE_802_1X_AUTH_FAILED ||
((wpa_key_mgmt_wpa_ieee8021x(wpa_s->key_mgmt) ||
(wpa_s->key_mgmt & WPA_KEY_MGMT_IEEE8021X_NO_WPA)) &&
eapol_sm_failed(wpa_s->eapol))) &&
!wpa_s->eap_expected_failure))
Send authentication failure reason in wpas_auth_failed() "WRONG_KEY" - possibly wrong psk "AUTH_FAILED" - authentication failure "CONN_FAILED" - continiuos connection failure Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2014-05-16 00:55:21 +02:00
wpas_auth_failed(wpa_s, "AUTH_FAILED");
Clean up wpa_supplicant_event() with deauth/disassoc helper functions wpa_supplicant_event() has grown overly large, so it is useful to split it into smaller pieces. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-07-21 15:40:40 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_P2P
P2P: Immediate group removal in GC in case of deauthentication Right now in case of deauthentication from GO, immediate group removal will happen in GC only if the deauthentication packet has a valid IE. However, the IE in deauthentication packet is mandated only for managed P2P group. So in normal P2P group the group removal is delayed and will happen later only in group idle timeout. This fixes a regression from commit d7df0fa727a2a79d7b22df6c68961220349ab2e3 that changed the previous check for data->deauth_info != NULL to data->deauth_info->ie != NULL. Signed-hostap: Sreenath Sharma <sreenats@broadcom.com>
2013-08-31 10:11:41 +02:00
if (deauth && reason_code > 0) {
Clean up wpa_supplicant_event() with deauth/disassoc helper functions wpa_supplicant_event() has grown overly large, so it is useful to split it into smaller pieces. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-07-21 15:40:40 +02:00
if (wpas_p2p_deauth_notif(wpa_s, addr, reason_code, ie, ie_len,
locally_generated) > 0) {
/*
* The interface was removed, so cannot continue
* processing any additional operations after this.
*/
return;
}
}
#endif /* CONFIG_P2P */
wpa_supplicant_event_disassoc_finish(wpa_s, reason_code,
locally_generated);
}
static void wpas_event_disassoc(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
struct disassoc_info *info)
{
u16 reason_code = 0;
int locally_generated = 0;
const u8 *addr = NULL;
const u8 *ie = NULL;
size_t ie_len = 0;
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Disassociation notification");
if (info) {
addr = info->addr;
ie = info->ie;
ie_len = info->ie_len;
reason_code = info->reason_code;
locally_generated = info->locally_generated;
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " * reason %u%s", reason_code,
locally_generated ? " (locally generated)" : "");
if (addr)
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " * address " MACSTR,
MAC2STR(addr));
wpa_hexdump(MSG_DEBUG, "Disassociation frame IE(s)",
ie, ie_len);
}
#ifdef CONFIG_AP
if (wpa_s->ap_iface && info && info->addr) {
hostapd_notif_disassoc(wpa_s->ap_iface->bss[0], info->addr);
return;
}
if (wpa_s->ap_iface) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Ignore disassoc event in AP mode");
return;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_AP */
#ifdef CONFIG_P2P
if (info) {
wpas_p2p_disassoc_notif(
wpa_s, info->addr, reason_code, info->ie, info->ie_len,
locally_generated);
}
#endif /* CONFIG_P2P */
if (wpa_s->drv_flags & WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_SME)
sme_event_disassoc(wpa_s, info);
wpas_event_disconnect(wpa_s, addr, reason_code, locally_generated,
ie, ie_len, 0);
}
static void wpas_event_deauth(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
struct deauth_info *info)
{
u16 reason_code = 0;
int locally_generated = 0;
const u8 *addr = NULL;
const u8 *ie = NULL;
size_t ie_len = 0;
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Deauthentication notification");
if (info) {
addr = info->addr;
ie = info->ie;
ie_len = info->ie_len;
reason_code = info->reason_code;
locally_generated = info->locally_generated;
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " * reason %u%s",
reason_code,
locally_generated ? " (locally generated)" : "");
if (addr) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, " * address " MACSTR,
MAC2STR(addr));
}
wpa_hexdump(MSG_DEBUG, "Deauthentication frame IE(s)",
ie, ie_len);
}
wpa_reset_ft_completed(wpa_s->wpa);
wpas_event_disconnect(wpa_s, addr, reason_code,
locally_generated, ie, ie_len, 1);
}
Add a wpa_supplicant ctrl_iface event for regdom changes CTRL-EVENT-REGDOM-CHANGE event provides an external notification of regulatory domain (and any driver channel list) changes. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-04-13 15:32:38 +02:00
static const char * reg_init_str(enum reg_change_initiator init)
{
switch (init) {
case REGDOM_SET_BY_CORE:
return "CORE";
case REGDOM_SET_BY_USER:
return "USER";
case REGDOM_SET_BY_DRIVER:
return "DRIVER";
case REGDOM_SET_BY_COUNTRY_IE:
return "COUNTRY_IE";
case REGDOM_BEACON_HINT:
return "BEACON_HINT";
}
return "?";
}
static const char * reg_type_str(enum reg_type type)
{
switch (type) {
case REGDOM_TYPE_UNKNOWN:
return "UNKNOWN";
case REGDOM_TYPE_COUNTRY:
return "COUNTRY";
case REGDOM_TYPE_WORLD:
return "WORLD";
case REGDOM_TYPE_CUSTOM_WORLD:
return "CUSTOM_WORLD";
case REGDOM_TYPE_INTERSECTION:
return "INTERSECTION";
}
return "?";
}
static void wpa_supplicant_update_channel_list(
struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s, struct channel_list_changed *info)
Update regulatory change to all virtual interface for the phy wpas_p2p_setup_channels function uses the per interface information (wpa_s->hw.modes) for setting up the available channel list for P2P operation, but if a separate P2P interface is used (e.g., p2p0 on Android), the wpa_s instance for that interface may not get an updated channel list. This can result in some operations, like "P2P_SET disallow_freq", using old channel list information (e.g., world roaming information with passive-scan/no-ibss flags) which was initialized during the start-up. This could result in P2P functionality using conflicting or obsolete channel information. To resolve this issue, update channel list information on regulatory change events to all of the virtual interfaces sharing the same phy for which the event is received. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-10-29 22:03:23 +01:00
{
struct wpa_supplicant *ifs;
Send CTRL-EVENT-REGDOM-CHANGE event on the parent interface The NL80211_CMD_WIPHY_REG_CHANGE can be handled by any of the interfaces that are currently controlled by the wpa_supplicant. However, some applications expect the REGDOM_CHANGE event to be sent on the control interface of the initially added interface (and do not expect the event on any of child interfaces). To resolve this, when processing NL80211_CMD_WIPHY_REG_CHANGE, find the highest parent in the chain, and use its control interface to emit the CTRL-EVENT-REGDOM-CHANGE event. Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
2016-04-25 10:24:58 +02:00
/*
* To allow backwards compatibility with higher level layers that
* assumed the REGDOM_CHANGE event is sent over the initially added
* interface. Find the highest parent of this interface and use it to
* send the event.
*/
for (ifs = wpa_s; ifs->parent && ifs != ifs->parent; ifs = ifs->parent)
;
wpa_msg(ifs, MSG_INFO, WPA_EVENT_REGDOM_CHANGE "init=%s type=%s%s%s",
Fix CTRL-EVENT-REGDOM-CHANGE event init= value Incorrect field was used to determine the init=<value> in the regulatory domain changed control interface event. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-07-02 12:09:00 +02:00
reg_init_str(info->initiator), reg_type_str(info->type),
Add a wpa_supplicant ctrl_iface event for regdom changes CTRL-EVENT-REGDOM-CHANGE event provides an external notification of regulatory domain (and any driver channel list) changes. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-04-13 15:32:38 +02:00
info->alpha2[0] ? " alpha2=" : "",
info->alpha2[0] ? info->alpha2 : "");
Update regulatory change to all virtual interface for the phy wpas_p2p_setup_channels function uses the per interface information (wpa_s->hw.modes) for setting up the available channel list for P2P operation, but if a separate P2P interface is used (e.g., p2p0 on Android), the wpa_s instance for that interface may not get an updated channel list. This can result in some operations, like "P2P_SET disallow_freq", using old channel list information (e.g., world roaming information with passive-scan/no-ibss flags) which was initialized during the start-up. This could result in P2P functionality using conflicting or obsolete channel information. To resolve this issue, update channel list information on regulatory change events to all of the virtual interfaces sharing the same phy for which the event is received. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-10-29 22:03:23 +01:00
if (wpa_s->drv_priv == NULL)
return; /* Ignore event during drv initialization */
Use wpa_radio data for channel list updates This replaces the now unnecessary iteration of get_radio_name() calls. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-11-24 18:59:28 +01:00
dl_list_for_each(ifs, &wpa_s->radio->ifaces, struct wpa_supplicant,
radio_list) {
Refactor channel list update event in wpa_supplicant Update hardware features for all interfaces inside the loop, don't treat the calling wpa_s instance specially. Perform the P2P channel list updates after the hardware features are updated. This will prevent P2P from relying on stale information. Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
2015-07-27 21:24:24 +02:00
wpa_printf(MSG_DEBUG, "%s: Updating hw mode",
ifs->ifname);
free_hw_features(ifs);
ifs->hw.modes = wpa_drv_get_hw_feature_data(
ifs, &ifs->hw.num_modes, &ifs->hw.flags);
Update regulatory change to all virtual interface for the phy wpas_p2p_setup_channels function uses the per interface information (wpa_s->hw.modes) for setting up the available channel list for P2P operation, but if a separate P2P interface is used (e.g., p2p0 on Android), the wpa_s instance for that interface may not get an updated channel list. This can result in some operations, like "P2P_SET disallow_freq", using old channel list information (e.g., world roaming information with passive-scan/no-ibss flags) which was initialized during the start-up. This could result in P2P functionality using conflicting or obsolete channel information. To resolve this issue, update channel list information on regulatory change events to all of the virtual interfaces sharing the same phy for which the event is received. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-10-29 22:03:23 +01:00
}
Restart sched_scan on channel list change The channel list can be changed as a result of arriving beacon hints during normal scan or as a result of local Reg-Domain change. Some passive channels can become active and needs to be reconfigured accordingly for the scheduled scan. This fixes the connection to hidden SSIDs on 5 GHz band during default Reg-Domain 00 (world roaming). Signed-off-by: Victor Goldenshtein <victorg@ti.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
2015-03-19 15:41:39 +01:00
/* Restart sched_scan with updated channel list */
if (wpa_s->sched_scanning) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
"Channel list changed restart sched scan.");
wpa_supplicant_cancel_sched_scan(wpa_s);
wpa_supplicant_req_scan(wpa_s, 0, 0);
}
Refactor channel list update event in wpa_supplicant Update hardware features for all interfaces inside the loop, don't treat the calling wpa_s instance specially. Perform the P2P channel list updates after the hardware features are updated. This will prevent P2P from relying on stale information. Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
2015-07-27 21:24:24 +02:00
P2P: Do not perform P2P GO CS in some cases A P2P GO channel switch should not be triggered in all cases that require channel list update. Specifically, a P2P GO CS should not be triggered in case that the P2P GO state changed or in case that that the P2P GO has just completed a CS. To fix this, add reason code to wpas_p2p_channel_list_update() and trigger CS flow only for the relevant cases. Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
2015-07-27 21:24:27 +02:00
wpas_p2p_update_channel_list(wpa_s, WPAS_P2P_CHANNEL_UPDATE_DRIVER);
Update regulatory change to all virtual interface for the phy wpas_p2p_setup_channels function uses the per interface information (wpa_s->hw.modes) for setting up the available channel list for P2P operation, but if a separate P2P interface is used (e.g., p2p0 on Android), the wpa_s instance for that interface may not get an updated channel list. This can result in some operations, like "P2P_SET disallow_freq", using old channel list information (e.g., world roaming information with passive-scan/no-ibss flags) which was initialized during the start-up. This could result in P2P functionality using conflicting or obsolete channel information. To resolve this issue, update channel list information on regulatory change events to all of the virtual interfaces sharing the same phy for which the event is received. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-10-29 22:03:23 +01:00
}
Remove unnecessary EVENT_RX_ACTION This driver event was used separately for some Action frames, but all the driver wrappers converted to this from information that would have been enough to indicate an EVENT_RX_MGMT event. In addition, the received event was then converted back to a full IEEE 802.11 management frame for processing in most cases. This is unnecessary complexity, so get rid of the extra path and use EVENT_RX_MGMT for Action frames as well as other management frame subtypes. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-29 10:22:23 +01:00
static void wpas_event_rx_mgmt_action(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
wpa_supplicant: Handle link measurement requests Send link measurement response when a request is received. Advertise only RCPI, computing it from the RSSI of the request. The TX power field is left to be filled by the driver. All other fields are not published. Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
2014-11-05 09:42:56 +01:00
const u8 *frame, size_t len, int freq,
int rssi)
Remove unnecessary EVENT_RX_ACTION This driver event was used separately for some Action frames, but all the driver wrappers converted to this from information that would have been enough to indicate an EVENT_RX_MGMT event. In addition, the received event was then converted back to a full IEEE 802.11 management frame for processing in most cases. This is unnecessary complexity, so get rid of the extra path and use EVENT_RX_MGMT for Action frames as well as other management frame subtypes. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-29 10:22:23 +01:00
{
Use clearer way of getting pointer to a frame (CID 62835) This avoids an incorrect ARRAY_VS_SINGLETON report for a case where a pointer is taken to the specified field in a frame and not to a single octet. Bounds checking was already handled separately. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-06-12 18:42:50 +02:00
const struct ieee80211_mgmt *mgmt;
Remove unnecessary EVENT_RX_ACTION This driver event was used separately for some Action frames, but all the driver wrappers converted to this from information that would have been enough to indicate an EVENT_RX_MGMT event. In addition, the received event was then converted back to a full IEEE 802.11 management frame for processing in most cases. This is unnecessary complexity, so get rid of the extra path and use EVENT_RX_MGMT for Action frames as well as other management frame subtypes. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-29 10:22:23 +01:00
const u8 *payload;
size_t plen;
u8 category;
if (len < IEEE80211_HDRLEN + 2)
return;
Use clearer way of getting pointer to a frame (CID 62835) This avoids an incorrect ARRAY_VS_SINGLETON report for a case where a pointer is taken to the specified field in a frame and not to a single octet. Bounds checking was already handled separately. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-06-12 18:42:50 +02:00
mgmt = (const struct ieee80211_mgmt *) frame;
payload = frame + IEEE80211_HDRLEN;
Remove unnecessary EVENT_RX_ACTION This driver event was used separately for some Action frames, but all the driver wrappers converted to this from information that would have been enough to indicate an EVENT_RX_MGMT event. In addition, the received event was then converted back to a full IEEE 802.11 management frame for processing in most cases. This is unnecessary complexity, so get rid of the extra path and use EVENT_RX_MGMT for Action frames as well as other management frame subtypes. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-29 10:22:23 +01:00
category = *payload++;
Use clearer way of getting pointer to a frame (CID 62835) This avoids an incorrect ARRAY_VS_SINGLETON report for a case where a pointer is taken to the specified field in a frame and not to a single octet. Bounds checking was already handled separately. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-06-12 18:42:50 +02:00
plen = len - IEEE80211_HDRLEN - 1;
Remove unnecessary EVENT_RX_ACTION This driver event was used separately for some Action frames, but all the driver wrappers converted to this from information that would have been enough to indicate an EVENT_RX_MGMT event. In addition, the received event was then converted back to a full IEEE 802.11 management frame for processing in most cases. This is unnecessary complexity, so get rid of the extra path and use EVENT_RX_MGMT for Action frames as well as other management frame subtypes. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-29 10:22:23 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Received Action frame: SA=" MACSTR
" Category=%u DataLen=%d freq=%d MHz",
MAC2STR(mgmt->sa), category, (int) plen, freq);
WMM AC: Handle TSPEC action frames Add the TSPEC to the driver on successful TSPEC ADDTS response. Delete the TSPEC when receiving DELTS action. Signed-off-by: Moshe Benji <moshe.benji@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
2014-10-22 14:03:57 +02:00
if (category == WLAN_ACTION_WMM) {
wmm_ac_rx_action(wpa_s, mgmt->da, mgmt->sa, payload, plen);
return;
}
Remove unnecessary EVENT_RX_ACTION This driver event was used separately for some Action frames, but all the driver wrappers converted to this from information that would have been enough to indicate an EVENT_RX_MGMT event. In addition, the received event was then converted back to a full IEEE 802.11 management frame for processing in most cases. This is unnecessary complexity, so get rid of the extra path and use EVENT_RX_MGMT for Action frames as well as other management frame subtypes. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-29 10:22:23 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_IEEE80211R
if (category == WLAN_ACTION_FT) {
ft_rx_action(wpa_s, payload, plen);
return;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_IEEE80211R */
#ifdef CONFIG_IEEE80211W
#ifdef CONFIG_SME
if (category == WLAN_ACTION_SA_QUERY) {
sme_sa_query_rx(wpa_s, mgmt->sa, payload, plen);
return;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_SME */
#endif /* CONFIG_IEEE80211W */
#ifdef CONFIG_WNM
if (mgmt->u.action.category == WLAN_ACTION_WNM) {
ieee802_11_rx_wnm_action(wpa_s, mgmt, len);
return;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_WNM */
#ifdef CONFIG_GAS
GAS client: Use Protected Dual of Public Action frames with PMF When GAS is used with PMF negotiated, Protected Dual of Public Action frames are expected to be used instead of Public Action frames, i.e., the GAS/ANQP frames are expected to be encrypted. Conver Public Action GAS queries to use Dual of Public Action frame if PMF has been negotiated with the AP to which the frame is being sent. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-01-23 10:18:20 +01:00
if ((mgmt->u.action.category == WLAN_ACTION_PUBLIC ||
mgmt->u.action.category == WLAN_ACTION_PROTECTED_DUAL) &&
Remove unnecessary EVENT_RX_ACTION This driver event was used separately for some Action frames, but all the driver wrappers converted to this from information that would have been enough to indicate an EVENT_RX_MGMT event. In addition, the received event was then converted back to a full IEEE 802.11 management frame for processing in most cases. This is unnecessary complexity, so get rid of the extra path and use EVENT_RX_MGMT for Action frames as well as other management frame subtypes. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-29 10:22:23 +01:00
gas_query_rx(wpa_s->gas, mgmt->da, mgmt->sa, mgmt->bssid,
GAS client: Use Protected Dual of Public Action frames with PMF When GAS is used with PMF negotiated, Protected Dual of Public Action frames are expected to be used instead of Public Action frames, i.e., the GAS/ANQP frames are expected to be encrypted. Conver Public Action GAS queries to use Dual of Public Action frame if PMF has been negotiated with the AP to which the frame is being sent. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-01-23 10:18:20 +01:00
mgmt->u.action.category,
Remove unnecessary EVENT_RX_ACTION This driver event was used separately for some Action frames, but all the driver wrappers converted to this from information that would have been enough to indicate an EVENT_RX_MGMT event. In addition, the received event was then converted back to a full IEEE 802.11 management frame for processing in most cases. This is unnecessary complexity, so get rid of the extra path and use EVENT_RX_MGMT for Action frames as well as other management frame subtypes. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-29 10:22:23 +01:00
payload, plen, freq) == 0)
return;
#endif /* CONFIG_GAS */
#ifdef CONFIG_TDLS
if (category == WLAN_ACTION_PUBLIC && plen >= 4 &&
payload[0] == WLAN_TDLS_DISCOVERY_RESPONSE) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
"TDLS: Received Discovery Response from " MACSTR,
MAC2STR(mgmt->sa));
return;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_TDLS */
#ifdef CONFIG_INTERWORKING
if (category == WLAN_ACTION_QOS && plen >= 1 &&
payload[0] == QOS_QOS_MAP_CONFIG) {
const u8 *pos = payload + 1;
size_t qlen = plen - 1;
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Interworking: Received QoS Map Configure frame from "
MACSTR, MAC2STR(mgmt->sa));
if (os_memcmp(mgmt->sa, wpa_s->bssid, ETH_ALEN) == 0 &&
qlen > 2 && pos[0] == WLAN_EID_QOS_MAP_SET &&
pos[1] <= qlen - 2 && pos[1] >= 16)
wpas_qos_map_set(wpa_s, pos + 2, pos[1]);
return;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_INTERWORKING */
wpa_supplicant: Handle LCI request Handle radio measurement request that contains LCI request. Send measurement report based on a configurable LCI report element. The LCI report element is configured over the control interface with SET lci <hexdump of the element> and cleared with SET lci "" Signed-off-by: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com>
2016-04-06 18:42:13 +02:00
if (category == WLAN_ACTION_RADIO_MEASUREMENT &&
payload[0] == WLAN_RRM_RADIO_MEASUREMENT_REQUEST) {
wpas_rrm_handle_radio_measurement_request(wpa_s, mgmt->sa,
payload + 1,
plen - 1);
return;
}
wpa_supplicant: Add support for Neighbor Report Add the ability to send a Neighbor Report Request (part of RRM). Requester is then notified once the report arrives. Signed-off-by: Assaf Krauss <assaf.krauss@intel.com>
2014-11-05 09:42:50 +01:00
if (category == WLAN_ACTION_RADIO_MEASUREMENT &&
payload[0] == WLAN_RRM_NEIGHBOR_REPORT_RESPONSE) {
wpas_rrm_process_neighbor_rep(wpa_s, payload + 1, plen - 1);
return;
}
wpa_supplicant: Handle link measurement requests Send link measurement response when a request is received. Advertise only RCPI, computing it from the RSSI of the request. The TX power field is left to be filled by the driver. All other fields are not published. Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
2014-11-05 09:42:56 +01:00
if (category == WLAN_ACTION_RADIO_MEASUREMENT &&
payload[0] == WLAN_RRM_LINK_MEASUREMENT_REQUEST) {
wpas_rrm_handle_link_measurement_request(wpa_s, mgmt->sa,
payload + 1, plen - 1,
rssi);
return;
}
FST: Send FST Action frame for processing (wpa_supplicant) Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-11-16 16:28:53 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_FST
if (mgmt->u.action.category == WLAN_ACTION_FST && wpa_s->fst) {
fst_rx_action(wpa_s->fst, mgmt, len);
return;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_FST */
Remove unnecessary EVENT_RX_ACTION This driver event was used separately for some Action frames, but all the driver wrappers converted to this from information that would have been enough to indicate an EVENT_RX_MGMT event. In addition, the received event was then converted back to a full IEEE 802.11 management frame for processing in most cases. This is unnecessary complexity, so get rid of the extra path and use EVENT_RX_MGMT for Action frames as well as other management frame subtypes. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-29 10:22:23 +01:00
wpas_p2p_rx_action(wpa_s, mgmt->da, mgmt->sa, mgmt->bssid,
category, payload, plen, freq);
mesh: Add mesh peering manager The mesh peering manager establishes and maintains links among mesh peers, tracking each peer link via a finite state machine. This implementation supports open mesh peerings. [assorted fixes from Yu Niiro <yu.niiro@gmail.com>] [more fixes from Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>] Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Ashok Nagarajan <ashok.dragon@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name> Signed-hostap: Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
2014-03-11 05:07:01 +01:00
if (wpa_s->ifmsh)
mesh_mpm_action_rx(wpa_s, mgmt, len);
Remove unnecessary EVENT_RX_ACTION This driver event was used separately for some Action frames, but all the driver wrappers converted to this from information that would have been enough to indicate an EVENT_RX_MGMT event. In addition, the received event was then converted back to a full IEEE 802.11 management frame for processing in most cases. This is unnecessary complexity, so get rid of the extra path and use EVENT_RX_MGMT for Action frames as well as other management frame subtypes. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-29 10:22:23 +01:00
}
P2P: Apply unsafe frequency rules to available channels This adds a QCA vendor specific nl80211 event to allow the driver to indicate a list of frequency ranges that should be avoided due to interference or possible known co-existance constraints. Such frequencies are marked as not allowed for P2P use to force groups to be formed on different channels. If a P2P GO is operating on a channel that the driver recommended not to use, a notification about this is sent on the control interface and upper layer code may decide to tear down the group and optionally restart it on another channel. As a TODO item, this could also be changed to use CSA to avoid removing the group. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-01-24 15:14:29 +01:00
static void wpa_supplicant_notify_avoid_freq(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
union wpa_event_data *event)
{
struct wpa_freq_range_list *list;
char *str = NULL;
list = &event->freq_range;
if (list->num)
str = freq_range_list_str(list);
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_INFO, WPA_EVENT_AVOID_FREQ "ranges=%s",
str ? str : "");
#ifdef CONFIG_P2P
if (freq_range_list_parse(&wpa_s->global->p2p_go_avoid_freq, str)) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_ERROR, "%s: Failed to parse freq range",
__func__);
} else {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "P2P: Update channel list based on frequency avoid event");
P2P: Remove GO handling in avoid frequency event Remove the code that considers removing GOs from their current channel due to frequency interference, as this is already handled as part of the P2P channels update. Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
2015-07-27 21:24:22 +02:00
/*
* The update channel flow will also take care of moving a GO
* from the unsafe frequency if needed.
*/
P2P: Do not perform P2P GO CS in some cases A P2P GO channel switch should not be triggered in all cases that require channel list update. Specifically, a P2P GO CS should not be triggered in case that the P2P GO state changed or in case that that the P2P GO has just completed a CS. To fix this, add reason code to wpas_p2p_channel_list_update() and trigger CS flow only for the relevant cases. Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
2015-07-27 21:24:27 +02:00
wpas_p2p_update_channel_list(wpa_s,
WPAS_P2P_CHANNEL_UPDATE_AVOID);
P2P: Apply unsafe frequency rules to available channels This adds a QCA vendor specific nl80211 event to allow the driver to indicate a list of frequency ranges that should be avoided due to interference or possible known co-existance constraints. Such frequencies are marked as not allowed for P2P use to force groups to be formed on different channels. If a P2P GO is operating on a channel that the driver recommended not to use, a notification about this is sent on the control interface and upper layer code may decide to tear down the group and optionally restart it on another channel. As a TODO item, this could also be changed to use CSA to avoid removing the group. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-01-24 15:14:29 +01:00
}
#endif /* CONFIG_P2P */
os_free(str);
}
Add support for offloading key management operations to the driver This commit introduces a QCA vendor command and event to provide an option to use extended versions of the nl80211 connect/roam operations in a way that allows drivers to offload key management operations to the driver/firmware. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-10-23 17:21:49 +02:00
static void wpa_supplicant_event_assoc_auth(struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s,
union wpa_event_data *data)
{
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
"Connection authorized by device, previous state %d",
wpa_s->wpa_state);
if (wpa_s->wpa_state == WPA_ASSOCIATED) {
wpa_supplicant_cancel_auth_timeout(wpa_s);
wpa_supplicant_set_state(wpa_s, WPA_COMPLETED);
eapol_sm_notify_portValid(wpa_s->eapol, TRUE);
eapol_sm_notify_eap_success(wpa_s->eapol, TRUE);
}
wpa_sm_set_rx_replay_ctr(wpa_s->wpa, data->assoc_info.key_replay_ctr);
wpa_sm_set_ptk_kck_kek(wpa_s->wpa, data->assoc_info.ptk_kck,
Preparations for variable length KCK and KEK This modifies struct wpa_ptk to allow the length of KCK and KEK to be stored. This is needed to allow longer keys to be used, e.g., with Suite B 192-bit level. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-01-25 15:49:18 +01:00
data->assoc_info.ptk_kck_len,
data->assoc_info.ptk_kek,
data->assoc_info.ptk_kek_len);
Add support for offloading key management operations to the driver This commit introduces a QCA vendor command and event to provide an option to use extended versions of the nl80211 connect/roam operations in a way that allows drivers to offload key management operations to the driver/firmware. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-10-23 17:21:49 +02:00
}
Remove unnecessary wpa_event_type typedef
2010-01-03 12:10:12 +01:00
void wpa_supplicant_event(void *ctx, enum wpa_event_type event,
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
union wpa_event_data *data)
{
struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s = ctx;
Reschedule scan from wpas_stop_pno if it was postponed This reschedules the postponed scan request (if such a request is pending) from EVENT_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event handler to speed up scanning after PNO/sched_scan stop has been requested. Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2015-03-30 22:44:11 +02:00
int resched;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
Add Linux rfkill support Add a new wpa_supplicant state: interface disabled. This can be used to allow wpa_supplicant to be running with the network interface even when the driver does not actually allow any radio operations (e.g., due to rfkill). Allow driver_nl80211.c and driver_wext.c to start while rfkill is in blocked state (i.e., when ifconfig up fails) and process rfkill events to block/unblock WLAN.
2010-05-23 09:27:32 +02:00
if (wpa_s->wpa_state == WPA_INTERFACE_DISABLED &&
event != EVENT_INTERFACE_ENABLED &&
Process EVENT_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED partially if interface is disabled The internal sched_scanning state needs to be cleared on this event even if the events happen to get ordered in a way that the interface gets disabled just prior to EVENT_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2011-12-21 12:36:58 +01:00
event != EVENT_INTERFACE_STATUS &&
wpa_supplicant: Handle EVENT_SCAN_RESULTS when an interface is disabled An interface can be disabled while it has an ongoing scan request. In such a case, when the scan results notification is received, it was being ignored (as the interface is already disabled) so the scan state was not cleared. This can cause undetermined behavior for the next scan request. To handle this, clear the scan state when EVENT_SCAN_RESULTS is received and the interface is disabled. Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
2016-02-29 13:30:01 +01:00
event != EVENT_SCAN_RESULTS &&
Process EVENT_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED partially if interface is disabled The internal sched_scanning state needs to be cleared on this event even if the events happen to get ordered in a way that the interface gets disabled just prior to EVENT_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2011-12-21 12:36:58 +01:00
event != EVENT_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED) {
Print human readable driver event names This makes it easier to understand the event related logs. Signed-hostap: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-11-13 18:01:38 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
"Ignore event %s (%d) while interface is disabled",
event_to_string(event), event);
Add Linux rfkill support Add a new wpa_supplicant state: interface disabled. This can be used to allow wpa_supplicant to be running with the network interface even when the driver does not actually allow any radio operations (e.g., due to rfkill). Allow driver_nl80211.c and driver_wext.c to start while rfkill is in blocked state (i.e., when ifconfig up fails) and process rfkill events to block/unblock WLAN.
2010-05-23 09:27:32 +02:00
return;
}
Lower RX_MGMT driver event debug level for Beacon frames This event can be very frequent in AP mode when Beacon frames from neighboring BSSes are delivered to user space. Drop the debug message priority from DEBUG to EXCESSIVE for Beacon frames. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-12-18 20:48:25 +01:00
#ifndef CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG
{
int level = MSG_DEBUG;
Remove unnecessary EVENT_RX_MGMT data validation Make wpa_supplicant_event() more consistent by not checking data in either location handling EVENT_RX_MGMT events. This event is required to specify the data so this pointer cannot be NULL. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-04-21 17:54:35 +02:00
if (event == EVENT_RX_MGMT && data->rx_mgmt.frame_len >= 24) {
Lower RX_MGMT driver event debug level for Beacon frames This event can be very frequent in AP mode when Beacon frames from neighboring BSSes are delivered to user space. Drop the debug message priority from DEBUG to EXCESSIVE for Beacon frames. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-12-18 20:48:25 +01:00
const struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr;
u16 fc;
hdr = (const struct ieee80211_hdr *) data->rx_mgmt.frame;
fc = le_to_host16(hdr->frame_control);
if (WLAN_FC_GET_TYPE(fc) == WLAN_FC_TYPE_MGMT &&
WLAN_FC_GET_STYPE(fc) == WLAN_FC_STYPE_BEACON)
level = MSG_EXCESSIVE;
}
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, level, "Event %s (%d) received",
Print human readable driver event names This makes it easier to understand the event related logs. Signed-hostap: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-11-13 18:01:38 +01:00
event_to_string(event), event);
Lower RX_MGMT driver event debug level for Beacon frames This event can be very frequent in AP mode when Beacon frames from neighboring BSSes are delivered to user space. Drop the debug message priority from DEBUG to EXCESSIVE for Beacon frames. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-12-18 20:48:25 +01:00
}
#endif /* CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG */
Add some more debug for driver events
2010-07-18 05:33:34 +02:00
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
switch (event) {
Add SME support (separate authentication and association) This can be used, e.g., with mac80211-based Linux drivers with nl80211. This allows over-the-air FT protocol to be used (IEEE 802.11r). Since the nl80211 interface needed for this is very recent (added today into wireless-testing.git), driver_nl80211.c has backwards compatibility code that uses WEXT for association if the kernel does not support the new commands. This compatibility code can be disabled by defining NO_WEXT_COMPAT. That code will also be removed at some point to clean up driver_nl80211.c.
2009-03-20 21:26:41 +01:00
case EVENT_AUTH:
FST: Improve parsing of Multiband IEs Previously, MB IEs were parsed only from association event. Try to get MB IEs from other management frames like Probe Response frames. The MB IEs from the association event may not be up-to-date and in some cases may actually be missing and updating the information based on other frames can improve robustness of FST exchanges. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-11-22 13:46:54 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_FST
FST: Print debug entry on MB IE update based on EVENT_AUTH This is more consistent with all the other callers of wpas_fst_update_mbie(). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-12-06 11:53:24 +01:00
if (!wpas_fst_update_mbie(wpa_s, data->auth.ies,
data->auth.ies_len))
wpa_printf(MSG_DEBUG,
"FST: MB IEs updated from auth IE");
FST: Improve parsing of Multiband IEs Previously, MB IEs were parsed only from association event. Try to get MB IEs from other management frames like Probe Response frames. The MB IEs from the association event may not be up-to-date and in some cases may actually be missing and updating the information based on other frames can improve robustness of FST exchanges. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-11-22 13:46:54 +01:00
#endif /* CONFIG_FST */
Add SME support (separate authentication and association) This can be used, e.g., with mac80211-based Linux drivers with nl80211. This allows over-the-air FT protocol to be used (IEEE 802.11r). Since the nl80211 interface needed for this is very recent (added today into wireless-testing.git), driver_nl80211.c has backwards compatibility code that uses WEXT for association if the kernel does not support the new commands. This compatibility code can be disabled by defining NO_WEXT_COMPAT. That code will also be removed at some point to clean up driver_nl80211.c.
2009-03-20 21:26:41 +01:00
sme_event_auth(wpa_s, data);
break;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
case EVENT_ASSOC:
wpa_supplicant_event_assoc(wpa_s, data);
Add support for offloading key management operations to the driver This commit introduces a QCA vendor command and event to provide an option to use extended versions of the nl80211 connect/roam operations in a way that allows drivers to offload key management operations to the driver/firmware. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-10-23 17:21:49 +02:00
if (data && data->assoc_info.authorized)
wpa_supplicant_event_assoc_auth(wpa_s, data);
Add QCA vendor attribute and event to indicate subnet change status This allows offloaded roaming to inform user space of the change in IP subnet post roaming. The device may have roamed to a network which is in a different subnet which will result in IP connectivity loss. Indicating the change in subnet enables the user space to refresh the IP address or to perform IP subnet validation if unknown status is indicated. The driver indication is reported with a new event from wpa_supplicant in the following format: CTRL-EVENT-SUBNET-STATUS-UPDATE status=<0/1/2> where 0 = unknown 1 = IP subnet unchanged (can continue to use the old IP address) 2 = IP subnet changed (need to get a new IP address) Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-11-16 07:05:05 +01:00
if (data) {
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_INFO,
WPA_EVENT_SUBNET_STATUS_UPDATE "status=%u",
data->assoc_info.subnet_status);
}
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
break;
case EVENT_DISASSOC:
Clean up wpa_supplicant_event() with deauth/disassoc helper functions wpa_supplicant_event() has grown overly large, so it is useful to split it into smaller pieces. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-07-21 15:40:40 +02:00
wpas_event_disassoc(wpa_s,
data ? &data->disassoc_info : NULL);
break;
SME: Deauthenticate to clear state after disassociation events cfg80211/mac80211 can get into somewhat confused state if the AP only disassociates us and leaves us in authenticated state. For now, force the state to be cleared with deauthentication to avoid confusing errors if we try to associate with the AP again. This gets rid of 30 second delay (scan timeout) in cases where only a disassociation frame is received from the AP.
2009-12-02 16:26:28 +01:00
case EVENT_DEAUTH:
Clean up wpa_supplicant_event() with deauth/disassoc helper functions wpa_supplicant_event() has grown overly large, so it is useful to split it into smaller pieces. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-07-21 15:40:40 +02:00
wpas_event_deauth(wpa_s,
data ? &data->deauth_info : NULL);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
break;
case EVENT_MICHAEL_MIC_FAILURE:
wpa_supplicant_event_michael_mic_failure(wpa_s, data);
break;
#ifndef CONFIG_NO_SCAN_PROCESSING
Track whether scan was started by us or an external program This can be used to improve scan behavior in cases external programs request scans directly from the driver. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-26 16:33:26 +01:00
case EVENT_SCAN_STARTED:
nl80211: Support vendor scan together with normal scan Allow wpa_supplicant to use vendor scan (if supported by the driver) together with the normal nl80211 scan and handling external scan events. Since this results in possibility of concurrent scan operations, some of the operations related to scan results need to check more carefully when an event is relevant for a specific interface. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-09-16 14:15:05 +02:00
if (wpa_s->own_scan_requested ||
(data && !data->scan_info.external_scan)) {
Show timing information about scan requests in debug log Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-26 16:52:56 +01:00
struct os_reltime diff;
nl80211: Support vendor scan together with normal scan Allow wpa_supplicant to use vendor scan (if supported by the driver) together with the normal nl80211 scan and handling external scan events. Since this results in possibility of concurrent scan operations, some of the operations related to scan results need to check more carefully when an event is relevant for a specific interface. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-09-16 14:15:05 +02:00
os_get_reltime(&wpa_s->scan_start_time);
Show timing information about scan requests in debug log Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-26 16:52:56 +01:00
os_reltime_sub(&wpa_s->scan_start_time,
&wpa_s->scan_trigger_time, &diff);
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Own scan request started a scan in %ld.%06ld seconds",
diff.sec, diff.usec);
Track whether scan was started by us or an external program This can be used to improve scan behavior in cases external programs request scans directly from the driver. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-26 16:33:26 +01:00
wpa_s->own_scan_requested = 0;
wpa_s->own_scan_running = 1;
Optional scan id for ctrl_iface SCAN requests This allows users of wpa_supplicant control interface to figure out when their specific scan command has been started and completed. For example: CTRL-EVENT-SCAN-STARTED > scan freq=2412,2417 passive=1 use_id=1 3 CTRL-EVENT-SCAN-RESULTS CTRL-EVENT-SCAN-STARTED id=3 CTRL-EVENT-SCAN-RESULTS id=3 Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-26 16:35:48 +01:00
if (wpa_s->last_scan_req == MANUAL_SCAN_REQ &&
wpa_s->manual_scan_use_id) {
Remove WPA_EVENT_SCAN_STARTED message from MSG_INFO log Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2014-08-15 01:56:00 +02:00
wpa_msg_ctrl(wpa_s, MSG_INFO,
WPA_EVENT_SCAN_STARTED "id=%u",
wpa_s->manual_scan_id);
Optional scan id for ctrl_iface SCAN requests This allows users of wpa_supplicant control interface to figure out when their specific scan command has been started and completed. For example: CTRL-EVENT-SCAN-STARTED > scan freq=2412,2417 passive=1 use_id=1 3 CTRL-EVENT-SCAN-RESULTS CTRL-EVENT-SCAN-STARTED id=3 CTRL-EVENT-SCAN-RESULTS id=3 Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-26 16:35:48 +01:00
} else {
Remove WPA_EVENT_SCAN_STARTED message from MSG_INFO log Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2014-08-15 01:56:00 +02:00
wpa_msg_ctrl(wpa_s, MSG_INFO,
WPA_EVENT_SCAN_STARTED);
Optional scan id for ctrl_iface SCAN requests This allows users of wpa_supplicant control interface to figure out when their specific scan command has been started and completed. For example: CTRL-EVENT-SCAN-STARTED > scan freq=2412,2417 passive=1 use_id=1 3 CTRL-EVENT-SCAN-RESULTS CTRL-EVENT-SCAN-STARTED id=3 CTRL-EVENT-SCAN-RESULTS id=3 Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-26 16:35:48 +01:00
}
Track whether scan was started by us or an external program This can be used to improve scan behavior in cases external programs request scans directly from the driver. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-26 16:33:26 +01:00
} else {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "External program started a scan");
Move external_scan_running to wpa_radio external_scan_running should be common to all interfaces that share a radio. This fixes a case where external_scan_running was set on a single interface, but did not block scan on other interfaces. Signed-off-by: Ben Rosenfeld <ben.rosenfeld@intel.com>
2015-01-19 02:44:08 +01:00
wpa_s->radio->external_scan_running = 1;
Remove WPA_EVENT_SCAN_STARTED message from MSG_INFO log Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2014-08-15 01:56:00 +02:00
wpa_msg_ctrl(wpa_s, MSG_INFO, WPA_EVENT_SCAN_STARTED);
Track whether scan was started by us or an external program This can be used to improve scan behavior in cases external programs request scans directly from the driver. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-26 16:33:26 +01:00
}
break;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
case EVENT_SCAN_RESULTS:
wpa_supplicant: Handle EVENT_SCAN_RESULTS when an interface is disabled An interface can be disabled while it has an ongoing scan request. In such a case, when the scan results notification is received, it was being ignored (as the interface is already disabled) so the scan state was not cleared. This can cause undetermined behavior for the next scan request. To handle this, clear the scan state when EVENT_SCAN_RESULTS is received and the interface is disabled. Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
2016-02-29 13:30:01 +01:00
if (wpa_s->wpa_state == WPA_INTERFACE_DISABLED) {
wpa_s->scan_res_handler = NULL;
wpa_s->own_scan_running = 0;
wpa_s->radio->external_scan_running = 0;
wpa_s->last_scan_req = NORMAL_SCAN_REQ;
break;
}
nl80211: Support vendor scan together with normal scan Allow wpa_supplicant to use vendor scan (if supported by the driver) together with the normal nl80211 scan and handling external scan events. Since this results in possibility of concurrent scan operations, some of the operations related to scan results need to check more carefully when an event is relevant for a specific interface. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-09-16 14:15:05 +02:00
if (!(data && data->scan_info.external_scan) &&
os_reltime_initialized(&wpa_s->scan_start_time)) {
Show timing information about scan requests in debug log Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-26 16:52:56 +01:00
struct os_reltime now, diff;
os_get_reltime(&now);
os_reltime_sub(&now, &wpa_s->scan_start_time, &diff);
wpa_s->scan_start_time.sec = 0;
wpa_s->scan_start_time.usec = 0;
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Scan completed in %ld.%06ld seconds",
diff.sec, diff.usec);
}
P2P: Fix P2P_CONNECT-auto fallback to GO Neg with group interface If a separate P2P group interface was used, P2P_CONNECT-auto fallback to GO Negotiation could result in use of freed memory and segmentation fault. This happened in cases where the peer GO was found in some old scans, but not in the first scan triggered by the P2P_CONNECT-auto command ("P2P: Peer was found running GO in older scan -> try to join the group" shows up in the debug log). In addition, the GO would still need to reply to PD Request to allow this code path to be triggered. When five scans for the GO were completed in this sequence, the P2P group interface was removed as part of falling back to GO Negotiation. However, that ended up dereferencing the freed wpa_s instance at the end of scan event processing. Fix this by reordering code a bit and breaking out from EVENT_SCAN_RESULTS processing if the interface could have been removed. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-02-08 10:38:56 +01:00
if (wpa_supplicant_event_scan_results(wpa_s, data))
break; /* interface may have been removed */
nl80211: Support vendor scan together with normal scan Allow wpa_supplicant to use vendor scan (if supported by the driver) together with the normal nl80211 scan and handling external scan events. Since this results in possibility of concurrent scan operations, some of the operations related to scan results need to check more carefully when an event is relevant for a specific interface. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-09-16 14:15:05 +02:00
if (!(data && data->scan_info.external_scan))
wpa_s->own_scan_running = 0;
if (data && data->scan_info.nl_scan_event)
wpa_s->radio->external_scan_running = 0;
Do not start wpa_radio work during externally triggered scan If an external program triggers a scan, wpa_supplicant does not have a wpa_radio work item for this operation to protect against other offchannel operations. This can result in operations failing, so try to avoid damage by not starting any new wpa_radio work items during a scan that was started by another process. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-01-04 09:33:14 +01:00
radio_work_check_next(wpa_s);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
break;
#endif /* CONFIG_NO_SCAN_PROCESSING */
case EVENT_ASSOCINFO:
wpa_supplicant_event_associnfo(wpa_s, data);
break;
case EVENT_INTERFACE_STATUS:
wpa_supplicant_event_interface_status(wpa_s, data);
break;
case EVENT_PMKID_CANDIDATE:
wpa_supplicant_event_pmkid_candidate(wpa_s, data);
break;
#ifdef CONFIG_PEERKEY
case EVENT_STKSTART:
wpa_supplicant_event_stkstart(wpa_s, data);
break;
#endif /* CONFIG_PEERKEY */
TDLS: Add initial support for TDLS (IEEE Std 802.11z-2010)
2010-10-07 09:26:56 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_TDLS
case EVENT_TDLS:
wpa_supplicant_event_tdls(wpa_s, data);
break;
#endif /* CONFIG_TDLS */
WNM: Use CONFIG_WNM more consistently Replace CONFIG_IEEE80211V with CONFIG_WNM to get more consistent build options for WNM-Sleep Mode operations. Previously it was possible to define CONFIG_IEEE80211V without CONFIG_WNM which would break the build. In addition, IEEE 802.11v has been merged into IEEE Std 802.11-2012 and WNM is a better term to use for this new functionality anyway. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-12-16 17:22:54 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_WNM
WNM: Add WNM-Sleep Mode for station mode Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-02-26 16:27:19 +01:00
case EVENT_WNM:
wpa_supplicant_event_wnm(wpa_s, data);
break;
WNM: Use CONFIG_WNM more consistently Replace CONFIG_IEEE80211V with CONFIG_WNM to get more consistent build options for WNM-Sleep Mode operations. Previously it was possible to define CONFIG_IEEE80211V without CONFIG_WNM which would break the build. In addition, IEEE 802.11v has been merged into IEEE Std 802.11-2012 and WNM is a better term to use for this new functionality anyway. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-12-16 17:22:54 +01:00
#endif /* CONFIG_WNM */
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_IEEE80211R
case EVENT_FT_RESPONSE:
wpa_supplicant_event_ft_response(wpa_s, data);
break;
#endif /* CONFIG_IEEE80211R */
Added initial step for IBSS RSN support This commit adds a new build option, CONFIG_IBSS_RSN=y, that can be used to enable RSN support for IBSS. This links in RSN Authenticator code from hostapd and adds code for managing per-peer information for IBSS. A new wpa_cli command or driver event can be used to request RSN authentication with an IBSS peer. New RSN Authenticator and Supplicant will be allocated for each peer. The basic state machine setup code is included in this commit, but the state machines are not properly started yet. In addition, some of the callback functions are not yet complete.
2009-01-15 00:21:55 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_IBSS_RSN
case EVENT_IBSS_RSN_START:
wpa_supplicant_event_ibss_rsn_start(wpa_s, data);
break;
#endif /* CONFIG_IBSS_RSN */
SME: Add processing for rejected associations
2009-04-01 16:10:36 +02:00
case EVENT_ASSOC_REJECT:
Do not segfault on EVENT_ASSOC_REJECT without BSSID
2010-11-26 16:38:46 +01:00
if (data->assoc_reject.bssid)
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_INFO, WPA_EVENT_ASSOC_REJECT
Report connection timeouts in CTRL-EVENT-ASSOC-REJECT Add a new "timeout" argument to the event message if the nl80211 message indicates that the connection failure is not due to an explicit AP rejection message. This makes it easier for external programs to figure out why the connection failed. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2016-05-30 23:11:42 +02:00
"bssid=" MACSTR " status_code=%u%s",
Do not segfault on EVENT_ASSOC_REJECT without BSSID
2010-11-26 16:38:46 +01:00
MAC2STR(data->assoc_reject.bssid),
Report connection timeouts in CTRL-EVENT-ASSOC-REJECT Add a new "timeout" argument to the event message if the nl80211 message indicates that the connection failure is not due to an explicit AP rejection message. This makes it easier for external programs to figure out why the connection failed. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2016-05-30 23:11:42 +02:00
data->assoc_reject.status_code,
data->assoc_reject.timed_out ? " timeout" : "");
Do not segfault on EVENT_ASSOC_REJECT without BSSID
2010-11-26 16:38:46 +01:00
else
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_INFO, WPA_EVENT_ASSOC_REJECT
Report connection timeouts in CTRL-EVENT-ASSOC-REJECT Add a new "timeout" argument to the event message if the nl80211 message indicates that the connection failure is not due to an explicit AP rejection message. This makes it easier for external programs to figure out why the connection failed. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2016-05-30 23:11:42 +02:00
"status_code=%u%s",
data->assoc_reject.status_code,
data->assoc_reject.timed_out ? " timeout" : "");
D-Bus: Add association response status code property for failure cases (Re)Association Response frame with status code other than 0 is now notified over DBUS as a part of PropertiesChanged signal. This can be used by application in case AP is denying association with status code 17 (band steering) so that it does not interfere in the BSSID selection logic of wpa_supplicant. Signed-off-by: Naveen Singh <nasingh@google.com>
2016-03-03 19:48:09 +01:00
wpa_s->assoc_status_code = data->assoc_reject.status_code;
wpas_notify_assoc_status_code(wpa_s);
Add ctrl_interface event for association rejected
2010-10-27 19:28:16 +02:00
if (wpa_s->drv_flags & WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_SME)
sme_event_assoc_reject(wpa_s, data);
Handle assoc reject events without wpa_supplicant SME If the driver indicates the association (or authentication) was rejected, wpa_supplicant should handle this connection failure similarly to other cases. Previously, this was only handled with drivers that use wpa_supplicant SME. In case of cfg80211-based drivers, a rejected association was actually already handled since cfg80211 generates a deauthentication event after indicating connection failure. However, rejected authentication resulted in wpa_supplicant waiting for authentication timeout to expire which is unnecessary long wait. Fix this by calling wpas_connection_failed() to use the common mechanism to reschedule a new connection attempt with the previously attempted BSSID blacklisted. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2012-11-03 12:50:17 +01:00
else {
const u8 *bssid = data->assoc_reject.bssid;
if (bssid == NULL || is_zero_ether_addr(bssid))
bssid = wpa_s->pending_bssid;
wpas_connection_failed(wpa_s, bssid);
wpa_supplicant_mark_disassoc(wpa_s);
}
SME: Add processing for rejected associations
2009-04-01 16:10:36 +02:00
break;
Add handling of SME auth/assoc timeout events This allows wpa_supplicant to start searching for other APs (or re-try) if the MLME times out.
2009-04-23 23:08:24 +02:00
case EVENT_AUTH_TIMED_OUT:
Ignore auth/assoc timeout events in mesh configuration It was possible for auth/assoc timeout/failure event from the driver to result in unexpected processing during mesh group setup if that operation was started before the previously started driver operation to association/connect had completed. Since those events cannot happen in mesh cases, ignore them to avoid issues due to this corner case. For example, monitor_iface_unknown_sta followed by wpas_mesh_secure test case resulted in failure without this change. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-11-30 14:42:26 +01:00
/* It is possible to get this event from earlier connection */
if (wpa_s->current_ssid &&
wpa_s->current_ssid->mode == WPAS_MODE_MESH) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
"Ignore AUTH_TIMED_OUT in mesh configuration");
break;
}
Add ctrl_interface event for association rejected
2010-10-27 19:28:16 +02:00
if (wpa_s->drv_flags & WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_SME)
sme_event_auth_timed_out(wpa_s, data);
Add handling of SME auth/assoc timeout events This allows wpa_supplicant to start searching for other APs (or re-try) if the MLME times out.
2009-04-23 23:08:24 +02:00
break;
case EVENT_ASSOC_TIMED_OUT:
Ignore auth/assoc timeout events in mesh configuration It was possible for auth/assoc timeout/failure event from the driver to result in unexpected processing during mesh group setup if that operation was started before the previously started driver operation to association/connect had completed. Since those events cannot happen in mesh cases, ignore them to avoid issues due to this corner case. For example, monitor_iface_unknown_sta followed by wpas_mesh_secure test case resulted in failure without this change. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-11-30 14:42:26 +01:00
/* It is possible to get this event from earlier connection */
if (wpa_s->current_ssid &&
wpa_s->current_ssid->mode == WPAS_MODE_MESH) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
"Ignore ASSOC_TIMED_OUT in mesh configuration");
break;
}
Add ctrl_interface event for association rejected
2010-10-27 19:28:16 +02:00
if (wpa_s->drv_flags & WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_SME)
sme_event_assoc_timed_out(wpa_s, data);
Add handling of SME auth/assoc timeout events This allows wpa_supplicant to start searching for other APs (or re-try) if the MLME times out.
2009-04-23 23:08:24 +02:00
break;
Use generic driver events for TX status and RX reporting Replace driver wrapper calls to hostapd_tx_status(), hostapd_rx_from_unknown_sta(), hostapd_mgmt_rx(), and hostapd_mgmt_tx_cb() with new generic driver events EVENT_TX_STATUS, EVENT_RX_FROM_UNKNOWN, and EVENT_RX_MGMT. This cleans up lot of the driver wrapper code to be less dependent on whether it is being used within wpa_supplicant AP mode or hostapd.
2009-12-13 22:05:39 +01:00
case EVENT_TX_STATUS:
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "EVENT_TX_STATUS dst=" MACSTR
" type=%d stype=%d",
MAC2STR(data->tx_status.dst),
data->tx_status.type, data->tx_status.stype);
GAS: Use off-channel operations for requests This separates off-channel Action frame TX/RX from P2P into a generic implementation that can now be used both for P2P and GAS needs.
2011-09-29 18:22:08 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_AP
P2P: Map driver events to P2P event notifications
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
if (wpa_s->ap_iface == NULL) {
GAS: Use off-channel operations for requests This separates off-channel Action frame TX/RX from P2P into a generic implementation that can now be used both for P2P and GAS needs.
2011-09-29 18:22:08 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_OFFCHANNEL
P2P: Map driver events to P2P event notifications
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
if (data->tx_status.type == WLAN_FC_TYPE_MGMT &&
data->tx_status.stype == WLAN_FC_STYPE_ACTION)
GAS: Use off-channel operations for requests This separates off-channel Action frame TX/RX from P2P into a generic implementation that can now be used both for P2P and GAS needs.
2011-09-29 18:22:08 +02:00
offchannel_send_action_tx_status(
P2P: Map driver events to P2P event notifications
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
wpa_s, data->tx_status.dst,
data->tx_status.data,
data->tx_status.data_len,
P2P: Skip GO Neg Conf ack failure workaround of send failures The workaround to ignore no ctrl::ack received for GO Negotiation Confirmation frame was only supposed to be used when the frame was actually transmitted and just the ack was not received. However, due to the way the driver failure on transmitting the frame were reported, this ended up getting applied for all failures in sending the GO Negotiation Confirmation frame. Improve this by providing a mechanism to indicate whether send_action operations fail locally before the frame was actually transmitted or because of not receiving ack frame after having transmitted the frame.
2010-10-19 11:47:33 +02:00
data->tx_status.ack ?
GAS: Use off-channel operations for requests This separates off-channel Action frame TX/RX from P2P into a generic implementation that can now be used both for P2P and GAS needs.
2011-09-29 18:22:08 +02:00
OFFCHANNEL_SEND_ACTION_SUCCESS :
OFFCHANNEL_SEND_ACTION_NO_ACK);
#endif /* CONFIG_OFFCHANNEL */
P2P: Map driver events to P2P event notifications
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
break;
}
GAS: Use off-channel operations for requests This separates off-channel Action frame TX/RX from P2P into a generic implementation that can now be used both for P2P and GAS needs.
2011-09-29 18:22:08 +02:00
#endif /* CONFIG_AP */
#ifdef CONFIG_OFFCHANNEL
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "EVENT_TX_STATUS pending_dst="
Fix sending non-Public Action frames over P2P Device interface The P2P Device interface can only send Public Action frames. Non-Public Action frames must be sent over a group interface. The previous implementation sometimes tried to send non-Public Action frames such as GO Discoverability over the P2P Device interface, however, the source address of the frame was set to the group interface address so the code in offchannel.c knew to select the correct interface for the TX. The check breaks when the P2P Device and group interfaces have the same MAC address. In this case the frame will be sent over the P2P Device interface and the send will fail. Fix this problem in two places: 1. In offchannel, route non-Public Action frames to the GO interface when the above conditions are met. 2. When a TX_STATUS event arrives on such routed frame, it will arrive on the GO interface but it must be handled by the P2P Device interface since it has the relevant state logic. Signed-off-by: Lior David <qca_liord@qca.qualcomm.com>
2016-03-30 13:57:31 +02:00
MACSTR, MAC2STR(wpa_s->p2pdev->pending_action_dst));
P2P: Map driver events to P2P event notifications
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
/*
* Catch TX status events for Action frames we sent via group
Fix sending non-Public Action frames over P2P Device interface The P2P Device interface can only send Public Action frames. Non-Public Action frames must be sent over a group interface. The previous implementation sometimes tried to send non-Public Action frames such as GO Discoverability over the P2P Device interface, however, the source address of the frame was set to the group interface address so the code in offchannel.c knew to select the correct interface for the TX. The check breaks when the P2P Device and group interfaces have the same MAC address. In this case the frame will be sent over the P2P Device interface and the send will fail. Fix this problem in two places: 1. In offchannel, route non-Public Action frames to the GO interface when the above conditions are met. 2. When a TX_STATUS event arrives on such routed frame, it will arrive on the GO interface but it must be handled by the P2P Device interface since it has the relevant state logic. Signed-off-by: Lior David <qca_liord@qca.qualcomm.com>
2016-03-30 13:57:31 +02:00
* interface in GO mode, or via standalone AP interface.
* Note, wpa_s->p2pdev will be the same as wpa_s->parent,
* except when the primary interface is used as a GO interface
* (for drivers which do not have group interface concurrency)
P2P: Map driver events to P2P event notifications
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
*/
if (data->tx_status.type == WLAN_FC_TYPE_MGMT &&
data->tx_status.stype == WLAN_FC_STYPE_ACTION &&
Fix sending non-Public Action frames over P2P Device interface The P2P Device interface can only send Public Action frames. Non-Public Action frames must be sent over a group interface. The previous implementation sometimes tried to send non-Public Action frames such as GO Discoverability over the P2P Device interface, however, the source address of the frame was set to the group interface address so the code in offchannel.c knew to select the correct interface for the TX. The check breaks when the P2P Device and group interfaces have the same MAC address. In this case the frame will be sent over the P2P Device interface and the send will fail. Fix this problem in two places: 1. In offchannel, route non-Public Action frames to the GO interface when the above conditions are met. 2. When a TX_STATUS event arrives on such routed frame, it will arrive on the GO interface but it must be handled by the P2P Device interface since it has the relevant state logic. Signed-off-by: Lior David <qca_liord@qca.qualcomm.com>
2016-03-30 13:57:31 +02:00
os_memcmp(wpa_s->p2pdev->pending_action_dst,
P2P: Map driver events to P2P event notifications
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
data->tx_status.dst, ETH_ALEN) == 0) {
GAS: Use off-channel operations for requests This separates off-channel Action frame TX/RX from P2P into a generic implementation that can now be used both for P2P and GAS needs.
2011-09-29 18:22:08 +02:00
offchannel_send_action_tx_status(
Fix sending non-Public Action frames over P2P Device interface The P2P Device interface can only send Public Action frames. Non-Public Action frames must be sent over a group interface. The previous implementation sometimes tried to send non-Public Action frames such as GO Discoverability over the P2P Device interface, however, the source address of the frame was set to the group interface address so the code in offchannel.c knew to select the correct interface for the TX. The check breaks when the P2P Device and group interfaces have the same MAC address. In this case the frame will be sent over the P2P Device interface and the send will fail. Fix this problem in two places: 1. In offchannel, route non-Public Action frames to the GO interface when the above conditions are met. 2. When a TX_STATUS event arrives on such routed frame, it will arrive on the GO interface but it must be handled by the P2P Device interface since it has the relevant state logic. Signed-off-by: Lior David <qca_liord@qca.qualcomm.com>
2016-03-30 13:57:31 +02:00
wpa_s->p2pdev, data->tx_status.dst,
P2P: Map driver events to P2P event notifications
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
data->tx_status.data,
data->tx_status.data_len,
P2P: Fix RX ack status on Action frames sent via interface in GO mode The wpa_supplicant_event() EVENT_TX_STATUS ack field needs to be converted to use wpas_send_action_tx_status() enum p2p_send_action_result in this case, too, to avoid getting incorrect TX status for P2P processing.
2010-11-24 13:25:33 +01:00
data->tx_status.ack ?
GAS: Use off-channel operations for requests This separates off-channel Action frame TX/RX from P2P into a generic implementation that can now be used both for P2P and GAS needs.
2011-09-29 18:22:08 +02:00
OFFCHANNEL_SEND_ACTION_SUCCESS :
OFFCHANNEL_SEND_ACTION_NO_ACK);
Use generic driver events for TX status and RX reporting Replace driver wrapper calls to hostapd_tx_status(), hostapd_rx_from_unknown_sta(), hostapd_mgmt_rx(), and hostapd_mgmt_tx_cb() with new generic driver events EVENT_TX_STATUS, EVENT_RX_FROM_UNKNOWN, and EVENT_RX_MGMT. This cleans up lot of the driver wrapper code to be less dependent on whether it is being used within wpa_supplicant AP mode or hostapd.
2009-12-13 22:05:39 +01:00
break;
P2P: Map driver events to P2P event notifications
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
}
GAS: Use off-channel operations for requests This separates off-channel Action frame TX/RX from P2P into a generic implementation that can now be used both for P2P and GAS needs.
2011-09-29 18:22:08 +02:00
#endif /* CONFIG_OFFCHANNEL */
#ifdef CONFIG_AP
Use generic driver events for TX status and RX reporting Replace driver wrapper calls to hostapd_tx_status(), hostapd_rx_from_unknown_sta(), hostapd_mgmt_rx(), and hostapd_mgmt_tx_cb() with new generic driver events EVENT_TX_STATUS, EVENT_RX_FROM_UNKNOWN, and EVENT_RX_MGMT. This cleans up lot of the driver wrapper code to be less dependent on whether it is being used within wpa_supplicant AP mode or hostapd.
2009-12-13 22:05:39 +01:00
switch (data->tx_status.type) {
case WLAN_FC_TYPE_MGMT:
ap_mgmt_tx_cb(wpa_s, data->tx_status.data,
data->tx_status.data_len,
data->tx_status.stype,
data->tx_status.ack);
break;
case WLAN_FC_TYPE_DATA:
ap_tx_status(wpa_s, data->tx_status.dst,
data->tx_status.data,
data->tx_status.data_len,
data->tx_status.ack);
break;
}
GAS: Use off-channel operations for requests This separates off-channel Action frame TX/RX from P2P into a generic implementation that can now be used both for P2P and GAS needs.
2011-09-29 18:22:08 +02:00
#endif /* CONFIG_AP */
Use generic driver events for TX status and RX reporting Replace driver wrapper calls to hostapd_tx_status(), hostapd_rx_from_unknown_sta(), hostapd_mgmt_rx(), and hostapd_mgmt_tx_cb() with new generic driver events EVENT_TX_STATUS, EVENT_RX_FROM_UNKNOWN, and EVENT_RX_MGMT. This cleans up lot of the driver wrapper code to be less dependent on whether it is being used within wpa_supplicant AP mode or hostapd.
2009-12-13 22:05:39 +01:00
break;
GAS: Use off-channel operations for requests This separates off-channel Action frame TX/RX from P2P into a generic implementation that can now be used both for P2P and GAS needs.
2011-09-29 18:22:08 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_AP
AP: Add explicit EAPOL TX status event The new event can be used when EAPOL TX status can't be reported as a complete 802.11 frame but is instead reported as just the EAPOL data as originally passed to hapd_send_eapol(). Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-11-19 12:00:30 +01:00
case EVENT_EAPOL_TX_STATUS:
ap_eapol_tx_status(wpa_s, data->eapol_tx_status.dst,
data->eapol_tx_status.data,
data->eapol_tx_status.data_len,
data->eapol_tx_status.ack);
break;
AP: Do station poll in driver wrapper This offloads the station polling to driver wrappers, which may offload it again to the driver. The hostap driver wrapper uses "real" data frames while nl80211 uses null data frames. Also add a specific event to indicate that a poll was successful for future use with the nl80211 driver.
2011-10-20 20:03:08 +02:00
case EVENT_DRIVER_CLIENT_POLL_OK:
ap_client_poll_ok(wpa_s, data->client_poll.addr);
break;
Use generic driver events for TX status and RX reporting Replace driver wrapper calls to hostapd_tx_status(), hostapd_rx_from_unknown_sta(), hostapd_mgmt_rx(), and hostapd_mgmt_tx_cb() with new generic driver events EVENT_TX_STATUS, EVENT_RX_FROM_UNKNOWN, and EVENT_RX_MGMT. This cleans up lot of the driver wrapper code to be less dependent on whether it is being used within wpa_supplicant AP mode or hostapd.
2009-12-13 22:05:39 +01:00
case EVENT_RX_FROM_UNKNOWN:
if (wpa_s->ap_iface == NULL)
break;
AP: Pass only bssid/addr/wds to EVENT_RX_FROM_UNKNOWN
2011-10-20 20:51:32 +02:00
ap_rx_from_unknown_sta(wpa_s, data->rx_from_unknown.addr,
data->rx_from_unknown.wds);
Use generic driver events for TX status and RX reporting Replace driver wrapper calls to hostapd_tx_status(), hostapd_rx_from_unknown_sta(), hostapd_mgmt_rx(), and hostapd_mgmt_tx_cb() with new generic driver events EVENT_TX_STATUS, EVENT_RX_FROM_UNKNOWN, and EVENT_RX_MGMT. This cleans up lot of the driver wrapper code to be less dependent on whether it is being used within wpa_supplicant AP mode or hostapd.
2009-12-13 22:05:39 +01:00
break;
nl80211: Handle CH_SWITCH event Some drivers may independently decide to switch channels. Handle this by updating the hostapd and wpa_supplicant AP and GO configuration. Signed-hostap: Thomas Pedersen <c_tpeder@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-06-25 13:45:14 +02:00
case EVENT_CH_SWITCH:
Handle channel switch notification for other interface types Channel switch notification was handled only for AP/GO interfaces. As the notification can be sent on other interface types as well, extend the handling to handle other interface types. Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
2015-09-08 11:46:24 +02:00
if (!data || !wpa_s->current_ssid)
nl80211: Handle CH_SWITCH event Some drivers may independently decide to switch channels. Handle this by updating the hostapd and wpa_supplicant AP and GO configuration. Signed-hostap: Thomas Pedersen <c_tpeder@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-06-25 13:45:14 +02:00
break;
Add CTRL-EVENT-CHANNEL-SWITCH event to indicate channel changes This provides information of the channel switch to wpa_supplicant control interface monitors. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2016-06-27 19:24:06 +02:00
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_INFO, WPA_EVENT_CHANNEL_SWITCH
"freq=%d ht_enabled=%d ch_offset=%d ch_width=%s cf1=%d cf2=%d",
data->ch_switch.freq,
data->ch_switch.ht_enabled,
data->ch_switch.ch_offset,
channel_width_to_string(data->ch_switch.ch_width),
data->ch_switch.cf1,
data->ch_switch.cf2);
Handle channel switch notification for other interface types Channel switch notification was handled only for AP/GO interfaces. As the notification can be sent on other interface types as well, extend the handling to handle other interface types. Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
2015-09-08 11:46:24 +02:00
wpa_s->assoc_freq = data->ch_switch.freq;
wpa_s->current_ssid->frequency = data->ch_switch.freq;
if (wpa_s->current_ssid->mode == WPAS_MODE_AP ||
wpa_s->current_ssid->mode == WPAS_MODE_P2P_GO ||
wpa_s->current_ssid->mode ==
WPAS_MODE_P2P_GROUP_FORMATION) {
wpas_ap_ch_switch(wpa_s, data->ch_switch.freq,
data->ch_switch.ht_enabled,
data->ch_switch.ch_offset,
data->ch_switch.ch_width,
data->ch_switch.cf1,
data->ch_switch.cf2);
}
P2P: Trigger channel selection correctly during CSA Do not consider moving GOs to a new channel if one of them is in the middle of CSA. In addition, call wpas_p2p_update_channel_list() after EVENT_CH_SWITCH is handled. Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
2015-09-08 11:46:19 +02:00
wpas_p2p_update_channel_list(wpa_s, WPAS_P2P_CHANNEL_UPDATE_CS);
nl80211: Handle CH_SWITCH event Some drivers may independently decide to switch channels. Handle this by updating the hostapd and wpa_supplicant AP and GO configuration. Signed-hostap: Thomas Pedersen <c_tpeder@qca.qualcomm.com>
2012-06-25 13:45:14 +02:00
break;
DFS: wpa_supplicant event processing Add radar event processing logic for AP/P2P GO. The DFS processing functions from hostapd are now used for these wpa_supplicant cases as well for both offloaded and non-offloaded DFS. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2015-03-05 03:03:39 +01:00
#ifdef NEED_AP_MLME
case EVENT_DFS_RADAR_DETECTED:
if (data)
wpas_event_dfs_radar_detected(wpa_s, &data->dfs_event);
break;
case EVENT_DFS_CAC_STARTED:
if (data)
wpas_event_dfs_cac_started(wpa_s, &data->dfs_event);
break;
case EVENT_DFS_CAC_FINISHED:
if (data)
wpas_event_dfs_cac_finished(wpa_s, &data->dfs_event);
break;
case EVENT_DFS_CAC_ABORTED:
if (data)
wpas_event_dfs_cac_aborted(wpa_s, &data->dfs_event);
break;
case EVENT_DFS_NOP_FINISHED:
if (data)
wpas_event_dfs_cac_nop_finished(wpa_s,
&data->dfs_event);
break;
#endif /* NEED_AP_MLME */
IBSS RSN: Add peer restart detection To better support the IBSS/RSN mechanism, wpa_supplicant has to be able to detect a possible peer reboot and in this case it should start a new EAPOL handshake. To perform such reboot detection wpa_supplicant has to perform an Open Authentication by sending an Authentication frame and then replying to it. IF an Authentication frame is received when the key have already been exchanged, wpa_supplicant understands that the peer has rebooted and can reset its state machine. Whenever a new peer is added to the IBSS wpa_supplicant will start the Open Authentication and only after having accomplished it will start the key exchange. If the driver does not support Authentication frame exchange initiated from user space, this step is skipped to maintain previous behavior (just go through EAPOL-Key frame processing). The Open Authentication was partly supported by the Linux kernel but now wpa_supplicant can register for Authentication frames, handle it in userspace and so avoid any possible race condition. Signed-hostap: Nicolas Cavallari <cavallar@lri.fr> Signed-hostap: Antonio Quartulli <antonio@open-mesh.com>
2013-07-21 14:56:53 +02:00
#endif /* CONFIG_AP */
DBus: Add ability to report probe requests Some applications require knowing about probe requests to identify devices. This can be the case in AP mode to see the devices before they connect, or even in P2P mode when operating as a P2P device to identify non-P2P peers (P2P peers are identified via PeerFound signals). As there are typically a lot of probe requests, require that an interested application subscribes to this signal so the bus isn't always flooded with these notifications. The notifications in DBus are then unicast only to that application. A small test script is also included. Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-04-01 20:13:38 +02:00
case EVENT_RX_MGMT: {
u16 fc, stype;
const struct ieee80211_mgmt *mgmt;
wpa_supplicant: Allow external management frame processing for testing This enables more convenient protocol testing of AP and P2P functionality in various error cases and unexpected sequences without having to implement each test scenario within wpa_supplicant. ext_mgmt_frame_handle parameter can be set to 1 to move all management frame processing into an external program through control interface events (MGMT-RX and MGMT-TX-STATUS) and command (MGMT_TX). This is similar to the test interface that was added to hostapd previously, but allows more control on offchannel operations and more direct integration with the internal P2P module. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-03-08 19:21:21 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS
if (wpa_s->ext_mgmt_frame_handling) {
struct rx_mgmt *rx = &data->rx_mgmt;
size_t hex_len = 2 * rx->frame_len + 1;
char *hex = os_malloc(hex_len);
if (hex) {
wpa_snprintf_hex(hex, hex_len,
rx->frame, rx->frame_len);
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_INFO, "MGMT-RX freq=%d datarate=%u ssi_signal=%d %s",
rx->freq, rx->datarate, rx->ssi_signal,
hex);
os_free(hex);
}
break;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS */
DBus: Add ability to report probe requests Some applications require knowing about probe requests to identify devices. This can be the case in AP mode to see the devices before they connect, or even in P2P mode when operating as a P2P device to identify non-P2P peers (P2P peers are identified via PeerFound signals). As there are typically a lot of probe requests, require that an interested application subscribes to this signal so the bus isn't always flooded with these notifications. The notifications in DBus are then unicast only to that application. A small test script is also included. Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-04-01 20:13:38 +02:00
mgmt = (const struct ieee80211_mgmt *)
data->rx_mgmt.frame;
fc = le_to_host16(mgmt->frame_control);
stype = WLAN_FC_GET_STYPE(fc);
IBSS RSN: Add peer restart detection To better support the IBSS/RSN mechanism, wpa_supplicant has to be able to detect a possible peer reboot and in this case it should start a new EAPOL handshake. To perform such reboot detection wpa_supplicant has to perform an Open Authentication by sending an Authentication frame and then replying to it. IF an Authentication frame is received when the key have already been exchanged, wpa_supplicant understands that the peer has rebooted and can reset its state machine. Whenever a new peer is added to the IBSS wpa_supplicant will start the Open Authentication and only after having accomplished it will start the key exchange. If the driver does not support Authentication frame exchange initiated from user space, this step is skipped to maintain previous behavior (just go through EAPOL-Key frame processing). The Open Authentication was partly supported by the Linux kernel but now wpa_supplicant can register for Authentication frames, handle it in userspace and so avoid any possible race condition. Signed-hostap: Nicolas Cavallari <cavallar@lri.fr> Signed-hostap: Antonio Quartulli <antonio@open-mesh.com>
2013-07-21 14:56:53 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_AP
P2P: Map driver events to P2P event notifications
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
if (wpa_s->ap_iface == NULL) {
IBSS RSN: Add peer restart detection To better support the IBSS/RSN mechanism, wpa_supplicant has to be able to detect a possible peer reboot and in this case it should start a new EAPOL handshake. To perform such reboot detection wpa_supplicant has to perform an Open Authentication by sending an Authentication frame and then replying to it. IF an Authentication frame is received when the key have already been exchanged, wpa_supplicant understands that the peer has rebooted and can reset its state machine. Whenever a new peer is added to the IBSS wpa_supplicant will start the Open Authentication and only after having accomplished it will start the key exchange. If the driver does not support Authentication frame exchange initiated from user space, this step is skipped to maintain previous behavior (just go through EAPOL-Key frame processing). The Open Authentication was partly supported by the Linux kernel but now wpa_supplicant can register for Authentication frames, handle it in userspace and so avoid any possible race condition. Signed-hostap: Nicolas Cavallari <cavallar@lri.fr> Signed-hostap: Antonio Quartulli <antonio@open-mesh.com>
2013-07-21 14:56:53 +02:00
#endif /* CONFIG_AP */
P2P: Map driver events to P2P event notifications
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_P2P
if (stype == WLAN_FC_STYPE_PROBE_REQ &&
wpa_supplicant: Do not use struct ieee80211_mgmt::u.probe_req This struct in the union is empty, but the design of using a zero-length u8 array here is not fully compatible with C++ and can result in undesired compiler warnings. Since there are no non-IE fields in the Probe Request frames, get the location of the variable length IEs simply by using the pointer to the frame header and the known header length. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2016-04-02 15:52:02 +02:00
data->rx_mgmt.frame_len > IEEE80211_HDRLEN) {
P2P: Map driver events to P2P event notifications
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
const u8 *src = mgmt->sa;
wpa_supplicant: Do not use struct ieee80211_mgmt::u.probe_req This struct in the union is empty, but the design of using a zero-length u8 array here is not fully compatible with C++ and can result in undesired compiler warnings. Since there are no non-IE fields in the Probe Request frames, get the location of the variable length IEs simply by using the pointer to the frame header and the known header length. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2016-04-02 15:52:02 +02:00
const u8 *ie;
size_t ie_len;
ie = data->rx_mgmt.frame + IEEE80211_HDRLEN;
ie_len = data->rx_mgmt.frame_len -
IEEE80211_HDRLEN;
Pass signal strength through, fix units The signal strength is currently never used as the only driver reporting it is nl80211 which uses IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_DB_ANTSIGNAL which is never populated by the kernel. The kernel will (soon) populate IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_DBM_ANTSIGNAL instead though, so use that. Also, since it was never really populated, we can redefine the signal field to be in dBm units only. My next patch will also require knowing the signal strength of probe requests throughout the code (where available), so add it to the necessary APIs. Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-04-01 17:48:12 +02:00
wpas_p2p_probe_req_rx(
wpa_s, src, mgmt->da,
mgmt->bssid, ie, ie_len,
P2P: Add rx_freq parameter to Probe Request frame handler In some cases, Probe Request frames can be received by a peer not only on a listen channel. In this case an additional rx_freq parameter explitly contains a Probe Request frame RX frequency. In case rx_freq is set to 0, a Probe Request frame RX channel is assumed to be our own listen channel (p2p->cfg->channel). Signed-off-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
2015-06-10 10:43:31 +02:00
data->rx_mgmt.freq,
Pass signal strength through, fix units The signal strength is currently never used as the only driver reporting it is nl80211 which uses IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_DB_ANTSIGNAL which is never populated by the kernel. The kernel will (soon) populate IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_DBM_ANTSIGNAL instead though, so use that. Also, since it was never really populated, we can redefine the signal field to be in dBm units only. My next patch will also require knowing the signal strength of probe requests throughout the code (where available), so add it to the necessary APIs. Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-04-01 17:48:12 +02:00
data->rx_mgmt.ssi_signal);
P2P: Map driver events to P2P event notifications
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
break;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_P2P */
IBSS RSN: Add peer restart detection To better support the IBSS/RSN mechanism, wpa_supplicant has to be able to detect a possible peer reboot and in this case it should start a new EAPOL handshake. To perform such reboot detection wpa_supplicant has to perform an Open Authentication by sending an Authentication frame and then replying to it. IF an Authentication frame is received when the key have already been exchanged, wpa_supplicant understands that the peer has rebooted and can reset its state machine. Whenever a new peer is added to the IBSS wpa_supplicant will start the Open Authentication and only after having accomplished it will start the key exchange. If the driver does not support Authentication frame exchange initiated from user space, this step is skipped to maintain previous behavior (just go through EAPOL-Key frame processing). The Open Authentication was partly supported by the Linux kernel but now wpa_supplicant can register for Authentication frames, handle it in userspace and so avoid any possible race condition. Signed-hostap: Nicolas Cavallari <cavallar@lri.fr> Signed-hostap: Antonio Quartulli <antonio@open-mesh.com>
2013-07-21 14:56:53 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_IBSS_RSN
mesh: Add mesh peering manager The mesh peering manager establishes and maintains links among mesh peers, tracking each peer link via a finite state machine. This implementation supports open mesh peerings. [assorted fixes from Yu Niiro <yu.niiro@gmail.com>] [more fixes from Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>] Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Ashok Nagarajan <ashok.dragon@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name> Signed-hostap: Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
2014-03-11 05:07:01 +01:00
if (wpa_s->current_ssid &&
wpa_s->current_ssid->mode == WPAS_MODE_IBSS &&
stype == WLAN_FC_STYPE_AUTH &&
IBSS RSN: Add peer restart detection To better support the IBSS/RSN mechanism, wpa_supplicant has to be able to detect a possible peer reboot and in this case it should start a new EAPOL handshake. To perform such reboot detection wpa_supplicant has to perform an Open Authentication by sending an Authentication frame and then replying to it. IF an Authentication frame is received when the key have already been exchanged, wpa_supplicant understands that the peer has rebooted and can reset its state machine. Whenever a new peer is added to the IBSS wpa_supplicant will start the Open Authentication and only after having accomplished it will start the key exchange. If the driver does not support Authentication frame exchange initiated from user space, this step is skipped to maintain previous behavior (just go through EAPOL-Key frame processing). The Open Authentication was partly supported by the Linux kernel but now wpa_supplicant can register for Authentication frames, handle it in userspace and so avoid any possible race condition. Signed-hostap: Nicolas Cavallari <cavallar@lri.fr> Signed-hostap: Antonio Quartulli <antonio@open-mesh.com>
2013-07-21 14:56:53 +02:00
data->rx_mgmt.frame_len >= 30) {
wpa_supplicant_event_ibss_auth(wpa_s, data);
break;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_IBSS_RSN */
Remove unnecessary EVENT_RX_ACTION This driver event was used separately for some Action frames, but all the driver wrappers converted to this from information that would have been enough to indicate an EVENT_RX_MGMT event. In addition, the received event was then converted back to a full IEEE 802.11 management frame for processing in most cases. This is unnecessary complexity, so get rid of the extra path and use EVENT_RX_MGMT for Action frames as well as other management frame subtypes. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-29 10:22:23 +01:00
if (stype == WLAN_FC_STYPE_ACTION) {
wpas_event_rx_mgmt_action(
Use clearer way of getting pointer to a frame (CID 62835) This avoids an incorrect ARRAY_VS_SINGLETON report for a case where a pointer is taken to the specified field in a frame and not to a single octet. Bounds checking was already handled separately. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-06-12 18:42:50 +02:00
wpa_s, data->rx_mgmt.frame,
data->rx_mgmt.frame_len,
wpa_supplicant: Handle link measurement requests Send link measurement response when a request is received. Advertise only RCPI, computing it from the RSSI of the request. The TX power field is left to be filled by the driver. All other fields are not published. Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
2014-11-05 09:42:56 +01:00
data->rx_mgmt.freq,
data->rx_mgmt.ssi_signal);
Remove unnecessary EVENT_RX_ACTION This driver event was used separately for some Action frames, but all the driver wrappers converted to this from information that would have been enough to indicate an EVENT_RX_MGMT event. In addition, the received event was then converted back to a full IEEE 802.11 management frame for processing in most cases. This is unnecessary complexity, so get rid of the extra path and use EVENT_RX_MGMT for Action frames as well as other management frame subtypes. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2013-12-29 10:22:23 +01:00
break;
}
mesh: Add mesh peering manager The mesh peering manager establishes and maintains links among mesh peers, tracking each peer link via a finite state machine. This implementation supports open mesh peerings. [assorted fixes from Yu Niiro <yu.niiro@gmail.com>] [more fixes from Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>] Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Ashok Nagarajan <ashok.dragon@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name> Signed-hostap: Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
2014-03-11 05:07:01 +01:00
if (wpa_s->ifmsh) {
mesh_mpm_mgmt_rx(wpa_s, &data->rx_mgmt);
break;
}
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "AP: ignore received "
"management frame in non-AP mode");
Use generic driver events for TX status and RX reporting Replace driver wrapper calls to hostapd_tx_status(), hostapd_rx_from_unknown_sta(), hostapd_mgmt_rx(), and hostapd_mgmt_tx_cb() with new generic driver events EVENT_TX_STATUS, EVENT_RX_FROM_UNKNOWN, and EVENT_RX_MGMT. This cleans up lot of the driver wrapper code to be less dependent on whether it is being used within wpa_supplicant AP mode or hostapd.
2009-12-13 22:05:39 +01:00
break;
IBSS RSN: Add peer restart detection To better support the IBSS/RSN mechanism, wpa_supplicant has to be able to detect a possible peer reboot and in this case it should start a new EAPOL handshake. To perform such reboot detection wpa_supplicant has to perform an Open Authentication by sending an Authentication frame and then replying to it. IF an Authentication frame is received when the key have already been exchanged, wpa_supplicant understands that the peer has rebooted and can reset its state machine. Whenever a new peer is added to the IBSS wpa_supplicant will start the Open Authentication and only after having accomplished it will start the key exchange. If the driver does not support Authentication frame exchange initiated from user space, this step is skipped to maintain previous behavior (just go through EAPOL-Key frame processing). The Open Authentication was partly supported by the Linux kernel but now wpa_supplicant can register for Authentication frames, handle it in userspace and so avoid any possible race condition. Signed-hostap: Nicolas Cavallari <cavallar@lri.fr> Signed-hostap: Antonio Quartulli <antonio@open-mesh.com>
2013-07-21 14:56:53 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_AP
P2P: Map driver events to P2P event notifications
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
}
DBus: Add ability to report probe requests Some applications require knowing about probe requests to identify devices. This can be the case in AP mode to see the devices before they connect, or even in P2P mode when operating as a P2P device to identify non-P2P peers (P2P peers are identified via PeerFound signals). As there are typically a lot of probe requests, require that an interested application subscribes to this signal so the bus isn't always flooded with these notifications. The notifications in DBus are then unicast only to that application. A small test script is also included. Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-04-01 20:13:38 +02:00
if (stype == WLAN_FC_STYPE_PROBE_REQ &&
wpa_supplicant: Do not use struct ieee80211_mgmt::u.probe_req This struct in the union is empty, but the design of using a zero-length u8 array here is not fully compatible with C++ and can result in undesired compiler warnings. Since there are no non-IE fields in the Probe Request frames, get the location of the variable length IEs simply by using the pointer to the frame header and the known header length. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2016-04-02 15:52:02 +02:00
data->rx_mgmt.frame_len > IEEE80211_HDRLEN) {
const u8 *ie;
size_t ie_len;
ie = data->rx_mgmt.frame + IEEE80211_HDRLEN;
ie_len = data->rx_mgmt.frame_len - IEEE80211_HDRLEN;
DBus: Add ability to report probe requests Some applications require knowing about probe requests to identify devices. This can be the case in AP mode to see the devices before they connect, or even in P2P mode when operating as a P2P device to identify non-P2P peers (P2P peers are identified via PeerFound signals). As there are typically a lot of probe requests, require that an interested application subscribes to this signal so the bus isn't always flooded with these notifications. The notifications in DBus are then unicast only to that application. A small test script is also included. Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-04-01 20:13:38 +02:00
wpas_notify_preq(wpa_s, mgmt->sa, mgmt->da,
mgmt->bssid, ie, ie_len,
data->rx_mgmt.ssi_signal);
}
Move struct hostapd_frame_info definition away from driver API This is internal data structure for hostapd/AP functionality and does not need to be defined in driver.h.
2010-01-03 11:37:02 +01:00
ap_mgmt_rx(wpa_s, &data->rx_mgmt);
IBSS RSN: Add peer restart detection To better support the IBSS/RSN mechanism, wpa_supplicant has to be able to detect a possible peer reboot and in this case it should start a new EAPOL handshake. To perform such reboot detection wpa_supplicant has to perform an Open Authentication by sending an Authentication frame and then replying to it. IF an Authentication frame is received when the key have already been exchanged, wpa_supplicant understands that the peer has rebooted and can reset its state machine. Whenever a new peer is added to the IBSS wpa_supplicant will start the Open Authentication and only after having accomplished it will start the key exchange. If the driver does not support Authentication frame exchange initiated from user space, this step is skipped to maintain previous behavior (just go through EAPOL-Key frame processing). The Open Authentication was partly supported by the Linux kernel but now wpa_supplicant can register for Authentication frames, handle it in userspace and so avoid any possible race condition. Signed-hostap: Nicolas Cavallari <cavallar@lri.fr> Signed-hostap: Antonio Quartulli <antonio@open-mesh.com>
2013-07-21 14:56:53 +02:00
#endif /* CONFIG_AP */
Use generic driver events for TX status and RX reporting Replace driver wrapper calls to hostapd_tx_status(), hostapd_rx_from_unknown_sta(), hostapd_mgmt_rx(), and hostapd_mgmt_tx_cb() with new generic driver events EVENT_TX_STATUS, EVENT_RX_FROM_UNKNOWN, and EVENT_RX_MGMT. This cleans up lot of the driver wrapper code to be less dependent on whether it is being used within wpa_supplicant AP mode or hostapd.
2009-12-13 22:05:39 +01:00
break;
DBus: Add ability to report probe requests Some applications require knowing about probe requests to identify devices. This can be the case in AP mode to see the devices before they connect, or even in P2P mode when operating as a P2P device to identify non-P2P peers (P2P peers are identified via PeerFound signals). As there are typically a lot of probe requests, require that an interested application subscribes to this signal so the bus isn't always flooded with these notifications. The notifications in DBus are then unicast only to that application. A small test script is also included. Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-04-01 20:13:38 +02:00
}
wpa_s AP: Deliver EVENT_RX_PROBE_REQ events to AP processing This is needed to allows WPS PBC session overlap detection to work with drivers that process Probe Request frames internally. This code is is run in hostapd, but the wpa_supplicant AP mode did not have call to the hostapd_probe_req_rx() function even though it registered handlers for hostapd Probe Request RX callbacks.
2011-02-08 13:32:35 +01:00
case EVENT_RX_PROBE_REQ:
Add sanity checks to EVENT_RX_PROBE_REQ event data Both the SA and IEs from the received Probe Request frames must be included and the Probe Request RX callback functions may assume that these are not NULL.
2011-04-14 01:39:25 +02:00
if (data->rx_probe_req.sa == NULL ||
data->rx_probe_req.ie == NULL)
break;
wpa_s AP: Deliver EVENT_RX_PROBE_REQ events to AP processing This is needed to allows WPS PBC session overlap detection to work with drivers that process Probe Request frames internally. This code is is run in hostapd, but the wpa_supplicant AP mode did not have call to the hostapd_probe_req_rx() function even though it registered handlers for hostapd Probe Request RX callbacks.
2011-02-08 13:32:35 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_AP
if (wpa_s->ap_iface) {
hostapd_probe_req_rx(wpa_s->ap_iface->bss[0],
data->rx_probe_req.sa,
P2P: Filter Probe Request frames based on DA and BSSID in Listen state Only accept Probe Request frames that have a Wildcard BSSID and a destination address that matches with our P2P Device Address or is the broadcast address per P2P specification 3.1.2.1.1.
2011-07-15 19:25:53 +02:00
data->rx_probe_req.da,
data->rx_probe_req.bssid,
wpa_s AP: Deliver EVENT_RX_PROBE_REQ events to AP processing This is needed to allows WPS PBC session overlap detection to work with drivers that process Probe Request frames internally. This code is is run in hostapd, but the wpa_supplicant AP mode did not have call to the hostapd_probe_req_rx() function even though it registered handlers for hostapd Probe Request RX callbacks.
2011-02-08 13:32:35 +01:00
data->rx_probe_req.ie,
Pass signal strength through, fix units The signal strength is currently never used as the only driver reporting it is nl80211 which uses IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_DB_ANTSIGNAL which is never populated by the kernel. The kernel will (soon) populate IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_DBM_ANTSIGNAL instead though, so use that. Also, since it was never really populated, we can redefine the signal field to be in dBm units only. My next patch will also require knowing the signal strength of probe requests throughout the code (where available), so add it to the necessary APIs. Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-04-01 17:48:12 +02:00
data->rx_probe_req.ie_len,
data->rx_probe_req.ssi_signal);
wpa_s AP: Deliver EVENT_RX_PROBE_REQ events to AP processing This is needed to allows WPS PBC session overlap detection to work with drivers that process Probe Request frames internally. This code is is run in hostapd, but the wpa_supplicant AP mode did not have call to the hostapd_probe_req_rx() function even though it registered handlers for hostapd Probe Request RX callbacks.
2011-02-08 13:32:35 +01:00
break;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_AP */
wpas_p2p_probe_req_rx(wpa_s, data->rx_probe_req.sa,
P2P: Filter Probe Request frames based on DA and BSSID in Listen state Only accept Probe Request frames that have a Wildcard BSSID and a destination address that matches with our P2P Device Address or is the broadcast address per P2P specification 3.1.2.1.1.
2011-07-15 19:25:53 +02:00
data->rx_probe_req.da,
data->rx_probe_req.bssid,
wpa_s AP: Deliver EVENT_RX_PROBE_REQ events to AP processing This is needed to allows WPS PBC session overlap detection to work with drivers that process Probe Request frames internally. This code is is run in hostapd, but the wpa_supplicant AP mode did not have call to the hostapd_probe_req_rx() function even though it registered handlers for hostapd Probe Request RX callbacks.
2011-02-08 13:32:35 +01:00
data->rx_probe_req.ie,
Pass signal strength through, fix units The signal strength is currently never used as the only driver reporting it is nl80211 which uses IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_DB_ANTSIGNAL which is never populated by the kernel. The kernel will (soon) populate IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_DBM_ANTSIGNAL instead though, so use that. Also, since it was never really populated, we can redefine the signal field to be in dBm units only. My next patch will also require knowing the signal strength of probe requests throughout the code (where available), so add it to the necessary APIs. Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-04-01 17:48:12 +02:00
data->rx_probe_req.ie_len,
P2P: Add rx_freq parameter to Probe Request frame handler In some cases, Probe Request frames can be received by a peer not only on a listen channel. In this case an additional rx_freq parameter explitly contains a Probe Request frame RX frequency. In case rx_freq is set to 0, a Probe Request frame RX channel is assumed to be our own listen channel (p2p->cfg->channel). Signed-off-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
2015-06-10 10:43:31 +02:00
0,
Pass signal strength through, fix units The signal strength is currently never used as the only driver reporting it is nl80211 which uses IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_DB_ANTSIGNAL which is never populated by the kernel. The kernel will (soon) populate IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_DBM_ANTSIGNAL instead though, so use that. Also, since it was never really populated, we can redefine the signal field to be in dBm units only. My next patch will also require knowing the signal strength of probe requests throughout the code (where available), so add it to the necessary APIs. Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-04-01 17:48:12 +02:00
data->rx_probe_req.ssi_signal);
FT: Add preliminary processing of FT Action Response from EVENT_RX_ACTION Previously, this was only done with userspace MLME (i.e., driver_test.c); now, driver_nl80211.c can deliver the FT Action Response (FT-over-DS) for processing. The reassociation after successful FT Action frame exchange is not yet implemented.
2010-03-11 23:43:00 +01:00
break;
P2P: Map driver events to P2P event notifications
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
case EVENT_REMAIN_ON_CHANNEL:
GAS: Use off-channel operations for requests This separates off-channel Action frame TX/RX from P2P into a generic implementation that can now be used both for P2P and GAS needs.
2011-09-29 18:22:08 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_OFFCHANNEL
offchannel_remain_on_channel_cb(
wpa_s, data->remain_on_channel.freq,
data->remain_on_channel.duration);
#endif /* CONFIG_OFFCHANNEL */
P2P: Map driver events to P2P event notifications
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
wpas_p2p_remain_on_channel_cb(
wpa_s, data->remain_on_channel.freq,
data->remain_on_channel.duration);
break;
case EVENT_CANCEL_REMAIN_ON_CHANNEL:
GAS: Use off-channel operations for requests This separates off-channel Action frame TX/RX from P2P into a generic implementation that can now be used both for P2P and GAS needs.
2011-09-29 18:22:08 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_OFFCHANNEL
offchannel_cancel_remain_on_channel_cb(
wpa_s, data->remain_on_channel.freq);
#endif /* CONFIG_OFFCHANNEL */
P2P: Map driver events to P2P event notifications
2010-07-18 23:30:25 +02:00
wpas_p2p_cancel_remain_on_channel_cb(
wpa_s, data->remain_on_channel.freq);
break;
Use driver event, EVENT_EAPOL_RX, for EAPOL frame indication
2010-01-03 16:44:40 +01:00
case EVENT_EAPOL_RX:
wpa_supplicant_rx_eapol(wpa_s, data->eapol_rx.src,
data->eapol_rx.data,
data->eapol_rx.data_len);
break;
bgscan: Add signal strength change events This allows bgscan modules to use more information to decide on when to perform background scans. bgscan_simple can now change between short and long background scan intervals based on signal strength and in addition, it can trigger immediate scans when the signal strength is detected to be dropping. bgscan_simple takes following parameters now: short interval:signal strength threshold:long interval For example: bgscan="simple:30:-45:300"
2010-03-29 00:32:34 +02:00
case EVENT_SIGNAL_CHANGE:
Add CTRL-EVENT-SIGNAL-CHANGE for bgscan signal update events This allows external programs to monitor driver signal change events through wpa_supplicant when bgscan is used. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-04-12 10:48:05 +02:00
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_INFO, WPA_EVENT_SIGNAL_CHANGE
"above=%d signal=%d noise=%d txrate=%d",
data->signal_change.above_threshold,
data->signal_change.current_signal,
data->signal_change.current_noise,
data->signal_change.current_txrate);
Update current BSS level when signal change event occurs When an EVENT_SIGNAL_CHANGE occurs the bgscan is informed about this change but the new RSSI value is not stored. In consequence, when roaming candidates are evaluated, the RSSI value of the current BSS used to compare is an old one obtained during the last scan rather than the new one given by the signal change event. This leads sometimes to bad decision when selecting a new BSS for roaming. This patch solves the issue by updating the current BSS level when receiving a signal change event in order to have a very up-to-date current signal value when choosing an new BSS. Signed-off-by: Matthieu Mauger <matthieux.mauger@intel.com>
2015-02-18 03:35:15 +01:00
wpa_bss_update_level(wpa_s->current_bss,
data->signal_change.current_signal);
bgscan: Add signal strength change events This allows bgscan modules to use more information to decide on when to perform background scans. bgscan_simple can now change between short and long background scan intervals based on signal strength and in addition, it can trigger immediate scans when the signal strength is detected to be dropping. bgscan_simple takes following parameters now: short interval:signal strength threshold:long interval For example: bgscan="simple:30:-45:300"
2010-03-29 00:32:34 +02:00
bgscan_notify_signal_change(
Add current signal strength into signal quality change events
2010-08-27 15:58:06 +02:00
wpa_s, data->signal_change.above_threshold,
bgscan: Add new channel condition parameters to signal change events bgscan modules can potentially get a richer feel for the channel condition and make better choices about scan/no-scan and roam/no-roam.
2010-10-12 19:03:36 +02:00
data->signal_change.current_signal,
data->signal_change.current_noise,
data->signal_change.current_txrate);
bgscan: Add signal strength change events This allows bgscan modules to use more information to decide on when to perform background scans. bgscan_simple can now change between short and long background scan intervals based on signal strength and in addition, it can trigger immediate scans when the signal strength is detected to be dropping. bgscan_simple takes following parameters now: short interval:signal strength threshold:long interval For example: bgscan="simple:30:-45:300"
2010-03-29 00:32:34 +02:00
break;
Add Linux rfkill support Add a new wpa_supplicant state: interface disabled. This can be used to allow wpa_supplicant to be running with the network interface even when the driver does not actually allow any radio operations (e.g., due to rfkill). Allow driver_nl80211.c and driver_wext.c to start while rfkill is in blocked state (i.e., when ifconfig up fails) and process rfkill events to block/unblock WLAN.
2010-05-23 09:27:32 +02:00
case EVENT_INTERFACE_ENABLED:
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Interface was enabled");
Add Linux rfkill support Add a new wpa_supplicant state: interface disabled. This can be used to allow wpa_supplicant to be running with the network interface even when the driver does not actually allow any radio operations (e.g., due to rfkill). Allow driver_nl80211.c and driver_wext.c to start while rfkill is in blocked state (i.e., when ifconfig up fails) and process rfkill events to block/unblock WLAN.
2010-05-23 09:27:32 +02:00
if (wpa_s->wpa_state == WPA_INTERFACE_DISABLED) {
Update internal MAC address on EVENT_INTERFACE_ENABLED events This allows the MAC address of the interface to be changed when the interface is set down even if the interface does not get completed removed and re-added. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-12-03 12:20:40 +01:00
wpa_supplicant_update_mac_addr(wpa_s);
P2P: Do not initiate scan on P2P Device when enabled Do not start a scan on a P2P Device interface when processing an interface enabled event. Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
2014-03-27 07:58:29 +01:00
if (wpa_s->p2p_mgmt) {
wpa_supplicant_set_state(wpa_s,
WPA_DISCONNECTED);
break;
}
Fix wpa_supplicant build without CONFIG_WPS and CONFIG_AP
2010-10-07 09:41:58 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_AP
Fix AP mode in wpa_supplicant with interface events Needs to not trigger a scan here when the AP mode setup sets interface down/up.
2010-10-06 16:10:07 +02:00
if (!wpa_s->ap_iface) {
wpa_supplicant_set_state(wpa_s,
WPA_DISCONNECTED);
Handle interface disabled/enabled more consistently It was possible for the interface not to be marked in INTERFACE_DISABLED state in case the event was processed for P2P GO because the wpa_s instance could have been removed in case of a separate group interface. Change the state first to avoid leaving different state for the case where separate group interface is not used. Mark scan to be a normal scan on INTERFACE_ENABLED so that scanning rules (e.g., skip scan if no networks enabled) get used consistently. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-01-08 21:39:18 +01:00
wpa_s->scan_req = NORMAL_SCAN_REQ;
Fix AP mode in wpa_supplicant with interface events Needs to not trigger a scan here when the AP mode setup sets interface down/up.
2010-10-06 16:10:07 +02:00
wpa_supplicant_req_scan(wpa_s, 0, 0);
} else
wpa_supplicant_set_state(wpa_s,
WPA_COMPLETED);
Fix wpa_supplicant build without CONFIG_WPS and CONFIG_AP
2010-10-07 09:41:58 +02:00
#else /* CONFIG_AP */
wpa_supplicant_set_state(wpa_s, WPA_DISCONNECTED);
wpa_supplicant_req_scan(wpa_s, 0, 0);
#endif /* CONFIG_AP */
Add Linux rfkill support Add a new wpa_supplicant state: interface disabled. This can be used to allow wpa_supplicant to be running with the network interface even when the driver does not actually allow any radio operations (e.g., due to rfkill). Allow driver_nl80211.c and driver_wext.c to start while rfkill is in blocked state (i.e., when ifconfig up fails) and process rfkill events to block/unblock WLAN.
2010-05-23 09:27:32 +02:00
}
break;
case EVENT_INTERFACE_DISABLED:
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Interface was disabled");
P2P: Handle INTERFACE_DISABLED event on a P2P GO interface An INTERFACE_DISABLED event received on an interface that is currently operating a P2P GO means that the group session ended. In such a case, if the interface was dynamically added remove it, and if not, remove all the network blocks that are temporary, assuming that if needed a new session will be started by an external entity. The use case was triggering rfkill (both SW and HW). This case popped up as part of a testing cycle, where after a toggle in the rfkill state, the result was that the interface was not deleted, but on the other hand the wpa_supplicant did not configure the kernel to re-start the AP functionality again. Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
2013-09-02 14:40:59 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_P2P
if (wpa_s->p2p_group_interface == P2P_GROUP_INTERFACE_GO ||
(wpa_s->current_ssid && wpa_s->current_ssid->p2p_group &&
wpa_s->current_ssid->mode == WPAS_MODE_P2P_GO)) {
Handle interface disabled/enabled more consistently It was possible for the interface not to be marked in INTERFACE_DISABLED state in case the event was processed for P2P GO because the wpa_s instance could have been removed in case of a separate group interface. Change the state first to avoid leaving different state for the case where separate group interface is not used. Mark scan to be a normal scan on INTERFACE_ENABLED so that scanning rules (e.g., skip scan if no networks enabled) get used consistently. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-01-08 21:39:18 +01:00
/*
* Mark interface disabled if this happens to end up not
* being removed as a separate P2P group interface.
*/
wpa_supplicant_set_state(wpa_s, WPA_INTERFACE_DISABLED);
P2P: Handle INTERFACE_DISABLED event on a P2P GO interface An INTERFACE_DISABLED event received on an interface that is currently operating a P2P GO means that the group session ended. In such a case, if the interface was dynamically added remove it, and if not, remove all the network blocks that are temporary, assuming that if needed a new session will be started by an external entity. The use case was triggering rfkill (both SW and HW). This case popped up as part of a testing cycle, where after a toggle in the rfkill state, the result was that the interface was not deleted, but on the other hand the wpa_supplicant did not configure the kernel to re-start the AP functionality again. Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
2013-09-02 14:40:59 +02:00
/*
* The interface was externally disabled. Remove
* it assuming an external entity will start a
* new session if needed.
*/
P2P: Indicate reason=UNAVAILABLE for group netdev going down There is a race condition between receiving an AP stopped event and netdev down event. These resulted in different group removal reasons on a GO device (UNAVAILABLE for stop AP event coming first and REQUESTED for netdev event first). Make this more consistent by reporting UNAVAILABLE for both possible cases. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-01-08 21:13:17 +01:00
if (wpa_s->current_ssid &&
wpa_s->current_ssid->p2p_group)
wpas_p2p_interface_unavailable(wpa_s);
else
wpas_p2p_disconnect(wpa_s);
Handle interface disabled/enabled more consistently It was possible for the interface not to be marked in INTERFACE_DISABLED state in case the event was processed for P2P GO because the wpa_s instance could have been removed in case of a separate group interface. Change the state first to avoid leaving different state for the case where separate group interface is not used. Mark scan to be a normal scan on INTERFACE_ENABLED so that scanning rules (e.g., skip scan if no networks enabled) get used consistently. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2015-01-08 21:39:18 +01:00
/*
* wpa_s instance may have been freed, so must not use
* it here anymore.
*/
P2P: Handle INTERFACE_DISABLED event on a P2P GO interface An INTERFACE_DISABLED event received on an interface that is currently operating a P2P GO means that the group session ended. In such a case, if the interface was dynamically added remove it, and if not, remove all the network blocks that are temporary, assuming that if needed a new session will be started by an external entity. The use case was triggering rfkill (both SW and HW). This case popped up as part of a testing cycle, where after a toggle in the rfkill state, the result was that the interface was not deleted, but on the other hand the wpa_supplicant did not configure the kernel to re-start the AP functionality again. Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
2013-09-02 14:40:59 +02:00
break;
}
P2P: Clear P2P state if active interface is disabled The radio works for the interface get removed if interface is disabled. This could have left P2P module in invalid state if the interface got disabled during a p2p_find or p2p_listen operation. Clear the state in such a case to avoid blocking following operations due to P2P module assuming it is still in progress of doing something. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-05-15 20:32:54 +02:00
if (wpa_s->p2p_scan_work && wpa_s->global->p2p &&
p2p_in_progress(wpa_s->global->p2p) > 1) {
/* This radio work will be cancelled, so clear P2P
* state as well.
*/
p2p_stop_find(wpa_s->global->p2p);
}
P2P: Handle INTERFACE_DISABLED event on a P2P GO interface An INTERFACE_DISABLED event received on an interface that is currently operating a P2P GO means that the group session ended. In such a case, if the interface was dynamically added remove it, and if not, remove all the network blocks that are temporary, assuming that if needed a new session will be started by an external entity. The use case was triggering rfkill (both SW and HW). This case popped up as part of a testing cycle, where after a toggle in the rfkill state, the result was that the interface was not deleted, but on the other hand the wpa_supplicant did not configure the kernel to re-start the AP functionality again. Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
2013-09-02 14:40:59 +02:00
#endif /* CONFIG_P2P */
Indicate disconnection event on interface disabled It is possible for the disconnection event from the driver to not get delivered when interface is disabled. To maintain consistent ctrl_iface event behavior, indicate CTRL-EVENT-DISCONNECTED in such a case if we were in connected state. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-04-26 15:42:45 +02:00
if (wpa_s->wpa_state >= WPA_AUTHENTICATING) {
/*
* Indicate disconnection to keep ctrl_iface events
* consistent.
*/
wpa_supplicant_event_disassoc(
wpa_s, WLAN_REASON_DEAUTH_LEAVING, 1);
}
Add Linux rfkill support Add a new wpa_supplicant state: interface disabled. This can be used to allow wpa_supplicant to be running with the network interface even when the driver does not actually allow any radio operations (e.g., due to rfkill). Allow driver_nl80211.c and driver_wext.c to start while rfkill is in blocked state (i.e., when ifconfig up fails) and process rfkill events to block/unblock WLAN.
2010-05-23 09:27:32 +02:00
wpa_supplicant_mark_disassoc(wpa_s);
wpa_supplicant: Complete radio works on disable event While testing rfkill blocking of a scanning interface, it was seen that the ongoing scan never completes. This happens since EVENT_SCAN_RESULTS is discarded on a disabled interface. Fix this and also other possible radio work completion issues by removing all the radio works (including started) of the disabled interface. To be able to remove already started radio works, make their callbacks be reentrant with deinit flag (when the work is started), so each radio work should be able to handle its own termination. Signed-hostap: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
2014-02-13 10:24:00 +01:00
radio_remove_works(wpa_s, NULL, 0);
Add Linux rfkill support Add a new wpa_supplicant state: interface disabled. This can be used to allow wpa_supplicant to be running with the network interface even when the driver does not actually allow any radio operations (e.g., due to rfkill). Allow driver_nl80211.c and driver_wext.c to start while rfkill is in blocked state (i.e., when ifconfig up fails) and process rfkill events to block/unblock WLAN.
2010-05-23 09:27:32 +02:00
wpa_supplicant_set_state(wpa_s, WPA_INTERFACE_DISABLED);
break;
P2P: Add mechanism for updating P2P channel list based on driver events This allows P2P channel list to be updated whenever the driver changes its list of allowed channels, e.g., based on country code from scan results.
2010-10-15 17:55:22 +02:00
case EVENT_CHANNEL_LIST_CHANGED:
Add a wpa_supplicant ctrl_iface event for regdom changes CTRL-EVENT-REGDOM-CHANGE event provides an external notification of regulatory domain (and any driver channel list) changes. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2014-04-13 15:32:38 +02:00
wpa_supplicant_update_channel_list(
wpa_s, &data->channel_list_changed);
P2P: Remove P2P group on driver resource becoming unavailable Add a new driver event, EVENT_INTERFACE_UNAVAILABLE, for indicating that the driver is not able to continue operating the virtual interface in its current mode anymore, e.g., due to operating channel for GO interface forced to a DFS channel by another virtual interface. When this happens for a P2P group interface, the P2P group will be terminated and P2P-GROUP-REMOVED event shows the reason for this as follows: P2P-GROUP-REMOVED wlan0 GO reason=UNAVAILABLE
2010-10-25 18:16:11 +02:00
break;
case EVENT_INTERFACE_UNAVAILABLE:
wpas_p2p_interface_unavailable(wpa_s);
P2P: Add support for automatic channel selection at GO The driver wrapper may now indicate the preferred channel (e.g., based on scan results) on both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands (and an overall best frequency). When setting up a GO, this preference information is used to select the operating channel if configuration does not include hardcoded channel. Similarly, this information can be used during GO Negotiation to indicate preference for a specific channel based on current channel conditions. p2p_group_add command can now use special values (freq=2 and freq=5) to indicate that the GO is to be started on the specified band.
2010-11-10 12:33:47 +01:00
break;
case EVENT_BEST_CHANNEL:
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG, "Best channel event received "
"(%d %d %d)",
data->best_chan.freq_24, data->best_chan.freq_5,
data->best_chan.freq_overall);
P2P: Add support for automatic channel selection at GO The driver wrapper may now indicate the preferred channel (e.g., based on scan results) on both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands (and an overall best frequency). When setting up a GO, this preference information is used to select the operating channel if configuration does not include hardcoded channel. Similarly, this information can be used during GO Negotiation to indicate preference for a specific channel based on current channel conditions. p2p_group_add command can now use special values (freq=2 and freq=5) to indicate that the GO is to be started on the specified band.
2010-11-10 12:33:47 +01:00
wpa_s->best_24_freq = data->best_chan.freq_24;
wpa_s->best_5_freq = data->best_chan.freq_5;
wpa_s->best_overall_freq = data->best_chan.freq_overall;
wpas_p2p_update_best_channels(wpa_s, data->best_chan.freq_24,
data->best_chan.freq_5,
data->best_chan.freq_overall);
P2P: Add mechanism for updating P2P channel list based on driver events This allows P2P channel list to be updated whenever the driver changes its list of allowed channels, e.g., based on country code from scan results.
2010-10-15 17:55:22 +02:00
break;
Use SA Query procedure to recovery from AP/STA state mismatch If a station received unprotected Deauthentication or Disassociation frame with reason code 6 or 7 from the current AP, there may be a mismatch in association state between the AP and STA. Verify whether this is the case by using SA Query procedure. If not response is received from the AP, deauthenticate. This implementation is only for user space SME with driver_nl80211.c.
2010-12-19 10:58:00 +01:00
case EVENT_UNPROT_DEAUTH:
wpa_supplicant_event_unprot_deauth(wpa_s,
&data->unprot_deauth);
break;
case EVENT_UNPROT_DISASSOC:
wpa_supplicant_event_unprot_disassoc(wpa_s,
&data->unprot_disassoc);
break;
Allow AP mode to disconnect STAs based on low ACK condition The nl80211 driver can report low ACK condition (in fact it reports complete loss right now only). Use that, along with a config option, to disconnect stations when the data connection is not working properly, e.g., due to the STA having went outside the range of the AP. This is disabled by default and can be enabled with disassoc_low_ack=1 in hostapd or wpa_supplicant configuration file. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-12-28 16:15:01 +01:00
case EVENT_STATION_LOW_ACK:
#ifdef CONFIG_AP
if (wpa_s->ap_iface && data)
hostapd_event_sta_low_ack(wpa_s->ap_iface->bss[0],
data->low_ack.addr);
#endif /* CONFIG_AP */
TDLS: Implement low-ack event for lost TDLS peers Disable the direct connection when a TDLS peer stops responding to packets, as indicated by the "LOW ACK" event coming from a driver. Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com> Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
2011-09-26 12:55:30 +02:00
#ifdef CONFIG_TDLS
if (data)
TDLS: Handle unreachable link teardown for external setup If a link is unreachable, the specification mandates we should send a teardown packet via the AP with a specific teardown reason. Force this by first disabling the link and only then sending the teardown packet for the LOW_ACK event. Rename the TDLS LOW_ACK event handler to better reflect its purpose. Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
2014-06-10 20:19:04 +02:00
wpa_tdls_disable_unreachable_link(wpa_s->wpa,
data->low_ack.addr);
TDLS: Implement low-ack event for lost TDLS peers Disable the direct connection when a TDLS peer stops responding to packets, as indicated by the "LOW ACK" event coming from a driver. Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com> Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
2011-09-26 12:55:30 +02:00
#endif /* CONFIG_TDLS */
Allow AP mode to disconnect STAs based on low ACK condition The nl80211 driver can report low ACK condition (in fact it reports complete loss right now only). Use that, along with a config option, to disconnect stations when the data connection is not working properly, e.g., due to the STA having went outside the range of the AP. This is disabled by default and can be enabled with disassoc_low_ack=1 in hostapd or wpa_supplicant configuration file. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-12-28 16:15:01 +01:00
break;
IBSS RSN: Clear IBSS RSN peers based on peer lost events
2011-03-18 16:04:46 +01:00
case EVENT_IBSS_PEER_LOST:
#ifdef CONFIG_IBSS_RSN
ibss_rsn_stop(wpa_s->ibss_rsn, data->ibss_peer_lost.peer);
#endif /* CONFIG_IBSS_RSN */
break;
nl80211: Support GTK rekey offload Add support to wpa_supplicant for device-based GTK rekeying. In order to support that, pass the KEK, KCK, and replay counter to the driver, and handle rekey events that update the latter. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-07-12 20:22:51 +02:00
case EVENT_DRIVER_GTK_REKEY:
if (os_memcmp(data->driver_gtk_rekey.bssid,
wpa_s->bssid, ETH_ALEN))
break;
if (!wpa_s->wpa)
break;
wpa_sm_update_replay_ctr(wpa_s->wpa,
data->driver_gtk_rekey.replay_ctr);
break;
Add scheduled scan driver operations In new Linux kernel versions (>=3.0), nl80211 adds scheduled scan capability. In order to use this feature to its full extent, we need to support it in the wpa_supplicant core, so that it can also be used by other drivers. This commit adds initial scheduled scan support operations and events. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
2011-09-27 21:21:29 +02:00
case EVENT_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED:
wpa_s->sched_scanning = 0;
Fix scan rescheduling from wpas_stop_pno to check postponed case Commit 02e122a995dea947a2ad2c0d85190d709f9128b7 ('Reschedule scan from wpas_stop_pno if it was postponed') uses wpa_s->scanning as the only condition for automatically starting a postponed scan request from EVENT_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event handler. However, wpa_s->scanning may be set for sched_scan and as such, this can result in unexpected extra scans without there having been any real postponed request. Make this more accurate by verifying that there really is a pending request for a scan before speeding up its start. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2016-03-03 10:04:38 +01:00
resched = wpa_s->scanning && wpas_scan_scheduled(wpa_s);
Add scheduled scan driver operations In new Linux kernel versions (>=3.0), nl80211 adds scheduled scan capability. In order to use this feature to its full extent, we need to support it in the wpa_supplicant core, so that it can also be used by other drivers. This commit adds initial scheduled scan support operations and events. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
2011-09-27 21:21:29 +02:00
wpa_supplicant_notify_scanning(wpa_s, 0);
Process EVENT_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED partially if interface is disabled The internal sched_scanning state needs to be cleared on this event even if the events happen to get ordered in a way that the interface gets disabled just prior to EVENT_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2011-12-21 12:36:58 +01:00
if (wpa_s->wpa_state == WPA_INTERFACE_DISABLED)
break;
Add scheduled scan driver operations In new Linux kernel versions (>=3.0), nl80211 adds scheduled scan capability. In order to use this feature to its full extent, we need to support it in the wpa_supplicant core, so that it can also be used by other drivers. This commit adds initial scheduled scan support operations and events. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
2011-09-27 21:21:29 +02:00
/*
wpa_supplicant: Schedule PNO on completion of ongoing sched_scan When start PNO request comes from control interface, wpa_supplicant should wait until ongoing sched_scan (triggered by wpa_supplicant) gets cancelled. Issuing cancel sched_scan and start PNO scan one after another from pno_start() would lead wpa_supplicant to clear wps->sched_scanning flag while getting sched_scan stopped event from driver for cancel sched_scan request. In fact, PNO scan will be in progress in driver and wpa_s->sched_scanning will not be set in such cases. In addition to this change, RSSI threshold limit is passed as part of start sched_scan request. This was previously set only in pno_start(), but the same parameter should be available for generic sched_scan calls as well and this can now be reached through the new PNO start sequence. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-01-22 15:15:23 +01:00
* Start a new sched scan to continue searching for more SSIDs
* either if timed out or PNO schedule scan is pending.
Add scheduled scan driver operations In new Linux kernel versions (>=3.0), nl80211 adds scheduled scan capability. In order to use this feature to its full extent, we need to support it in the wpa_supplicant core, so that it can also be used by other drivers. This commit adds initial scheduled scan support operations and events. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
2011-09-27 21:21:29 +02:00
*/
PNO: Change sched_scan_stopped event to handle pending PNO properly When a sched_scan_stopped event is received and there is a pending PNO, it used regular scheduled scan parameters instead of PNO specific parameters. Change it by calling wpas_start_pno(). Signed-off-by: Alexander Bondar <alexander.bondar@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
2014-02-26 07:04:11 +01:00
if (wpa_s->sched_scan_timed_out) {
wpa_supplicant_req_sched_scan(wpa_s);
} else if (wpa_s->pno_sched_pending) {
wpa_s->pno_sched_pending = 0;
wpas_start_pno(wpa_s);
Reschedule scan from wpas_stop_pno if it was postponed This reschedules the postponed scan request (if such a request is pending) from EVENT_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event handler to speed up scanning after PNO/sched_scan stop has been requested. Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2015-03-30 22:44:11 +02:00
} else if (resched) {
wpa_supplicant_req_scan(wpa_s, 0, 0);
wpa_supplicant: Schedule PNO on completion of ongoing sched_scan When start PNO request comes from control interface, wpa_supplicant should wait until ongoing sched_scan (triggered by wpa_supplicant) gets cancelled. Issuing cancel sched_scan and start PNO scan one after another from pno_start() would lead wpa_supplicant to clear wps->sched_scanning flag while getting sched_scan stopped event from driver for cancel sched_scan request. In fact, PNO scan will be in progress in driver and wpa_s->sched_scanning will not be set in such cases. In addition to this change, RSSI threshold limit is passed as part of start sched_scan request. This was previously set only in pno_start(), but the same parameter should be available for generic sched_scan calls as well and this can now be reached through the new PNO start sequence. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-01-22 15:15:23 +01:00
}
Add scheduled scan driver operations In new Linux kernel versions (>=3.0), nl80211 adds scheduled scan capability. In order to use this feature to its full extent, we need to support it in the wpa_supplicant core, so that it can also be used by other drivers. This commit adds initial scheduled scan support operations and events. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
2011-09-27 21:21:29 +02:00
break;
Allow drivers to indicate WPS push button in station mode EVENT_WPS_BUTTON_PUSHED wpa_supplicant_event can now be used in station mode driver_*.c to indicate that a push button has been pushed. This will activate WPS PBC mode.
2011-03-15 17:59:36 +01:00
case EVENT_WPS_BUTTON_PUSHED:
#ifdef CONFIG_WPS
wpas_wps_start_pbc(wpa_s, NULL, 0);
#endif /* CONFIG_WPS */
break;
P2P: Apply unsafe frequency rules to available channels This adds a QCA vendor specific nl80211 event to allow the driver to indicate a list of frequency ranges that should be avoided due to interference or possible known co-existance constraints. Such frequencies are marked as not allowed for P2P use to force groups to be formed on different channels. If a P2P GO is operating on a channel that the driver recommended not to use, a notification about this is sent on the control interface and upper layer code may decide to tear down the group and optionally restart it on another channel. As a TODO item, this could also be changed to use CSA to avoid removing the group. Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2014-01-24 15:14:29 +01:00
case EVENT_AVOID_FREQUENCIES:
wpa_supplicant_notify_avoid_freq(wpa_s, data);
break;
nl80211: Add ctrl_iface message for AP mode connection rejection When AP mode operation reject the client, nl80211 layer advertises the connect failed event with the reason for failures (for example, max client reached, etc.) using NL80211_CMD_CONN_FAILED. This patch adds some debug messages whenever such an event is received from the nl80211 layer and also the same event is posted to the upper layer via wpa_msg(). Signed-off-by: Raja Mani <rmani@qca.qualcomm.com>
2013-02-07 14:24:53 +01:00
case EVENT_CONNECT_FAILED_REASON:
#ifdef CONFIG_AP
if (!wpa_s->ap_iface || !data)
break;
hostapd_event_connect_failed_reason(
wpa_s->ap_iface->bss[0],
data->connect_failed_reason.addr,
data->connect_failed_reason.code);
#endif /* CONFIG_AP */
break;
mesh: Add mesh mode routines Add routines to (de)initialize mesh interface data structures and join and leave mesh networks. Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name> Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <thomas@noack.us>
2014-09-01 06:23:21 +02:00
case EVENT_NEW_PEER_CANDIDATE:
mesh: Fix segmentation fault by repeating MESH_GROUP_ADD/REMOVE Signed-off-by: Natsuki Itaya <Natsuki.Itaya@jp.sony.com> Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
2014-11-15 02:35:29 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_MESH
if (!wpa_s->ifmsh || !data)
break;
mesh: Add mesh mode routines Add routines to (de)initialize mesh interface data structures and join and leave mesh networks. Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name> Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <thomas@noack.us>
2014-09-01 06:23:21 +02:00
wpa_mesh_notify_peer(wpa_s, data->mesh_peer.peer,
data->mesh_peer.ies,
data->mesh_peer.ie_len);
mesh: Fix segmentation fault by repeating MESH_GROUP_ADD/REMOVE Signed-off-by: Natsuki Itaya <Natsuki.Itaya@jp.sony.com> Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
2014-11-15 02:35:29 +01:00
#endif /* CONFIG_MESH */
mesh: Add mesh mode routines Add routines to (de)initialize mesh interface data structures and join and leave mesh networks. Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name> Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <thomas@noack.us>
2014-09-01 06:23:21 +02:00
break;
Handle survey event properly in wpa_supplicant Let's reuse hostapd code for such handling. This will be useful to get ACS support into wpa_supplicant where this one needs to handle the survey event so it fills in the result ACS subsystem will require. Signed-off-by: Tomasz Bursztyka <tomasz.bursztyka@linux.intel.com> [u.oelmann@pengutronix.de: rebased series from hostap_2_1~944 to master] Signed-off-by: Ulrich Ölmann <u.oelmann@pengutronix.de>
2015-11-27 12:40:36 +01:00
case EVENT_SURVEY:
#ifdef CONFIG_AP
if (!wpa_s->ap_iface)
break;
hostapd_event_get_survey(wpa_s->ap_iface,
&data->survey_results);
#endif /* CONFIG_AP */
break;
wpa_supplicant: Enable Automatic Channel Selection support for AP mode Since hostapd supports ACS now, let's enable its support in wpa_supplicant as well when starting AP mode. Signed-off-by: Tomasz Bursztyka <tomasz.bursztyka@linux.intel.com> [u.oelmann@pengutronix.de: rebased series from hostap_2_1~944 to master] [u.oelmann@pengutronix.de: adjusted added text in defconfig] Signed-off-by: Ulrich Ölmann <u.oelmann@pengutronix.de>
2015-11-27 12:40:37 +01:00
case EVENT_ACS_CHANNEL_SELECTED:
#ifdef CONFIG_ACS
if (!wpa_s->ap_iface)
break;
hostapd_acs_channel_selected(wpa_s->ap_iface->bss[0],
&data->acs_selected_channels);
#endif /* CONFIG_ACS */
break;
P2P: Allow P2P listen being offloaded to the driver/firmware This allows P2P Listen to be offloaded to device to enhance power saving. To start P2P listen offload, from wpa_cli interface, issue the command: p2p_lo_start <freq> <period> <interval> <count> To stop P2P listen offload, issue the command: p2p_lo_stop Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2016-06-24 20:36:18 +02:00
case EVENT_P2P_LO_STOP:
#ifdef CONFIG_P2P
wpa_s->p2p_lo_started = 0;
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_INFO, P2P_EVENT_LISTEN_OFFLOAD_STOP
P2P_LISTEN_OFFLOAD_STOP_REASON "reason=%d",
data->p2p_lo_stop.reason_code);
#endif /* CONFIG_P2P */
break;
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
default:
Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf() This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages. A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 19:14:46 +01:00
wpa_msg(wpa_s, MSG_INFO, "Unknown event %d", event);
Re-initialize hostapd/wpa_supplicant git repository based on 0.6.3 release
2008-02-28 02:34:43 +01:00
break;
}
}
Find correct driver for interface additions/removals Interface additions/removals are not guaranteed to be for the driver listening to the kernel events. As such, send the events to wpa_supplicant_event_global() which can then pick the correct interface registered with wpa_supplicant to send the event to. Signed-off-by: Roy Marples <roy@marples.name>
2016-03-15 14:02:08 +01:00
void wpa_supplicant_event_global(void *ctx, enum wpa_event_type event,
union wpa_event_data *data)
{
struct wpa_supplicant *wpa_s;
if (event != EVENT_INTERFACE_STATUS)
return;
wpa_s = wpa_supplicant_get_iface(ctx, data->interface_status.ifname);
if (wpa_s && wpa_s->driver->get_ifindex) {
unsigned int ifindex;
ifindex = wpa_s->driver->get_ifindex(wpa_s->drv_priv);
if (ifindex != data->interface_status.ifindex) {
wpa_dbg(wpa_s, MSG_DEBUG,
"interface status ifindex %d mismatch (%d)",
ifindex, data->interface_status.ifindex);
return;
}
}
Add interface matching support with -M, guarded by CONFIG_MATCH_IFACE The new wpa_supplicant command line argument -M can be used to describe matching rules with a wildcard interface name (e.g., "wlan*"). This is very useful for systems without udev (Linux) or devd (FreeBSD). Signed-off-by: Roy Marples <roy@marples.name>
2016-03-15 14:40:14 +01:00
#ifdef CONFIG_MATCH_IFACE
else if (data->interface_status.ievent == EVENT_INTERFACE_ADDED) {
struct wpa_interface *wpa_i;
wpa_i = wpa_supplicant_match_iface(
ctx, data->interface_status.ifname);
if (!wpa_i)
return;
wpa_s = wpa_supplicant_add_iface(ctx, wpa_i, NULL);
os_free(wpa_i);
if (wpa_s)
wpa_s->matched = 1;
}
#endif /* CONFIG_MATCH_IFACE */
Find correct driver for interface additions/removals Interface additions/removals are not guaranteed to be for the driver listening to the kernel events. As such, send the events to wpa_supplicant_event_global() which can then pick the correct interface registered with wpa_supplicant to send the event to. Signed-off-by: Roy Marples <roy@marples.name>
2016-03-15 14:02:08 +01:00
if (wpa_s)
wpa_supplicant_event(wpa_s, event, data);
}
Reference in a new issue Copy permalink